SIMODRIVE 611 Analog System Transistor PWM Inverters For AC Feed Drives and AC Main Spindle Drives

SIMODRIVE 611 Analog System
Transistor PWM Inverters for

AC Feed Drives and
AC Main Spindle Drives
Installation and Startup Guide
Service Documentation
04.97 Edition
Foreword
SIMODRIVE 611 Analog System

Transistor PWM Inverters for
AC Feed Drives and
AC Main Spindle Drives
StartUp Guide
Service Documentation
General information
AL
Supply infeed
N
E
Feed modules
Feed modules,
resolver control
Equipment series 6SN11
04.97 Edition
V
R
Main spindle modules
Induction motor modules
AM
Spare parts
ES
Complete index
Valid for
VS
Overview of SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FMNC Documentation (08.97)

General Documentation
840D/810D/
FMNC
Brochure
User
SINUMERIK
SIROTEC
SIMODRIVE
SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK
User Documentation
840D/810
FM
NC/611
C
O
rT
e
alog
ering Info.
NC Info.
hnical
N
c mentatio
n
SINUMERIK
Accessorie
s
Catalog
Accessorie
s
60.
60.
2
INUMERIK
840D/810D/
FMNC
AUTOTURN
Short Guide
Programming (Part
1)
Setup (Part 2)
C
Z
SINUMERIK
840D/810
FMNC
840D/810D/
FMNC
Operators Guide
Unit Operator
Panel
HPU
Diagnostics
Guide
Manufacturer / Service Documentation
D
SINUMERIK
SINUM
E
840D/
81
FM
NC
840D/810
D/
FMNC
O erators
hort
perators
Gu
e
e
Manu
Program
Short
Fundame
Cycles
Measurin
rer /
Servi
IK
D/
INUMERIK
840D/8
FM
NC
Manual
Configuring (H
FMNC
810D
840D
c
Manuf t
SINUMERI
840D/810D
K
Description of
Functions
Tool Management
Manual
Operato
r
Compo
(HW)
rer /
Servi
e Opera
SHOP
ng
e
tal
s
SINUMERIK
810
D
Guide
LTURN
ILL
e
Do
Description of
Functio
MANUALTURN
SHOPMILL
IK
D/
ts
e
Do
SINUMERIK
611D
840D/810D
Description of
Functions
Computer LInk
INUMERIK
40D/810D/
MNC
Descripti of
Functions
Drive
ion
Func
s
40D/810D/
MNC
Description of
Functions
Basic
Extended
Special Functions
840D/810D/
FMNC
SINUMERIK
Configuring
MMC100/10
1 Configuring
Development
ta
it
Screen Kit
MMC100/101
SW Update and
Configuration
umentation
SIMODRIVE
SINUMERIK
840D/810D
Description of
Description of
Functions
Functions
SINUMERIK
Digitizing
Safety Integrated
SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE
DOC ON CD
The SINUMERIK System
SIMODRI
SINUMERIK
IMODRIVE
INUMERIK
840D
Description of
Description of
Functions
Functions
Operator Interface Operator Interface
HPU
OP 030
3ls
840D/810D
Description
Functio
Synchrono
us
actions
Wood, Glass,
Ceramics
INUMERI
SIMODR E
I
SINUME
K
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/
FMNC
SINUMERIK
umentation
Electronic Documentation
840D/810D/
FMNC
611, Motors
SINUMERI
K
840D/810D
FMNC
Cycles
f
SINUM
SINUME
R
810D
documentation
Installation &
Start-up Guide
810D
840D/611D
SIMODRIV
SINUMERI
840D/81
FMNC
611D
Lists
Edition coding
Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below
The status of each edition is shown by the code in the Remarks column.
Status code in the Remarks column:
A..
B..
C..
New documentation.
Unrevised reprint with new Order No.
Revised edition with new status
If factual changes have been made on the page since the last edition,
this is indicated by a new edition coding in the header on that page.
07.94
10.94
6SN11970AA600BP0
6SN11970AA600BP1
12.94
6SN11970AA600BP2
03.96
6SN11970AA600BP3
04.97
6SN11970AA600BP4
Dieses Buch ist Bestandteil der Dokumentation auf CDROM (DOCONCD)

09.97
6FC5 1986CA000AG0 (840C Read)
09.97
6FC5 1986CB000AG0 (840C Print)
09.97
6FC5 1986CC000AG0 (840C Net)
09.97
6FC5 2984CA000AG0 (840D Read)
09.97
6FC5 2984CB000AG0 (840D Print)
09.97
6FC5 2984CC000AG0 (840D Net)
Functions may be executable in the control but are not described in

this documentation. No claims can be made on these functions if
included with a new shipment or when involved with service.
This publication was produced on Interleaf V 5.4

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its
contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders
will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent
grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.
Siemens AG 1994, 1996, 1997 All Rights reserved.
We have checked the contents of this document to ensure that they

coincide with the described hardware and software. The information
in this document is regularly checked and necessary corrections are
included in reprints. We are thankful for any recommendations for
improvement.
Subject to change without prior notice.
Order No. 6SN11970AA600BP4

Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
SiemensAktiengesellschaft
Siemens AG 1997 All Rights reserved

SIMODRIVE 611A I
l
dS
U G id /IAA/ 04 97 Edi i
l
i
07.94
Definitions
Qualified personal
For the purpose of these Instructions and product labels, a qualified person is
someone who is familiar with the installation, mounting, startup and operation
of the equipment and the hazards involved. He or she must have the following
qualifications:
Trained and authorized to energize, deenergize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety procedures.
Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance
with established safety procedures.
Trained in rendering first aid.
Danger
This symbol in the document indicates death, severe personal injury or
substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
This symbol appears in the document, if death, severe personal injury or
perty damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
This symbol appears in the document indicating that minor personal injury
material damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Wichtig
This symbol appears in the documentation if a particular issue is significant.
Note
For the purposes of these Instructions, Note indicates information about
product or the respective part of the Instruction Manual which is essential to
highlight.
ii
SIMODRIVE 611A Installation and StartUp Guide/IAA/04.97 Edition
07.94
Warning
Operational electrical equipment has parts and components which are at
zardous voltage levels.
Incorrect handling of these units, i. e. not observing the warning information,
can therefore lead to death, severe bodily injury or significant material
damage.
Only appropriately qualified personal may commission/startup this
equipment.
This personal must have indepth knowledge regarding all of the warning
mation and service measures according to this Manual.
Perfect, save and reliable operation of this equipment assumes that it has
professionally transported, stored, mounted and installed as well as careful
operator control and service.
Hazardous axis motion can occur when working with the equipment.
Note
When handling cables observe the following
they must not be damaged
they must not be strained and
they must not come into contact with rotating components.
Note
It is not permissible to connect SIMODRIVE equipment to a supply system
ELCBs (this restriction is permitted according to DIN VDE 0160, Section
When operational, protection against direct contact is provided in a form to
low the unit to be used in enclosed electrical equipment rooms (DIN VDE
Part 1 / 07.87, Section 5.4.3.2.4).
In compliance with DIN VDE 0160 / 05.88, all SIMODRIVE units are subject
a highvoltage test at the time of routine testing. If the electrical equipment
of
industrial tools is subject to a highvoltage test, all connections must be
nected
discon-so that sensitive electronic components in the SIMODRIVE converter
are not damage (permissible according to DIN VDE 0113 / 06.93, Part 1,
tion 20.4).
Warning
Startup/commissioning is absolutely prohibited until it has been ensured
the machine in which the components described here are to be installed,
the regulations/specifications of the Directive 89/392/EWG.

iii
07.94
Warning
The information and instructions in all of the documentation supplied and
other instructions must always be observed to eliminate hazardous
situations and damage.
For special versions of the machines and equipment, the information in
the
associated catalogs and quotations applies.
Further, all of the relevant national, local and plant/systemspecific
regulations and specifications must be taken into account.
All work should be undertaken with the system in a novoltage
condition!
iv
Warning
Before commissioning 611D, it should be checked that the encoder cable
not have a ground fault.
If ground faults occur, for loads which exert a force on the drive, uncontrolled
movement could occur.
This no longer occurs for 6SN11180D 2 0AA0, Version B.

07.94
ESD information
Electro Static Devices

Components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge are
components, integrated circuits, or boards, which when handled, tested, or
transported, could be destroyed by electrostatic fields or electrostatic discharge. These components are designated as ESDS (ElectroStatic
Sensitive Devices).
Handling ESDS boards:
The human body, working area and packing should be well grounded
when
handling ESDS components!
Electronic boards should only be touched when absolutely necessary.
Components may only be touched, if
you are continuously grounded through an ESDS wristlet,
you are wearing ESDS shoes or ESDS shoe grounding strips in conjunction with an ESDS floor surface.
Boards may only be placed on conductive surfaces

(desk with ESDS surface, conductive ESDS foam rubber, ESDS packing
bag, ESDS transport containers).
Boards may not be brought close to data terminals, monitors or television
sets (a minimum of 10 cm should be kept between the board and the
screen).
Boards may not be brought into contact with materials which can be chargedup and which are highly insulating, e. g. plastic foils, insulating desktops, articles of clothing manufactured from manmade fibers.
Measuring work may only be carried out on the boards if
the measuring equipment is grounded (e. g. via the protective

tor) or
for floating measuring equipment, the probe is briefly discharged

making measurements (e. g. a bare control housing is touched).
Only hold the control modules at the front panel
Note
Startup software is available for startingup/commissioning the main
and induction motor modules.
Startup software Order No.: 6SN11532AX10 AB
Documentation Order No.: 6SN11970AA300 P

07.94
SINUMERIK and SIMODRIVE

Enhanced productivity as a result of fast, reliable commissioning
Handling
Sophisticated industrial electronics, as are involved here, have to be handled

especially carefully. We regularly evaluate and investigate equipment which is
returned and in so doing we have identified some of the main fault causes,
which in some cases results from incorrect handling during commissioning and
troubleshooting.
Check list
The following check list should help you to simply commission the components
we have supplied and guarantee a high availability when used in conjunction
with your product or equipment.
Observe all of the ESD measures when handling components.
Tightenup all bolts and screws to the specified torque. Pay special attention to the DC link bolt connections (1.8 Nm tightening torque).
Correctly insert all connectors and lock/screw into place.
Screw the control components into the power module.
Observe the poweron sequence in the Planning Guide.
If the unit is frequently powereddown and up, the DC link charge circuit is
lockedout. The DC link can only be charged again after it has cooled down
for several minutes with the supply off.
Are there line supply/motor contactors connected to the drive converter?
These are only switched in a nocurrent condition.
Ground all components and connect all of the shields. Connection X131 is
grounded.
Observe the load capability of the central power supply.
Only discharge the unit at the DC link buses through a minimum of 10
In operation, units with hard disks may only be stressed with a of max. 1 g
(read/write error; defective).
Use the correct software for the particular unit.
Are OEM components (ISA/PCMCIA card) used? Their current drain must
lie within the specified values.
CRT monitors may not be subject to magnetic fields (e.g. power supply unit
coils).
When commissioning and fault finding, always proceed in a modular step
bystep fashion.This means: First commission the central controller and line
supply module, then connectup and commission the components one after
another.
vi

07.94
The units are designed for the specified mechanical, climatic and electrical
ambient conditions. None of the limit values may be exceeded, neither in
operation nor during transport. Please pay specific attention to the following:
line supply conditions

pollutants
damaging gases
climatic ambient conditions
storage/transport
shock stressing
vibration stressing
ambient temperature
Further
information
Further detailed information is provided in the Planning Guides and Installation

Startup Guides associated with our products.

vii
07.94
viii

AL
General information (AL)

1
Permissible combinations of inverter modules

and control cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
....

AL/1-3
ALi
07.94
AL
ALii
07.94

1 Permissible combinations of inverter modules and control modules

General (AL)
AL/1-3
AL
Permissible combinations of inverter

modules and control cards
Table 1-1
Selection table to set the current controller referred to the resulting inverter currents
Feed/main spindle controls with analog setpoint interface
SIMODRIVE 611
components
F 1
F
Parameter board, feed

drive, analog user
friendly
necessar
6SN11140AA010AA0
Main spindle option, feed

drive, analog, user
friendly
F 1
_____
_____
possible
_____
F 2
6
n
6
d
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
IM:
IM:
3/3/3 A
3/3/3 A
IM:
IM:
5/5/8 A
5/5/8 A
_____
IM:
8/10/16A
IM:
8/10/16A
_____
IM:
8/10/16A
2
_____
6SN11140AA020AA
8A inverter module
6SN112 1AA0 0HA
15A inverter module
6SN112 1AA0 0AA
25A inverter module
6SN112 1AA0 0BA
50A inverter module
6SN112 1AA0 0CA
80A inverter module
6SN112 1AA0 0DA
120A inverter module
FD:
FD:
4/8A
4/8A
FD:
FD:
7.5/15A
7.5/15A
FD:
12.5/25A
FD:
12.5/25A
_____
FDR:
9/18A
_____
FD:
FD:
_____
FDR:
_____
25/50A
25/50A
FD:
FD:
40/80A
40/80A
_____
FDR:
_____
3/6A
_____
FDR:
_____
_____
_____
_____
5/10A
18/36A
_____
FDR:
_____
28/56A
_____
_____
_____
IM:
3/3/3 A
_____
IM:
5/5/8 A
MSD:
MSD:
MSD:
IM:
IM:
MSD:
IM:
24/32/32A
24/32/32A
24/32/32A
24/32/32A
24/32/32A
24/32/32A
24/32/32A
MSD:
MSD:
MSD:
IM:
IM:
MSD:
IM:
30/40/51A
30/40/51A
30/40/51A
30/40/51A
30/40/51A
30/40/51A
30/40/51A
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
MSD:
45/60/76A
MSD:
45/60/76A
MSD:
45/60/76A
IM:
45/60/76A
IM:
45/60/76A
MSD:
45/60/76A
IM:
45/60/76A
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
MSD:
MSD:
MSD:
IM:
IM:
MSD:
IM:
45/60/76A
45/60/76A
45/60/76A
45/60/76A
45/60/76A
45/60/76A
45/60/76A
MSD:
60/80/
102A
MSD:
60/80/
102A
MSD:
60/80/
102A
IM:
60/80/
102A
IM:
60/80/
102A
MSD:
60/80/
102A
IM:
60/80/
102A
MSD:
85/111/
127A
MSD:
85/111/
127A
MSD:
85/111/
127A
IM:
85/111/
127A
IM:
85/111/
127A
MSD:
85/111/
127A
IM:
85/111/
127A
6SN112 1AA0 0GA

6SN112 1AA0 0LA
6SN112 1AA0 0EA
FD:
FD:
80/160A
80/160A
FD:
100/200A
FD:
100/200A
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
6SN112 1AA0 0FA


General (AL)
07.94
AL
Table 1-1
Selection table to set the current controller referred to the resulting inverter currents
Vorsc ub/Hauptspndelregelung n mit analog r Sollwertsch ittstelle
SIMODRIVE 611
components
F 1

pipe connection
FD:
100/200A
FD:
100/200A
6SN112 1AA0 0FA

_____
_____
_____
MSD:
85/110/12
7A
MSD:
85/110/12
7A
MSD:
85/110/12
7A
IM:
85/110/12
7A
IM:
85/110/12
7A
IM:
85/110/12
7A
IM:
85/110/12
7A
_____
MSD:
n
120/150/1
93A
MSD:
120/150/1
d
93A
MSD:
e
120/150/1
93A
IM:
F
120/150/1
93A
IM:
120/150/1
a
93A
IM:
120/150/1
93A
IM:
120/150/1
93A
_____
MSD:
200/250/2
57A
MSD:
200/250/2
57A
MSD:
200/250/2
57A
IM:
200/250/2
57A
IM:
200/250/2
57A
IM:
200/250/2
57A
IM:
200/250/2
57A
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
6SN112 1AB0 0CA
_____
FD:
2x4/8A
_____
FDR:
2x3/6A
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
FD:
_____
FDR:
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
2x7.5/15A
_____
_____
6SN112 1AB0 0BA

2x50A inverter module
_____
6SN112 1AB0 0AA0

_____
6SN112 1AB0 0HA0

_____
6SN112 1AA0 0KA0

6SN112 1AA0 0JA

_____
_____
2x5/10A
FD:
2x12.5/25
A
_____
FD:
2x25/50A
_____
FDR:
2x9/18A
FDR:
2x18/36A
This StartUp Guide is valid for the following

drive modules:
AL/1-4
07.94
6SN11301AA110 A0
1axis feed drive module, userfriendly interface
6SN11301AA120 A0
1axis feed drive module, userfriendly interface

with main spindle drive option
6SN11301AD110 A0
1axis feed drive module, standard interface
6SN11301AE110 A0
2axis feed drive module, standard interface
6SN11351BA1 0 A0
MSD module
6SN11401BA1 0 A0
IM module


General (AL)
AL
Note
The document describes all of the steps necessary to commission an
SIMODRIVE drive group. Please refer to the associated Planning Guides for
additional technical information, e.g. regarding
ambient conditions
recommended circuits
connecting diagrams
dimension sheets/dimension drawings
Please refer to the associate Planning Guide:
SIMODRIVE 611
Transistor PWM Inverters for AC Feed Drives and AC Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN11970AA000 P
SIMODRIVE
AC Motors for Feed and Main Spindle Drives
Order No.: 6SN11970AA200 P
AL/1-5

General (AL)
07.94
AL
AL/1-6

Supply infeed (NE)

NE
1
2
3
Standard settings, NE modules (UE and I/R modules), monitoring and

pulsed resistor
.........................................
modules
.....
Maintenance and
.....................................
diagnostics
....
2.1
Terminals and relay
..............................
functions
....
Appen
......................................................
dix
......
3.1
Connecting terminals NE, monitoring and pulsed resistor
..
modules
3.2
Connecting terminals, UE module 5/10
....................
kW
..

NE/1-3
NE/2-7
NE/2-8
NE/3-11
NE/3-12
NE/3-14
NEi
07.94
NE
1 Standard settings, NE modules, monitoring and pulsed resistor modules
NEii

Only possible for I/R modules, monitoring thresholds are increased for all NE modules
07.94
Supply infeed (NE)

NE/1-3
NE
Standard settings, NE modules (UE and

I/R modules), monitoring and pulsed resistor modules
Wichtig
Observe the information for sinusoidal current control for I/R modules!
A switch S1 is provided on the upper side of the NE and monitoring module to set the
lowing functions:
folS1
ON:
10
=41
%
5V
pp
Fault
message
V su
D
Cli
=62
5V
1
)
Regen. feedback 1)
off
+6%
V Su =4
10%
80 infeed
Controlled
ppl
off
Sinusoidal current control
1
2
3
OFF:
=415 1
0
Vsignal
pp
Ready
V su
DC
link
=60
0V
1
)
Regenerative feedback on
Standard, refer to S1.1

5
Control infeed
Squarewave current control
Standard setting
Fig.
DIL switch S1
1-1
Wichtig
For I/R modules Order No. 6SN114 1
0 0
1 the basic setting is for
sinusoidal control (closedloop). Observe the information/instructions, Page
NE13!
Wichtig
Before the equipment is poweredup or down using the main switch or a line
contactor,
terminal 63 (pulse enable) and/or terminal 48 (start terminal, contactor control) should
be
deenergized or disconnected!
1)


Supply infeed (NE)
Switch S 1.1 :
OFF:
ON:
I/R module su
10%; DC =600V
V
V
UE module su =400
10%; DC =1.3
supply
V
=400(I/R, V
5*Vmodules)
monitoring
thresholds:
UE, monitoring
pulsed resistor on =644V; pulsed resistor off =618V
V DC >> =710V;
I/R module su
10%; DC =625V
04.97
UE module su
10%; DC =1.3
supply
V
=415(I/R,VUE, monitoring
5*V modules)
Monitoring thresholds:
V DC >> =740V;
link
Switch S 1.2 :
OFF:
terminal 48
enabled)
ON:
terminal 48
enabled)
Switch S 1.3 :
OFF:
ON:
28kW)
Switch S 1.4 :
OFF:
ON:
Ready signal (X111 ready relay)

For S1.2=OFF, the relay switches if the following
conditions are fulfilled:
internal main contactor CLOSED (terminals NS1NS2 connected,
terminal 63,64=ENERGIZED
no fault present (also not on feed drive 611A Standard,
or 611D drives)
feed drive with standard interface or resolver for setting
Ready is enabled (terminals 663,65)
Fault message (X111 ready relay)
For S1.2=ON, the relay switches if the following
conditions are fulfilled:
internal main contactor CLOSED (terminals NS1NS2 connected,

or 611D drives)
feed drive with standard interface or resolver for setting
ready is enabled (terminals 663,65);
Standard setting, regenerative feedback active

I/R modules are capable of regenerative feedback
UE modules: The pulsed resistor in the module is effective
Regenerative feedback switchedout (disabled)
I/R module: Regenerative feedback operation is inhibited
UE modules: The pulsed resistor in the module is not
effective
Comment: This function is only effective for UE 10 kW from
MLFB (Order No.): 6SN11461AC000AA1 (however, not for UE
Standard setting for all NE modules, refer to S1.1

V su
=1.3
in the infeed direction
=480V+6%
DC
su
5*V
Monitoring
(I/R, UE, monitoring
modules)
10%;thresholds:
V
V DC >> =795V.
link
Comment: Uncontrolled operation in the infeed direction.

(only valid for Order No. 6SN114 1
0 0
NE/1-4
07.94


Supply infeed (NE)
In the sinusoidal line supply filters,

Note contrary to the squarewave current filter modules, there is no HF commutating
Switch S 1.5 :
Only in conjunction with power modules, Order No. (6SN114

0 0
1).
1 motors with shaft height <100: Utilization max. up to 60 k values. Please observe
For
the
Planning Guide, Motors.
S1.4 ON overwrites the functions of S1.5 and S1.1 .
This function is only available in conjunction with I/R modules
Switch S 1.6 :
NE/1-5
NE
Order No. :6SN114 1

0 0
1
Standard setting, controlled infeed active.
OFF:
ON:
Uncontrolled operation in the infeed direction DC =1.3

supply
V
Regenerative feedback operation is initiated at V DC 5*V
link=600 or
625V
depending on the setting of S1.1 .
OFF:
Squarewave current control (squarewave current is drawn from

line supply)
the
ON:
This function is only available in conjunction with I/R modules

6SN114 1
0
1
0 control (sinusoidal current is drawn from the line
Sinusoidal current
supply)
Sinusoidal current is only permissible if the following secondary conditions are

fulfilled :
I/R
16 kW
I/R
36 kW
I/R
55 kW
I/R
80 kW
I/R
120 kW
6SN114
1B 010BA1
6SN114
1B 020CA1
6SN114
1B 0 0DA1
6SN114
1BB000EA1
6SN114
1BB010FA1
HF reactor
16 kW
HF reactor
36 kW
HF reactor
55 kW
HF reactor
80kW
HF reactor
120kW
6SN1111
0AA000BA0
6SN1111
0AA000CA0
6SN1111
0AA000DA0
6SN1111
0AA001EA0
6SN1111
0AA001FA0
Line filter for

sinusoidal
current
16 kW
6SN1111
0AA012BA0
1
)
Line filter for

sinusoidal
current
36 kW
6SN1111
0AA012CA0
1
)
Line filter for

sinusoidal
current
55 kW
6SN1111
0AA012DA0
1
)
Line filter for

sinusoidal
current
80 kW
6SN1111
0AA012EA0
1
)
Line filter for

sinusoidal
current
120 kW
6SN1111
0AA012FA0
1
)
Wichtig
For all of the combinations not listed here, only squarewave current control is
permissible.
1)
reactor. The HF commutating reactor must be separately mounted.


Supply infeed (NE)
04.97
NE
2 Service and diagnostics
terminals U1, V1, W1) 1)
NE/1-6
07.94

Line supply fault is identified for a threephase voltage < 280V.
Supply infeed (NE)
Service and diagnostics
NE
NE/2-7
Display elements of the monitoring and NE modules
1
3
1 LED, red
2 LED, red
3 LED green
4 LED yellow
5 LED, red
6 LED red
15 V electronics power supply faulted

5 V voltage level faulted
external enable signals not available
(terminal 63 and/or terminal 64 missing)
DC link charged
line supply fault (single or multiphase supply failure at the
commutating reactor either not available or incorrectly selected,
fault level of the line supply or transformer too low
DC link overvoltage
possible causes: Regenerative feedback off, settingup operation,
line supply fault, for UE pulsedresistor not operational, line supply
voltage too high, dynamic overload condition
Effects:
1 red LED bright: Pulses for the complete drive group are canceled
4 yellow LED dark:
xxxx
5 red LED bright: 1) Only the I/R module pulses are canceled (regenerative feedback
no longer possible. Axes first continue to run. Ready relay dropsout
1)
Line supply fault identification time approx. 30ms

For 1phase supply failure, the drive axes pulses are canceled after approx. 1 min.
(latched signal) valid for Order No. 6SN1114 1
0 0
1

04.97
2.1 Terminal and relay functions

Supply infeed (NE)
2.1
NE
Terminals and relay functions

X111: READY RELAY:
terminals 72 73.1: NO contact
terminals 73.2 74: NC contact
in the quiescent state

For S1.2=OFF, the relay switches if the following conditions are fulfilled:
internal main contactor CLOSED (terminals NS1NS2 connected, terminal 48 enabled)
terminals 63, 64 =ENERGIZED
or 611D drives)
feed drive with Standard interface or resolver is enabled for the ready setting (terminals
663, 65)
For S1.2=ON, the relay switches if the following conditions are fulfilled:
internal main contactor CLOSED (terminal NS1NS2 connected, terminal 48 enabled)
no fault present (also not on feed drive 611A Standard, and 611D drives)
feed drive with Standard interface or resolver enabled for this ready setting
(terminals 663, 65).
X121 t_alarm and motor overtemperature:
:I
terminal
5.1 5.2: NO contact
terminal 5.1 5.3: NC contact
This relay switches, if:
> heatsink temperature monitoring responds at the I/R

the
> motor temperature monitoring responds at the 611D feed drive

the
> heatsink temperature monitoring responds
at the feed drive 611A userfriendly
> motor temperature monitoring responds
> ttemperature monitoring responds (nonlatching)
at 611A Standard
> Motor temperature monitoring responds
X171: Terminal NS1NS2 (coil circuit of the internal line supply and precharging contactor):
is used to electrically isolate from the line supply
(signal contact, terminals 111213 must be interrogated)
may only be switched if terminal 48 is opencircuit (without any restriction from
Order No. 6SN114 1
0
for 10, 16 and 55kW, from
Order No. 6SN114 1
for 36kW, all 80 and 120kW)
1
0
2
terminal 48: Start

has the highest priority
Sequence: Precharging ON
310V
50V
DC
DC
su
interrogation
V
V
2
linkOUT,and
link whether
pp
> 500ms
precharging contactor
interrogation
OUT, main contactor IN

>1s internal enable signals (for I/R and module group)
saved during precharging
terminal 63: Pulse enable

has the highest priority for pulse enable of all the modules
acts instantaneously (without delay)
Terminal 64: Drive enable
acts instantaneously on all modules
when the signal is
s is set to 0 for all drives, and
withdrawn,>nfor main spindle drivee / induction motor module 611 A, the pulses are canceled
after a speed, which can be set, is fallen below. The drive is braked
along the ramp.

NE/2-8
07.94

Supply infeed (NE)
> for feed drives 611 A, after the selected timer stages have expired
(as supplied: 240ms) all of the controllers and pulses are inhibited. The drive
brakes along the current limit.
>
for
611D drives, the pulses are deleted after a selectable speed has
N
been fallen below and/or a time which can be set, has expired. The
drive brakes along the set limits. (For
spindles, a ramp can be achieved via regenerative limiting [kW])
NE
terminal N
112: Settingup operation (V min
3ph. 24V AC or 34 V DC)
the V DC link closedloop control is inhibited
regenerative feedback is not possible, i.e. when braking, V
DC can
link be >600V!
this function is interrogated with the start inhibit signal, terminal AS1AS2.
Caution
4 A, type gL
For induction motors, even for

low V
DC
high speeds can be reached!
link,
terminals AS1AS2: start inhibit signal

terminals AS1AS2 closed means start inhibit is effective (settingup operation)
1.5 A (motor protection circuitbreaker)
NE/2-9
terminals 111, 113, 213: signal contact, internal line contactor

terminals 111 113: NO contact
terminals 111 213: NC contact (for I/R 16kW and UE 10kW only from
Order No. 6SN114 1
010
)
terminal 19: FR:
reference ground, enable voltage
floating (connected to the general reference ground, terminal 15 via 10k)
it is not permissible to connect terminal 19 with terminal 15 (connect to PE rail or X131)
terminal 9: FR+:
24V enable voltage
max. oad capability of the power supply:500mA (corresponds to 8 slots;1 optocoupler nput
requires 12mA)
X 141: electronic voltages:
terminal 7:
P24
+20.4 to 28.8V / 50mA
terminal 45:
P15
+15V / 10mA
terminal 44:
N15
15V / 10mA
terminal 10:
N24
20.4 to 28.8V / 50mA
terminal 15:
M
0V
it is not permissible to connect terminal 15 to PE (ground loop)
it is not permissible to connect terminal 15 with terminal 19
(shortcircuit via reactor, which internally connects terminal 15 with X131)
terminal L1L2 for 80kW and 120kW I/R
is used to supply the coil of the internal line contactor
is supplied directly at the line supply with 2ph. 400V AC (not between I/R and reactor)
fuse: I
Fan connection for 80 and 120kW I/R
3ph. 360 to 510V AC , 4565 Hz directly at the ine supply (not between the I/R and reactor)
observe the rotating field (phase sequence)!
fuse: I

04.97
Supply infeed (NE)
NE
6 conductor connection with additional connection of the power supply at the DC

link:
for this operating mode, terminals 2U1, 2V1 and 2W1 of the power supply
must be supplied with the line supply voltage between the series reactor and I/R,
otherwise the power supply will be destroyed! This is also valid for the monitoring modules!
Monitoring module with ine supply connection and additional connection of the power supply to the DC link:
for this operating mode, terminals 2U1, 2V1 and 2W1 of the power supply
must be supplied with the line supply voltage between the series reactor and I/R,
as otherwise the power supply will be destroyed.
terminal 63 must be switched via the ready relay of the I/R
in order to prevent the module, to the right of the monitoring module,
starting during precharging.
Diagnostic instructions
If a line supply fault is displayed or if the yellow LED is dark, the overvoltage limiting module
must be checked.
Procedure:
1. Powerdown the drive converter (into a novoltage condition)

2. Remove the overvoltage limiting module and insert connector X181 on the NE module.
If the NE module functions, then the overvoltage limiting module is defect and must be
replaced.
Otherwise, check the line supply and if required, also the NE module/drive group.
Note
In this way, operation can be continued, but without overvoltage protection.
3. Insert the overvoltage limiting module 566018.9415.00 up to its end stop, and insert
connector X181 on the overvoltage limiting module.

NE/2-10
07.94
3.1 Connecting terminals NE, monitoring and pulsed resistor modules

Supply infeed (NE)
Appendix
Note
When using nonPELV circuits at terminals AS1, AS2, terminal 111, terminal 113,
terminal
213, connector coding must be used to prevent the connector being interchanged
to EN 602041 Section 6.4) refer to Catalog NC 60.1 for the Order No. of the coding
(refer
connector. Only PELV circuits may be connected at terminal 19.
NE
NE/3-11

Supply infeed (NE)
3.1
NE
Connecting terminals NE, monitoring and pulsed

resistor modules
Table 3-1
Term
No.
U
V
1
W
1
L
L
2
P
P60
0
M60
0
04.97
Terminal functions
Desi
gnation
Typ
e
Typ. voltage/limit values
Max. crosssection
Supply
3ph. 400 V AC
Refer to the Planning Guide
Supply connection
for contactor
I
I
2ph. 400 V AC dir. at supply

L1, L2, L3, refer to Sec. 9.2
Protective conductor
DC link
DC link
I
I/O
I/O
0V
+300 V
300 V
16m
16m
m
Function
1)
/
/
10
Bolt
Busbar
Busbar
2
4)
2
4)
Terminals available 3)
in
I/R, UE
I/R120/156
80/104 kW
kW,
I/R, UE, MM, PR
Grounding
bar
P60
M60
0
1R
2R
,3
R
I/O
300 V
DC link
DC link
I
I
+300 V
300 V
Internal resistor connection
I/O
X131
Electronics M
I/O
0V
X351
Equipment bus
I/O
Various
M50
X181
P50
X181
01U
2U
1
1V
1
2V
1
1W
1
2W
1
7
4
5
4
4
1
0
1
5R
X181
X181
X181
X181
X181
X181
5.
5.
2
5.
6
9
9
6
1
9
X121
X121
X121
X121
X121
X121
X121
NE/3-12
5)
X141
X141
X141
X141
X141
X141
DC link power
supply
DC link power
supply
Output L1
Input L1
Output L2
Input L2
Output L3
Input L3
P24
P15
N15
N24
M
RES 6)
ET
Relay contacts
Group message
t/motor
Pulsetemp. 2
2
Enable
28
Enable
voltage
voltage
2
Drive
enable
Enable voltage, reference potential
Busbar
I/R, UE
2
/
4)
2
/
4)
10
2
/
4)
10
mm
2
16m /
4)
mRibbon10cable
16m
16m
m
16m
m
300 V
600 V DC
1.5
600 V DC
1.5
O
I
O
I
O
I
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC
2
2
2
2
2
2
O
O
O
O
O
I
+20.4...28.8 V/50 mA
+15 V/10 mA
15 V/10 mA
20.4...28.8 V/50 mA
0V
Term.15
= 10 k
E
/R
50 V DC/0.5 A/12 VA max
5 V DC/3 mA min
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
NC
NO
I
I
A
A
I
+13 V...30
+24 V
V/R V
+24
+13 V...30
0V
= 1.5 k
= 1.5 k
2
2
2
2
2
2
MM
PR
I/R, UE, MM
I/R, UE, MM, PR
I/R, UE, MM
I/R, UE, MM
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
I/R, UE, MM
07.94

Supply infeed (NE)
Table 3-1
Term
No.
.
Terminal functions
Desi
gnation
7
n
c
73.
2
73.
1n
c
7
2
9
11
2
X111
X111
X111
X111
X111
X111
4
11
1
21
3
11
X161
X161
X161
3
AS
AS
2
X161
X161
X161
Function
Typ
e
1)
NC
Relay contact
Ready signal
I
I
1ph. 250V AC/50V DC

/2A max
5V DC/3mA min
NO
2)8)
Enable
Settingup operation/
2
Standard
)
operation
2)
Contactor
control
Signaling contacts
Line contactor
Max. crosssection
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
O
I
+24 V
+21 V...30
V/R
I
I
NC
+13 V...30
= 1.5 k
+30 V/1 A (111113)
V/R
1ph. 250 V AC/50 V DC/
2 A max
17 V DC/3 mA min
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
7)
NO
= 1.5 k
2
2
2
2
I/R, UE, MM
I/R, UE, MM
I/R, UE
2
2
I/R
I/R, UE
X172
X172
Signaling contact
Start inhibit (terminal112)
I
NC
250V AC/1A/50V DC/2A max

5 V DC/10 mA min
NS
NS
2
X171
X171
Coil contact for line,

precharging contactor
O
I
+24 V
1.5
1.5
mm
2
2
X221
0V
1.5
X221
Enable voltage
Reference potential
Control contact for
fast
discharge
0V
1.5
Terminals
ble 3)
availain
PR
mm
1) I = Input, O = Output, NC = NC contact, NO = NO contact (for signal: Closed= high/open= low)

2) Terminal 19 is the reference ground (is connected inside the module with 10 k to the general reference ground
X131/terminal 15). It is not
permissible to connect terminal 15 to PE or to terminal 19. Donot connect external voltage sources to terminal 15!
nal 19 can be
connected with X131.
3) I/R = infeed/regenerative feedback module;
UE = uncontrolled infeed;
monitoring module;
PW = pulsedresistor module
4)The 1st number is valid for cable lugs. The second number is valid for finelystranded conductors without
5)The grounding bar is used to ground the DC link M bus via 100 k(it should preferably always be
6)RESET = resets the fault memory, edge triggered for the complete drive group (terminal Rterminal 15 = RESET)
7) terminal 111213 positivelydriven NC contact (for I/R 16 kW and UE 10kW, only from MLFB (Order No.
6SN114 1
).
010
Terminal 111113, NO contact, not positively driven
8)max. current load of terminals 919: 0.5A

NE/3-13
NE
3.2 Connecting terminals, UE module 5/10 kW

Supply infeed (NE)
3.2
Connecting terminals, UE module 5/10 kW
Table 3-2
NE
Term.
No.
U
V
1
W
1
PE
PE
2
P60
M60
0
M50
P50
01U
1
2U
11V
1
2V
1
1W
2W
1
5.
5.
2
5.
1n
c
7
73.
73.
7
2
6
9
9
6
4R
1
9
11
21
3
9
11
24
8
NS
NS
1
5
04.97
Terminal functions
Ty
e 1
Designatio
n
X1
Supply
0V
X131
X351
Electronics M
Equipment bus
3)
Grounding
bar
I
I/O
I/O
0V
Various
300 V
M4 thread
34pin ribbon cable
Busbar
DC link
DC link
I/O
I/O
+300 V
300 V
Busbar
Busbar
DC link power supply

DC link power supply
Output L1
Input L1
Output L2
Input L2
Output L3
Input L3
I
I
300 V
+300 V
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC
3ph. 400 V AC
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
2
2
2
2
2
2
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
2
2
X181
X181
X181
X181
X181
X181
X181
X181
X121A
X121A
X121A
X121A
X121B
X121B
X121B
X121B
X141A
X141A
X141A
X141A
X141A
X141A
X161
X161
X141B
X141B
X141B
X141B
X141B
X141B
Function
I
I
I
Relay contact
Group signal
I
t/motor temperature
Relay signal
Ready/
fault
2)
Pulse
F 2 4)
F
R 2) 4)
2)
Drive
R )
enable 2)
RES
FR, reference ground, enable
ET
voltage
Signaling contact
Line contactor
F 2 4)
)
Settingup/standard
operation
2)
Contactor
Coil contact for the line
precharging
contactor
supply
M
2)
O
O
O
2 finely stranded
4
without connector
2 with cable lug
sleeves
6
mm
3ph. 400 V AC
M5 thread
NC
N
IO
50 V DC/0.5 A/12 VA max

5 V DC/3 mA min
NC
I
I
N
O
I
O
O
I
I
O
1ph. 250 V AC/50 V DC/2 A

max
I
NC
1ph. 250 V AC/50 V DC/2 A

17 V DC/3 mA min
I
I
I
O
O
O
Max. crosssection
5 V DC/3 mA min
+13 V...30
+24 V
+24 V
+13 V...30
V/R
0/+24 V
0V
+24 V
+13 V...30
V/R V...30
+13
V/R V
+24
0/+24 V
0V
E=
1.5 k
= 1.5 k
E
E
E=
1.5 k
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1)I = Input, O = Output, NC = NC contact, NO = NO contact (for signal: Closed= high/open= low)
2)Terminal 19 is the reference terminal (connected in the module to general reference ground X131
with 10 k ).
inserted for nongrounded supply networks).
4)max. current loading of terminals 9 19: A1
NE/3-14

Feed modules (VS)

1
Short startup, standard

..................................
settings
....
1.1
Tachometer adaptation for motors with tachometer voltages 3
16.5 V at rated
......................................
speed
...
Current controller
..................................
1.2
settings
...
2
Speed controller
......................................
optimization
...
2.1
Tachometer
....................................
adjustment
...
2.2
Setting the proportional gain Kp without
.............
adaptation
..
2.3
Setting the integral action time TN without
............
adaptation
.
2.4
Integral action time with adaptation (if
................
required)
..
2.5
Proportional gain with adaptation (only userfriendly
....
feed drive modules
interface)
.
2.6
Setting the adaptation range (generally not
............
required)
..
and standard
2.7 interface
I component limiting of the speed
....................
controller
..
2.8
Drift
..............................................
offset
.....
3
Startup, supplementary
.................................
Sect. 1
functions
...
3.1
Setting elements with standard
......................
3.1.1
Dimensioning the setting elements (standard
...........
Sect. 2
interface)
.
3.2
Setting elements with userfriendly
...................
interface
..
4
Setpoint
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Sect.
. . . 3. . . . . . . . .
interfaces
.....
5
Startup with main spindle drive
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Sect.
. . . 4. . . . . . . . .
option
...
5.1
Pre
............................................
5.1.1
Settings with the control board
. . . . . . . . . . .Sect.
. . . 5. . . . . . . .
5.1.2
Settings in
......................................
operation
....
5.2
Analog
..........................................
outputs
.....
6
Free for supplementary
......................................
texts
....
7
Power
......................................................
on
......
8
Maintenance and
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Sect.
. . . 8. . . . . . . . . .
diagnostics
...
8.1
Test sockets and display elements of the feed
...........
8.1.1
Userfriendly
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sect.
. . . .9 . . . . . . . . .
8.1.2
Standard
.......................................
interface
.....
8.2
Troubleshooti
.........................................
ng
.....
VS/1-3
VS/1-3
VS/1-3
VS/2-17
VS/2-18
VS/2-18
VS/2-19
VS/2-20
VS/2-21
VS/2-22
VS/2-22
VS/2-23
VS/3-25
VS/3-25
VS/3-26
VS/3-29
VS/4-33
VS/5-35
VS/5-35
VS/5-35
VS/5-39
VS/5-40
VS/6-41
VS/7-43
VS/8-45
VS/8-45
VS/8-45
VS/8-47
VS/8-48

SIMODRIVE 611A Installation and StartUp Guide/IAA/04.97
Edition
VSi
12.94
VS
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VS/9-49
9.1
Connecting terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VS/9-49
9.2
Block diagram, MSD option board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VS/9-52
9.3
Block diagram, parameter board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VS/9-53
9.4
Block diagram, standard interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VS/9-54
Startup steps of the Startup is subdivided into steps; after the standard setting, this can be follo-
VS
with userfriendly
Short startup
Standard settings
Speed controller optimization
Supplementary
functions
Setpoint
interfaces
Startup with main
spind. drive option
Power.up, Sect. 7
Service and
diagnostics
Appendix
VSii
07.94
1 Short startup, standard settings

Feed modules (VS)
Short startup, standard settings
The setting elements for the userfriendly interface are located on the parameter board, for the standard interface, on the control (refer to Section 9 Appendix). The tachometer adaptation, current normalization and current controller
gain parameters should be set for a standard startup.
1.1
Tachometer adaptation for motors with tachometer voltages 16.5 V at rated speed
Only for 1FT503 AF71 and 1FT504 AF71 motors
Userfriendly and
standard interface
1.2
All three contacts, switch S1 (S4 for the 2nd axis standard interface) = ON
Further, an adjustment can be made using discrete resistors, refer to
Section 3.1 - 3.2.
Current controller settings

The settings for the current limit and current controller gain Kp(I) can be taken
from the adaptation tables, Table 1-3 up to Table 1-9. If the required feed module/motor combination cannot be found, the values can be determined using
the associated formulas.
Userfriendly interface
Parameter board, switch S2
Standard interface
Control board, switch S2 (S5 for 2nd axis)

Note
The following setting values are valid for both control versions, as long as, in
individual cases, specific reference is not made to differences.
VS/1-3

1230
R15
1.2 Current controller settings

Feed modules (VS)
Current actual value normalization
Table 1-1
Current limit
04.97
Current limitI
Kp(I) t
40
max
(adjusted maximum current)
Ilimit (peak current of the power module)
[%]
=maximum axis current set in A

motors
L Afeed and main spindledrives) Siemens AG 1997 All Rights reserved
max for
VS
VS
S2.x
or
S5.x
to ON
2
3
2
4
3
4
2
3
4
2
5
3
5
2
3
5
4
5
3
4
5
2
3
4
5
(%)
100
85
68
61
50
46
41
39
36
34
30
29
26
24
23
The current limit must be reduced at least to the peak value permitted for the
motor.It may be necessary to reduce it still further depending on the mechanical
system which is driven.
Current controller
gain Kp(I)
Imax
L
=motor winding inductance in mH (refer to the configuringguide, AC
Table 1-2
Current controller gain
S2.x
and
S5.x
to ON
6
7
6
8
7
8
6
9
7
9
6
7
9
8
9
7
8
9
6
7
8
9
Kp(I)
0.5
2.5
4.5
5.5
6.5
7.5
9.5
11
11.5
The setting range of the current controller gain can be additionally increased
using R15 on the parameter board.
The following formula is valid for S2.6 to S2.9 closed (ON):
Kp(I)
VS/1-4
11,5
03.96

Feed modules (VS)
Adaptation tables
Table 1-3
Definition: o = Contact in the basic OFF setting

x = Contact in the ON setting
Adaptation table for feed module 4/8 A
Servomotor
1FT...
Nm
n ra
RPM
1)
Current
limit
Contacts
2
I m
Contacts
6
K (I)
5034 AK71
0.5
0.93
te6000
3.68
2.0
5036 AK71
0.75
1.4
6000
5.44
2.0
5042 AF71
5042 AK71
0.66
0.66
0.75
1.2
3000
6000
x
x
o
x
o
o
x
o
2.72
4.88
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
2.5
2.5
5044 AF71
5044 AK71
1.3
1.3
1.5
2.3
3000
6000
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
5.44
8.0
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
2.5
1.0
5046 AF71
2.6
3.0
3000
8.0
2.0
5062 AC71
5062 AF71
5062 AG71
5062 AK71
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
1.3
2.0
2.7
3.9
2000
3000
4000
6000
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
5.44
8.0
8.0
8.0
x
o
o
x
x
x
o
o
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
o
11.5
7.5
4.0
1.0
5064 AC71
4.5
2.7
2000
8.0
7.5
5066 AC71
6.5
3.9
2000
8.0
4.5
5070 AC71
5070 AF71
5070 AG71
3.0
3.0
3.0
1.8
2.6
3.6
2000
3000
4000
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
8.0
8.0
8.0
x
o
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
o
11.5
7.5
4.5
5071 AC71
4.5
2.9
2000
8.0
8.0
1) The specified value is the maximum permissible current of the particular power module motor combination. It may be
necessary to reduce the specified value depending on the driven mechanical system.

VS/1-5
VS

Feed modules (VS)
Table 1-4
04.97
Adaptation table for feed module 7.5/15 A
Servomotor
1FT...
VS
Nm
n ra
RPM
1)
Current
limit
Contacts
I m
6000
a
A
3.68
Contacts
K (I)
2.0
5034 AK71
0.5
5036 AK71
0.75
1.4
6000
5.44
2.0
5042 AF71
5042 AK71
0.66
0.66
0.75
1.2
3000
6000
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
3.45
4.5
o
o
o
x
x
o
o
o
4.0
2.0
5044 AF71
5044 AK71
1.3
1.3
1.5
2.3
3000
6000
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
5.85
9.15
o
o
o
x
x
o
o
o
4.0
2.0
5046 AF71
5046 AK71
2.6
2.6
3.0
4.7
3000
6000
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
12.7
15.0
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
4.0
1.0
5062 AC71
5062 AF71
5062 AG71
5062 AK71
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
1.3
2.0
2.7
3.9
2000
3000
4000
6000
x
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
5.1
7.5
10.2
15.0
o
x
o
x
x
o
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
o
11.0
6.5
5.5
2.5
5064 AC71
5064 AF71
5064 AG71
4.5
4.5
4.5
2.7
4.1
5.5
2000
3000
4000
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
10.2
15.0
15.0
o
x
x
o
o
x
x
o
o
x
x
o
9.5
6.5
2.5
5066 AC71
5066 AF71
6.5
6.5
3.9
6.0
2000
3000
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
15.0
15.0
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
o
9.5
4.0
5070 AC71
5070 AF71
5070 AG71
5070 AK71
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
1.8
2.6
3.6
5.3
2000
3000
4000
6000
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
7.5
10.2
15.0
15.0
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
11.5
9.5
8.0
4.0
5071 AC71
5071 AF71
5071 AG71
4.5
4.5
4.5
2.9
4.3
5.2
2000
3000
4000
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
12.7
15.0
15.0
x
x
x
x
o
o
x
o
x
x
x
o
11.5
6.5
4.5
5072 AC71
10.0
6.1
2000
15.0
8.0
5073 AC71
5073 AF71
7.0
7.0
4.3
6.4
2000
3000
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
15.0
15.0
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
o
9.5
4.0
5100 AC71
10.0
6.2
2000
15.0
5.5
0.93
te
VS/1-6

03.96
Table 1-5

Feed modules (VS)
Adaptation table for feed module 12.5/25 A
Servomotor
1FT...
Nm
n ra
RPM
1)
Current
limit
Contacts
2
6000
I m
Contacts
K (I)
5.75
2.0
5036 AK71
0.75
1.4
5044 AF71
5044 AK71
1.3
1.3
1.5
2.3
3000
6000
o
o
x
o
x
o
x
x
6.0
9.0
o
o
o
x
x
o
o
o
4.0
2.0
5046 AF71
5046 AK71
2.6
2.6
3.0
4.7
3000
6000
o
o
o
x
x
o
o
o
12.5
17.0
o
o
o
x
x
o
o
o
4.0
2.0
5062 AC71
5062 AF71
5062 AG71
5062 AK71
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
1.3
2.0
2.7
3.9
2000
3000
4000
6000
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
o
5.75
8.5
10.25
15.75
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
o
11.5
8.0
5.5
2.5
5064 AC71
5064 AF71
5064 AG71
5064 AK71
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
2.7
4.1
5.5
8.0
2000
3000
4000
6000
x
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
10.25
17.0
25.0
25.0
x
x
o
x
x
o
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
o
11.5
6.5
5.5
2.5
5066 AC71
5066 AF71
5066 AG71
5066 AK71
6.5
6.5
6.5
6.5
3.9
6.0
7.9
11.6
2000
3000
4000
6000
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
17.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
o
x
x
o
o
o
x
x
x
o
o
o
x
x
o
o
9.5
6.5
2.5
2.0
5070 AC71
5070 AF71
5070 AG71
5070 AK71
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
1.8
2.6
3.6
5.3
2000
3000
4000
6000
o
x
o
o
x
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
7.5
11.5
17.0
25.0
x
o
o
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
11.5
11.0
9.5
6.5
5071 AC71
5071 AF71
5071 AG71
5071 AK71
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
2.9
4.3
5.2
7.9
2000
3000
4000
6000
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
12.5
17.0
25.0
25.0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
x
x
x
o
11.5
8.0
8.0
2.5
5072 AC71
5072 AF71
5072 AG71
10.0
10.0
10.0
6.1
9.1
12.0
2000
3000
4000
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
25.0
25.0
25.0
x
o
x
x
o
x
x
o
o
x
x
o
11.5
6.0
2.5
5073 AC71
5073 AF71
5073 AG71
5073 AK71
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
4.3
6.4
8.1
12.5
2000
3000
4000
6000
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
17.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
o
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
o
9.5
6.5
4.5
1.0
5074 AC71
14.0
8.5
2000
25.0
8.0
5076 AC71
18.0
11.5
2000
25.0
5.5
5100 AC71
5100 AF71
5100 AG71
10.0
10.0
10.0
6.2
9.2
12.5
2000
3000
4000
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
25.0
25.0
25.0
o
o
x
o
o
x
x
x
o
x
o
o
9.5
4.0
2.5
5101 AC71
15.0
9.4
2000
25.0
5.5
5102 AA71
27.0
9.9
1200
25.0
8.0
5103 AC71
19.0
12.0
2000
25.0
4.0
te

VS/1-7
VS

Feed modules (VS)
Table 1-6
04.97
Servomotor
1FT...
VS
Nm
n ra
RPM
1)
Current
limit
Contacts
I m
6000
a
A
13.0
Contacts
K (I)
2.5
5044 AK71
1.3
2.3
5046 AF71
5046 AK71
2.6
2.6
3.0
4.7
3000
6000
o
o
x
o
o
x
x
o
15.0
25.0
o
x
o
x
x
o
o
o
4.0
2.5
5062 AG71
5062 AK71
2.2
2.2
2.7
3.9
4000
6000
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
o
13.0
19.5
x
x
o
o
o
x
x
o
6.5
4.5
5064 AC71
5064 AF71
5064 AG71
5064 AK71
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
2.7
4.1
5.5
8.0
2000
3000
4000
6000
o
x
o
o
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
x
o
o
o
13.0
19.5
25.0
34.0
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
o
11.5
8.0
5.5
2.5
5066 AC71
5066 AF71
5066 AG71
5066 AK71
6.5
6.5
6.5
6.5
3.9
6.0
7.9
11.6
2000
3000
4000
6000
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
19.5
30.5
34.0
50.0
x
x
x
o
x
x
o
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
o
11.5
8.0
4.5
4.0
5070 AF71
5070 AG71
5070 AK71
3.0
3.0
3.0
2.6
3.6
5.3
3000
4000
6000
o
x
o
x
o
o
x
o
x
x
x
o
12.0
17.0
25.0
x
o
x
x
o
o
x
x
o
x
x
x
11.5
9.5
6.5
5071 AC71
5071 AF71
5071 AG71
5071 AK71
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
2.9
4.3
5.2
7.9
2000
3000
4000
6000
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
x
o
o
o
13.0
20.5
25.0
34.0
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
11.5
9.5
8.0
4.0
5072 AC71
5072 AF71
5072 AG71
5072 AK71
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
6.1
9.1
12.0
17.5
2000
3000
4000
6000
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
25.0
42.5
50.0
50.0
x
o
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
o
11.5
9.5
6.5
2.5
5073 AC71
5073 AF71
5073 AG71
5073 AK71
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
4.3
6.4
8.1
12.5
2000
3000
4000
6000
o
x
x
o
x
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
20.5
30.5
42.5
50.0
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
x
x
x
o
11.5
8.0
7.5
2.5
5074 AC71
5074 AF71
5074 AG71
5074 AK71
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
8.5
13.0
16.5
25.0
2000
3000
4000
6000
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
42.5
50.0
50.0
50.0
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
o
11.5
6.5
4.5
1.0
5076 AC71
5076 AF71
5076 AG71
18.0
18.0
18.0
11.5
16.5
21.5
2000
3000
4000
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
50.0
50.0
50.0
o
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
o
x
o
o
11.0
4.5
2.5
5100 AC71
5100 AF71
5100 AG71
5100 AK71
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
6.2
9.2
12.5
18.0
2000
3000
4000
6000
x
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
30.5
42.5
50.0
50.0
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
o
11.5
6.5
4.5
2.5
5101 AC71
5101 AF71
5101 AG71
15.0
15.0
15.0
9.4
14.5
17.5
2000
3000
4000
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
42.5
50.0
50.0
o
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
o
x
o
o
9.5
4.5
2.5
5102 AA71
5102 AC71
5102 AF71
27.0
27.0
27.0
9.9
16.5
25.0
1200
2000
3000
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
42.5
50.0
50.0
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
o
o
x
x
o
11.5
6.5
2.5
te
VS/1-8

03.96
Table 1-6

Feed modules (VS)
adaptation table for feed module 25/50 A
Servomotor
1FT...
Nm
n ra
RPM
1)
Current
limit
Contacts
2
2000
3000
4000
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
I m
Contacts
K (I)
50.0
50.0
50.0
x
x
o
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
x
8.0
2.5
2.0
5103 AC71
5103 AF71
5103 AG71
19.0
19.0
19.0
12.0
17.5
23.0
5104 AA71
5104 AC71
37.0
37.0
14.0
22.5
1200
2000
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
50.0
50.0
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
o
11.5
4.0
5106 AA71
45.0
17.0
1200
50.0
8.0
5108 AA71
55.0
20.5
1200
50.0
6.5
5132 AA71
60.0
22.5
1200
50.0
7.5
te

VS/1-9
VS

Feed modules (VS)
Table 1-7
07.94
Servomotor
1FT
Nm
n ra
RPM
1)
Current
limit
Contacts
I m
6000
8000
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
a
A
80.0
80.0
Contacts
K (I)
o
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
2.0
1.0
4101 SK71
4101 SN71
20.0
20.0
33.0
39.0
4102 SG71
33.0
35.0
4000
80.0
4.0
5046 AK71
2.6
4.7
6000
24.0
2.5
5062 AK71
2.2
3.9
6000
19.2
4.0
5064 AF71
5064 AG71
5064 AK71
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.1
5.5
8.0
3000
4000
6000
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
x
x
x
o
19.2
28.8
40.0
x
x
o
x
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
o
8.0
6.5
4.0
5066 AC71
5066 AF71
5066 AG71
5066 AK71
6.5
6.5
6.5
6.5
3.9
6.0
7.9
11.6
2000
3000
4000
6000
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
o
19.2
28.2
40.0
54.4
x
x
o
x
x
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
o
11.5
8.0
6.0
4.5
5070 AK71
3.0
5.3
6000
24.0
6.5
5071 AF71
5071 AG71
5071 AK71
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.3
5.2
7.9
3000
4000
6000
o
x
o
o
o
o
x
o
x
x
x
o
20.8
27.2
40.0
o
x
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
o
9.5
8.0
4.5
5072 AC71
5072 AF71
5072 AG71
5072 AK71
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
6.1
9.1
12.0
17.5
2000
3000
4000
6000
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
28.8
40.0
54.4
80.0
x
o
o
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
11.5
9.5
7.5
5.5
5073 AC71
5073 AF71
5073 AG71
5073 AK71
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
4.3
6.4
8.1
12.5
2000
3000
4000
6000
o
x
o
o
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
x
o
o
o
20.8
31.2
40.0
54.4
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
o
o
o
x
x
x
o
11.5
8.0
6.5
2.5
5074 AC71
5074 AF71
5074 AG71
5074 AK71
5074 SG71
5074 SK71
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
16.0
16.0
8.5
13.0
16.5
25.0
19.0
28.0
2000
3000
4000
6000
4000
6000
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
40.0
54.4
80.0
80.0
80.0
80.0
x
o
x
x
o
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
o
x
o
11.5
7.5
6.5
2.5
6.0
2.5
5076 AC71
5076 AF71
5076 AG71
5076 AK71
5076 SG71
18.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
20.5
11.5
16.5
21.5
32.0
24.5
2000
3000
4000
6000
4000
x
x
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
48.8
68.0
80.0
80.0
80.0
o
x
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
o
o
o
11.0
6.5
4.5
2.0
4.0
5100 AC71
5100 AF71
5100 AG71
5100 AK71
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
6.2
9.2
12.5
18.0
2000
3000
4000
6000
x
o
o
o
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
31.2
40.0
54.4
80.0
x
x
o
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
o
11.5
6.5
5.5
4.0
5101 AC71
5101 AF71
5101 AG71
5101 AK71
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
9.4
14.5
17.5
26.5
2000
3000
4000
6000
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
40.0
54.4
80.0
80.0
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
x
o
o
o
8.0
5.5
4.5
2.0
te
1) The specified value is the maximum permisisble current of the particular power module motor combination. It may be
VS/1-10

07.94
Table 1-7

Feed modules (VS)
Servomotor
1FT
Nm
n ra
RPM
1)
Current
limit
Contacts
2
1200
2000
3000
4000
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
I m
Contacts
K (I)
40.0
80.0
80.0
80.0
x
o
o
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
o
o
11.5
9.5
4.0
2.5
5102 AA71
5102 AC71
5102 AF71
5102 AG71
27.0
27.0
27.0
27.0
9.9
16.5
25.0
31.5
5103 AC71
5103 AF71
5103 AG71
19.0
19.0
19.0
12.0
17.5
23.0
2000
3000
4000
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
54.4
80.0
80.0
x
o
x
x
o
x
o
o
o
x
x
o
8.0
6.0
2.5
5104 AA71
5104 AC71
5104 AF71
37.0
37.0
37.0
14.0
22.5
34.0
1200
2000
3000
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
54.4
80.0
80.0
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
o
o
x
x
o
11.5
6.5
2.5
5106 AA71
5106 AC71
45.0
45.0
17.0
26.8
1200
2000
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
80.0
80.0
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
o
11.5
5.5
5108 AA71
5108 AC71
55.0
55.0
20.5
32.5
1200
2000
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
80.0
80.0
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
o
11.5
4.5
5132 AA71
5132 AC71
5132 SA71
60.0
60.0
70.0
22.5
35.5
26.0
1200
2000
1200
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
80.0
80.0
80.0
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
11.5
4.5
11.5
5134 AA71
5134 SA71
75.0
90.0
28.0
34.0
1200
1200
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
80.0
80.0
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
9.5
9.5
5136 AA71
85.0
31.5
1200
80.0
7.5
5138 AA71
105.0
39.0
1200
80.0
6.0
te

VS/1-11
VS

Feed modules (VS)
Table 1-8
07.94
Servomotor
1FT
VS
Nm
n ra
RPM
1)
Current
limit
Contacts
I m
6000
8000
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
a
A
160.0
160.0
Contacts
K (I)
x
x
o
x
x
o
o
o
4.5
2.5
4101 SK71
4101 SN71
20.0
20.0
33.0
39.0
4102 SG71
4102 SK71
33.0
33.0
35.0
47.0
4000
6000
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
160.0
160.0
x
x
x
o
o
x
x
o
8.0
4.5
4104 SG71
4104 SK71
45.0
45.0
46.0
60.0
4000
6000
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
160.0
160.0
o
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
5.5
2.5
4106 SG71
59.0
56.0
4000
160.0
4.5
5064 AK71
4.5
8.0
6000
41.6
4.5
5066 AG71
5066 AK71
6.5
6.5
7.9
11.6
4000
6000
o
o
x
o
x
o
x
x
38.4
57.6
o
x
o
o
o
x
x
o
6.0
4.5
5071 AK71
4.5
7.9
6000
38.4
4.5
5072 AF71
5072 AG71
5072 AK71
10.0
10.0
10.0
9.1
12.0
17.5
3000
4000
6000
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
x
x
x
o
41.6
57.6
80.0
o
x
o
o
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
o
9.5
8.0
5.5
5073 AG71
5073 AK71
7.0
7.0
8.1
12.5
4000
6000
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
o
41.6
65.5
x
o
o
o
o
x
x
o
6.5
4.0
5074 AC71
5074 AF71
5074 AG71
5074 AK71
5074 SG71
5074 SK71
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
16.0
16.0
8.5
13.0
16.5
25.0
19.0
28.0
2000
3000
4000
6000
4000
6000
o
o
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
41.6
65.6
80.0
97.6
80.0
97.0
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
x
o
x
x
x
o
o
o
11.5
8.0
6.5
2.5
5.5
2.5
5076 AC71
5076 AF71
5076 AG71
5076 AK71
5076 SG71
5076 SK71
18.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
20.5
20.5
11.5
16.5
21.5
32.0
24.5
36.0
2000
3000
4000
6000
4000
6000
o
x
o
o
o
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
48.0
73.6
108.8
160.0
108.8
160.0
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
9.5
7.5
6.5
4.0
5.5
4.0
5100 AF71
5100 AG71
5100 AK71
10.0
10.0
10.0
9.2
12.5
18.0
3000
4000
6000
x
x
o
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
o
o
46.4
62.4
80.0
x
x
o
x
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
o
8.0
6.5
4.0
5101 AC71
5101 AF71
5101 AG71
5101 AK71
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
9.4
14.5
17.5
26.5
2000
3000
4000
6000
o
o
o
x
o
x
o
o
x
x
x
o
x
o
o
o
41.6
65.6
80.0
136.0
o
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
o
9.5
6.5
4.5
4.0
5102 AA71
5102 AC71
5102 AF71
5102 AG71
5102 SF71
5102 SG71
27.0
27.0
27.0
27.0
34.0
34.0
9.9
16.5
25.0
31.5
31.5
39.5
1200
2000
3000
4000
3000
4000
x
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
46.4
80.0
108.8
160.0
108.8
160.0
x
o
o
o
x
x
x
o
x
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
11.5
9.5
5.5
5.5
4.5
4.5
5103 AC71
5103 AF71
5103 AG71
19.0
19.0
19.0
12.0
17.5
23.0
2000
3000
4000
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
o
57.6
80.0
108.8
x
o
x
x
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
o
8.0
6.0
4.5
te
VS/1-12

07.94
Table 1-8

Feed modules (VS)
Servomotor
1FT
Nm
n ra
RPM
1)
Current
limit
Contacts
2
1200
2000
3000
3000
x
o
o
o
x
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
I m
Contacts
K (I)
62.4
108.8
160.0
160.0
x
o
x
o
x
o
o
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
11.5
9.5
6.5
5.5
5104 AA71
5104 AC71
5104 AF71
5104 SF71
37.0
37.0
37.0
48.0
14.0
22.5
34.0
44.0
5106 AA71
5106 AC71
5106 AF71
5106 SF71
45.0
45.0
45.0
57.0
17.0
26.8
42.5
54.0
1200
2000
3000
3000
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
80.0
108.0
160.0
160.0
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
o
11.5
7.5
4.5
4.0
5108 AA71
5108 AC71
5108 AF71
55.0
55.0
55.0
20.5
32.5
50.5
1200
2000
3000
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
80.0
160.0
160.0
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
o
11.5
9.5
4.0
5132 AA71
5132 AC71
5132 AF71
5132 SA71
5132 SC71
5132 SF71
60.0
60.0
60.0
70.0
70.0
70.0
22.5
35.5
47.5
26.0
41.0
55.5
1200
2000
3000
1200
2000
3000
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
108.8
160.0
160.0
108.8
160.0
160.0
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
o
x
x
x
o
x
x
o
11.5
8.0
5.5
11.5
8.0
5.5
5134 AA71
5134 AC71
5134 SA71
5134 SC71
75.0
75.0
90.0
90.0
28.0
47.0
34.0
56.0
1200
2000
1200
2000
o
o
o
o
x
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
108.8
160.0
108.8
160.0
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
x
11.5
6.5
11.5
6.5
5136 AA71
5136 AC71
5136 SA71
5136 SC71
85.0
85.0
110.0
110.0
31.5
47.5
41.0
61.5
1200
2000
1200
2000
x
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
136.0
160.0
136.0
160.0
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
o
11.5
6.5
11.5
6.5
5138 AA71
5138 SA71
105.0
140.0
39.0
52.0
1200
1200
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
160.0
160.0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
11.5
11.5
te

VS/1-13
VS

Feed modules (VS)
Table 1-9
07.94
Servomotor
1FT
VS
Nm
n ra
RPM
1)
Current
limit
Contacts
I m
6000
8000
o
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
a
A
136.0
170.0
Contacts
K (I)
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
2.5
2.0
4101 SK71
4101 SN71
20.0
20.0
33.0
39.0
4102 SG71
4102 SK71
33.0
33.0
35.0
47.0
4000
6000
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
170.0
200.0
o
o
o
x
x
x
x
o
9.5
5.5
4104 SG71
4104 SK71
45.0
45.0
46.0
60.0
4000
6000
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
200.0
200.0
x
x
o
x
o
o
x
o
6.5
2.5
4106 SG71
59.0
56.0
4000
200.0
5.5
5066 AK71
6.5
11.6
6000
60.0
4.5
5072 AG71
5072 AK71
10.0
10.0
12.0
17.5
4000
6000
o
o
x
x
o
x
x
o
60.0
82.0
x
o
x
x
o
x
x
o
8.0
5.5
5073 AK71
7.0
12.5
6000
60.0
4.0
5074 AF71
5074 AG71
5074 AK71
5074 SG71
5074 SK71
14.0
14.0
14.0
16.0
16.0
13.0
16.5
25.0
19.0
28.0
3000
4000
6000
4000
6000
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
o
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
60.0
82.0
100.0
82.0
100.0
x
x
x
o
x
x
o
x
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
x
x
o
x
o
8.0
6.5
2.5
6.0
2.5
5076 AC71
5076 AF71
5076 AG71
5076 AK71
5076 SG71
5076 SK71
18.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
20.5
20.5
11.5
16.5
21.5
32.0
24.5
36.0
2000
3000
4000
6000
4000
6000
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
52.0
78.0
100.0
136.0
100.0
136.0
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
o
o
o
11.5
8.0
5.5
2.5
4.5
2.5
5100 AF71
5100 AG71
5100 AK71
10.0
10.0
10.0
9.2
12.5
18.0
3000
4000
6000
x
o
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
o
46.0
60.0
92.0
x
o
x
x
o
o
o
o
x
x
x
o
8.0
6.0
4.5
5101 AC71
5101 AF71
5101 AG71
5101 AK71
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
9.4
14.5
17.5
26.5
2000
3000
4000
6000
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
o
o
46.0
60.0
92.0
136.0
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
x
x
x
o
9.5
6.0
6.0
4.0
5102 AA71
5102 AC71
5102 AF71
5102 AG71
5102 SF71
5102 SG71
27.0
27.0
27.0
27.0
34.0
34.0
9.9
16.5
25.0
31.5
31.5
39.5
1200
2000
3000
4000
3000
4000
x
x
o
o
x
o
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
46.0
78.0
100.0
136.0
122.0
136.0
x
o
x
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
o
o
o
11.5
9.5
4.5
4.5
5.5
4.0
5103 AC71
5103 AF71
5103 AG71
19.0
19.0
19.0
12.0
17.5
23.0
2000
3000
4000
o
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
o
60.0
92.0
122.0
o
x
o
o
o
x
x
o
x
x
x
o
9.5
6.5
5.5
5104 AA71
5104 AC71
5104 AF71
5104 SF71
37.0
37.0
37.0
48.0
14.0
22.5
34.0
44.0
1200
2000
3000
3000
o
o
o
o
x
o
x
x
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
60.0
100.0
136.0
136.0
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
o
11.5
8.0
5.5
4.5
5106 AA71
5106 AC71
5106 AF71
5106 SF71
45.0
45.0
45.0
57.0
17.0
26.8
42.5
54.0
1200
2000
3000
3000
x
x
o
o
x
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
78.0
122.0
200.0
200.0
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
o
o
11.5
8.0
5.5
4.5
te
VS/1-14

07.94
Table 1-9

Feed modules (VS)
Servomotor
1FT
Nm
n ra
RPM
1)
Current
limit
Contacts
2
1200
2000
3000
x
o
o
o
x
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
I m
Contacts
K (I)
92.0
136.0
200.0
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
o
11.5
8.0
4.5
5108 AA71
5108 AC71
5108 AF71
55.0
55.0
55.0
20.5
32.5
50.5
5132 AA71
5132 AC71
5132 AF71
5132 SA71
5132 SC71
5132 SF71
60.0
60.0
60.0
70.0
70.0
70.0
22.5
35.5
47.5
26.0
41.0
55.5
1200
2000
3000
1200
2000
3000
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
x
o
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
100.0
170.0
200.0
100.0
170.0
200.0
x
o
x
x
o
x
x
o
o
x
o
o
x
x
o
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
x
x
11.5
9.5
6.5
11.5
9.5
6.5
5134 AA71
5134 AC71
5134 SA71
5134 SC71
75.0
75.0
90.0
90.0
28.0
47.0
34.0
56.0
1200
2000
1200
2000
x
o
x
o
x
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
122.0
200.0
122.0
200.0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
11.5
8.0
11.5
8.0
5136 AA71
5136 AC71
5136 SA71
5136 SC71
85.0
85.0
110.0
110.0
31.5
47.5
41.0
61.5
1200
2000
1200
2000
o
o
o
o
x
o
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
136.0
200.0
136.0
200.0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
o
x
o
x
x
x
x
11.5
8.0
11.5
8.0
5138 AA71
5138 SA71
105.0
140.0
39.0
52.0
1200
1200
x
x
o
o
o
o
o
o
170.0
170.0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
11.5
11.5
te
VS

VS/1-15
07.94
Feed modules (VS)
VS
2
VS
9/
6
4
10
3
2

VS/1-16
07.94
2 Speed controller optimization
10
0/1
1
The setting shown in the diagram

corFeed modules
(VS)
responds to 7 scale divisions.
VS/2-17
Speed controller optimization

The additional smoothing functions in the speed controller loop (damping mechanical resonance effects) are described in Section 3. Proceed as follows
when optimizing the speed controller:
4. Tachometer adjustment
5. Gain Kp
6. Integral action time TN
7. Adaptation TN
(if required)
8. Icomponent limiting
(if required)
9. Drift compensation (offset)

The unit must be poweredup to optimize the speed controller Sections 2.1, 2.2,
2.3 and 2.8. Therefore please refer to Section 7 Poweringup.
The potentiometer scale divisions (in the setting tables) are defined as follows:
7
6
55
4
3

2.1 Tachometer adjustment

Feed modules (VS)
2.1
04.97
Tachometer adjustment
For motors with tachometer voltages 16.5 V, it is necessary to also proceed
according to Section 1.1.
Potentiometer
Setting range
0.7 rated
n
VS
act N
2.2
n
2.2
n
rat
ed
n act N/ nact 2.2

2
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1
0.8
0.6
0
910
Tachometer potentiometer (scaled)

Fig. 2-1
Extending the setting range using R3 and R10 (only for the userfriendly
interface).
Function
n a
n
ca
c
2.2
>
0.7
<
2.2
Component
Mounted
rated
Increase R3
(as supplied)
rated
Mount R10
Open (as supplied)
Setting the proportional gain Kp without

adaptation
The proportional gain Kp of the speed controller can be set using potentiometer
Kp. The range can be extended if required using the fixed resistor R50 (only for
the userfriendly interface ; R50 = 68 k(as supplied)).
The gain, set using the Kp potentiometer is additionally influenced by the setting
of potentiometer T N.
VS/2-18

07.94
2.3 Setting the integral action time TN without adaptation

Feed modules (VS)
Kp
Potentiometer TN
Right
hand
endstop
170
160
140
120
100
Center
80
Lefthand
endstop
60
40
20
0
910
Setting of pot. Kp
Fig. 2-2
2.3
Proportional gain Kp as a function of the Kp and T N potentiometers
Setting the integral action time TN without adaptation

The speed controller integral action time is set using potentiometer TN; the
range can be, if required, extended using C2 (only for the userfriendly interface).
TN in ms
45
40
30
20
10
0
10
Setting of pot. TN
Fig. 2-3
Integral action time TN as a function of potentiometer TN

VS/2-19
VS
2.4 Integral action time with adaptation (if required)

Feed modules (VS)
2.4
04.97
Integral action time with adaptation (if required)

Adaptation is activated and preset via R34 (only the userfriendly interface),
and S3.5 (S6.5 for a 2nd axis) for the standard interface.
R34 = open
R34 = mounted
VS
Adaptation inactive (as supplied)

Adaptation operates acc. to the following diagrams
TN
R34 + potentiometer ADAPT
Potentiometer T
T Nadapt
n x2
Adaptation
fully effective
Fig. 2-4
Transition
range
nx1
Adaptation
ineffective
Integral action time dependency
n x = n setp.+ n act.
TNadapt/TN
0.9
R34 = 10 k
R34 = 0
or standard
interface
0.7
0.5
0.3
0.1
0
910
Setting of the ADAPT potentiometer

Fig. 2-5
VS/2-20
Dependency of adaptation T

07.94
2.5
2.5 Proportional gain with adaptation (only userfriendly interface)

Feed modules (VS)
Proportional gain with adaptation (only userfriendly

interface)
Wichtig
Offsets can occur in the transition range.
Adaptation is activated and preset using R38 (if required):

R38 = open
R38 = mounted
Adaptation inactive (as supplied)

Adaptation operates acc. to the following diagrams
Kp
Kp adapt
R38
Kp
R50 + potentiometer Kp
n x2
Adaptation
fully effective
Fig. 2-6
nx1
Transition
range
n
Adaptation
ineffective
Proportional gain Kp as a function of the speed
n x = n setp.+ n act.
Kp adapt/Kp
35
25
15
5
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
Fixed resistor R38 in
Fig. 2-7
Adaptation Kp as a function of R38 in the adaptation fully effective range

VS/2-21
VS
2.6 Setting the adaptation range (generally not required)

Feed modules (VS)
2.6
04.97
Setting the adaptation range (generally not required)

The adaptation range can be set using the following resistors:
R40
R543
R544
R
R
Standard interface 1st axis (from Order No. 6SN11180AD110AA1)
Standard interface 2nd axis (from Order No. 6SN11180AE110AA1)
= open
= inserted
Maximum adaptation range (as supplied)

Adapt. reduced acc. to the following diagram
VS
R40 in k
150
130
Transition range
Adap
_
tation
fully
eff_
ective
110
90
70
50
Adap
tation
ineffect
ive
30
10
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
n x in mV
Fig. 2-8
Adaptation range
n x = n setp.1 + nact.
2.7
I component limiting of the speed controller

R52
R547
R550
Standard interface 1st axis (from Order No. 6SN11180AD110AA1)
Standard interface 2nd axis (from Order No. 6SN11180AE110AA1)
R52 = open
R52
=
I component fully effective

(as supplied)
I component ineffective
R52 can be between 100 kand 2 Mto limit the speed controller I component, e. g. for slipstick effects.
VS/2-22

03.96
2.8
2.8 Drift offset

Feed modules (VS)
Drift offset
Adjusted using potentiometer for n set= 0 (terminals 56 and 14 connected)
Potentiometer drift
Control range
30 mV
VS

2.8 Drift offset
VS/2-23
04.97
Feed modules (VS)
VS
VS/2-24
04.97

3.1 Settings elements with standard interface

Feed modules (VS)
VS/3-25
VS
Startup, supplementary functions
3.1
Setting elements with standard interface

Setting elements, switch S2 and S3 or S5 and S6 for the 2nd axis
S2/S5 contacts
10 x DIL
1
2...5
6...9
10
OFF
ON
Motor clockwise direction of

rotation for a positive speed setpoint (motor shaft, drive end) at
terminal 56/14
Curr. normal. m =100
(I
%)
a gain
Current controller
(0.5)
Speedcontrolled
operation
S3/S6 contacts
8 x DIL
Function
1)
Motor counterclockwise
tion of rotation for a positive
speed setpoint (motor shaft,
drive
en 1 at terminal 56/14
d) )
Curr. normal. m = 23 %)
(I
a gain (11.5)
Current controller
1)
Currentcontrolled operation
1)
OFF
ON
Speed setpoint smoothing
No
smoothing
1)
Speed actual value

smoothing
No
smoothing
1)
With = 280 s
Speed controller smoothing
No
smoothing
1)
With = 370 s
Current setpoint smoothing
No
smoothing
1)
With = 110 s
Speed contr. adaptation
Ready/fa
ult
2)
O 1)
FF
Ready to run si-
Master/sla 3)4)
ve
Currentcontrolled
tion
g 1)
n
Mast 1)
er
With I component
With = 2.2 ms
ON
Fault signal
Sla 4)
ve
Without I compone 1)
nt
1) As supplied
2) Acts on the BB relay of the NE/monitoring module. If the userfriendly and standard interface are used together, or
just the standard interface alone, then the BB relay on the NE module dropsout if there is no enable signal or a
fault is present.
3) Function only for 2axis version
4) The slave axis must be operated in the currentcontrolled mode with enabled I component.

3.1 Settings elements with standard interface

Feed modules (VS)
04.97
The following supplementary functions can be set by mounting wired components onto the basic board. (from Order No. 6SN11180AD110AA1 (1 axis)
and from Order No. 6SN11180AE110AA1 (2 axis) .
Function
BKZ axis 1
Value range
Smoothing, speed controller
C231
C235
0 ... 100nF
Smoothing set
n
Smoothing
C232
C236
0 ... 2.2 F
C233
C237
0 ... 100nF
C234
C238
0 ... 100nF
act
VS
BKZ axis 2
n
Smoothing set
n
Timer speed controller at its endstop
C239
C240
0 ... 2.2 F
Tachometer adaptation
539R, 540R, 541R
R536, R537. R538
0 ...
Clock frequency PBM
R542
R542
62 k ...
Adaptation range
R543
R544
0 ...
Speed setpoint adaptation
R545
R546
0 ...
Limiting, speed controller I component
R547
R550
Electronic weight equalization, pos./neg.
R548/R549
R551/R552
20 k ...
Response threshold
I
R553
R554
0 ...
t monitoring
k , 0.1%, 25ppm/k
100 k ... 2 M
k
Axial metal film resistors, type of construction 0204 (RM 7.62 mm) and radial
MKT capacitors (RM 5.08 mm) must be located at the positions provided. When
adapting the tachometer, it should be observed that the resistors have a relative
accuracy of 0.1% to one another and a Tk of < 25 ppm/k.
Note
The board could be damaged if the incorrect material is used
Important
Only suitably qualified personnel may carryout soldering work on the board
(maintaining the ESD Guidelines).
3.1.1
Dimensioning the setting elements (standard interface)

a) Smoothing functions
Speed controller: T=C231(C235) 78 k
nset:
T=C232(C236) 10 k
n act:
T=C233(C236)
10 k (dependent on the tachometer
potentiometer setting)
I set :
T=C234(C238) 5 k
b) timer, speed controller at its endstop
The monitoring time is 230 ms as standard, and can be increased, when required, by mounting C239 (C240). The following simple relationship is valid:
TZst =
VS/3-26
C239 (C240)
F
200 ms

07.94
3.1.1 Dimensioning the setting elements (standard interface)

Feed modules (VS)
c) Tachometer adaptation
The following equivalent circuit diagram is valid for the individual tachometer
voltages:
V tach.
4k
Rx
Vtach.X
20 k
The tachometer voltage Vtach is normally 40 V at

rated speed, which results in a voltagetachoX of 10
V. For a rated speed which significantly deviates
from the rated motor speed, it is possible to redimension corresponding to this criterium.
The following formula is valid:
8k
5 k V
1
tach.
R x=
Vtach.X
tach.
7.5 k
VS
V tach.X
d) clock frequency PBM

If noise problems occur (the motor makes a whistling sound), then the PWM
inverter clock frequency can be changed for both axes together.(Fig. 31)
In this case, it must be observed that the available current ( In , Imax ) is reduced when the clock frequency is increased (refer to Pj, Section 4.1).
The I 2t limiting is set in the factory to a pulse frequency of 3.3 kHz and a maximum ambient temperature of 40 C. If these values are exceeded (pulse frequency and/or ambient temperature), the response threshold must be adapted
(refer to Fig. 3-2).
Fig. 3-1

VS/3-27
3.1.1 Dimensioning the setting elements (standard interface)

Feed modules (VS)
04.97
e) Speed setpoint adaptation

If the adjustment range of the tachometer potentiometer is not sufficient (for lower speed range), then the speed setpoint can be adapted via a setpoint voltage divider circuit. The following circuit diagram is valid:
N set
20 k
20 k
virt. M
Rx
The following relationship is obtained for R545 (R546):
VS
R x=10 k
nrequired
nrated nrequired
f) Limiting, speed controller I component (refer to2.7)

The maximum speed controller I component can be limited by mounting R547
(R550).
g) Electronic weight equalization
The value to be set for the electronic weight equalization is obtained from the
current setpoint IsetGwa which can be measured at the test socket T for the axis
to be enabled, at standstill (Nset=0).
R=I
10 V
SetGwa
10 k
Caution: I SetGwa
5V
20 k !
After mounting, the value at test socket T must be able to be measured with the
same polarity, with the axis inhibited.
h) Response threshold I 2t-monitoring
The I 2t monitoring limits the current setpoint to a thermally permissible value.
The response threshold is 55% of the power module peak current, and, when
required, can be reduced corresponding to the following characteristic, by
mounting R553 (R554):
Fig. 3-2
VS/3-28

07.94
3.2 Setting elements with userfriendly interface

Feed modules (VS)
3.2
Setting elements with userfriendly interface

Setting elements on the parameter board; terminal = H jumpered with terminal 9, terminal = L open.
Function
Component(s)
Effect
Ready/fault
Relay terminal 672/673/674
R33 = 0 (as supplied)

R33 = open
Ready signal
fault signal
Speed/current controlled
(permanently selected via switch)
S2: 10 = OFF (as supplied)

S2: 10 = ON
Closedloop speed control

closedloop current control
Speed/current controlled
(selected via terminal)
R14 = 0 1 ; terminal 22 = L
)
Closedloop speed control

closedloop current control
Supplementary setpoint 1 via terminal

22 = H
2)
R16 (as supplied =
R17 (as supplied = open)
Voltage divider at 10 V
Voltage divider at the ref. point
Supplementary setpoint 2 via terminal

23 = H
2)
R21 (as supplied =
Voltage divider at the ref. point
Currentcontrolled operation with/

without I component
R1 = open
I component inhibited P
I component active PI
Controller and pulse inhibit via

terminal 65
R13 = open (as supplied)

R13 = 0
Delayed
Instantaneous
Master-/slave operation: Master operation
R42 + R44 = 0 , S2: 10 = OFF
Master operation, terminal 258 =

put
R44 = 0 , R1 + R42 = open,

S2: 10 = ON
Slave operation, terminal 258 =

input
Slave opera-
tion
Timer, speed controller at its endstop
R54 = 360 k(as supplied)

R54 as selected
Monitoring, n controller at n stop

R32 = open
t
0.56 47
ms
Monitoring active
Monitoring inactive
Direction of rotation reversal

(direction of rotation for a positive setpoint at terminal 56/14)
S2: 1 = ON (as supplied)
Motor ccw, drive shaft end
S2: 1 = OFF
Motor cw, drive shaft end
Speed controller smoothing
C3 (as supplied = open)
= C3 68 k
= C4 10 k
Speed actual value smoothing
= C5 5 k
Current setpoint smoothing
= C6 1 k
|100%
2)
Speed setpoint
(only terminal 56/14)
R42 (as supplied = 0 2)
) according to Fig. 33
R12
Current setpoint adaptation

Travel to endstop
(set using R12)
Condition: Terminal 96 connected to

terminal 44
VS
t = 230 ms
R54 k =
I s
|=11 ... 5V
10 V
et
Limiting
according to Fig. 33
Speed controller monitoring inactive
1) As supplied: R14 = open

2) R=
N set
10V
NN
rated
max
0.5
40 k

VS/3-29

Feed modules (VS)
Function
VS
04.97
Component(s)
Effect
Travel to end stop

(variable via terminal 96)

voltage at terminal 96
according
to
Fig. 3-4
Limiting acc. to Fig. 3-4,

ncontr. monitoring inactive
Settingup operation
(central, via terminal 112 on
the
NE module)
R12 according to
Fig.KEIN MERKER
terminal 112 = open
(when supplied, terminal 112 to
terminal 9)
Limiting according to Fig.KEIN MERKER,

Speed controller monitoring inactive
Current reduced after timer, n

controller at end stop, has
expired
R2 according to Fig. 3-5

R32 = open
Reduction acc. to Fig. 3-5

ncontr. monit. disabled
Current reduced after

mer has expired

R32 = open
S1duty =
1.1 I
R9 according to Fig. 3-6
rated
S1duty =
Limiting acc. to Fig. 3-6
R46 + R48 = open (as

supplied)
R46
for neg. I set at socket T
R48 for pos. I set at socket T
no weight equalization
Suppl. I set acc. to Fig. 3-7
Suppl. I set acc. to Fig. 3-7
Response
threshold I
Electronic weight
equalization
Tachometer
adaptation
2)
1
)
R6, R7, R8 tolerance
0.1%
R542
I set
ta
4
Refer to Fig.3-1
R
Clock frequency
rated
k1
ch
ta
t
a
Vta
7.5
[%]
I max
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0.1
Fig. 3-3
1)
1.0
10.0
100.0
Current setpoint limiting as a function R12, 30 V
1000.0
R12 [k ]
Final
value
1%
terminal 96 12 V
Warning
For version 4620087701.00 of the control board, for weight compensation,
internal current setpoint must be reduced via R42!
R42 [k ] =
20 I weight
equalization/I
1 I weight
compensation/I
max
max
For control boards, from version 4620087701.01 onwards, zero offset cannot be
measured after R46 and R48 have been mounted and an axis enabled. If
and R48 have been correctly mounted according to Fig. 3-7, the offset must
able to be measured when the axis is inhibited.
2) Refer to Section 3.1.1
VS/3-30

07.94

Feed modules (VS)
Iset
[%]
Imax
100
90
80
70
60
50
VS
40
30
20
Final
value
1%
10
0
1
Fig. 3-4
VT.96
Current setpoint limiting as a function of the voltage at terminal 96 (R12=open)
Iset
Imax
[%]
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
Initial 0
value
1.0
1%
Fig. 3-5
10.0
100.0
R2 k
Current setpoint limiting as a function of R2

VS/3-31

Feed modules (VS)
Icont.
Irated
[%]
04.97
Illegal area
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
VS
40
30
20
10
0
10.0
Fig. 3-6
100.0
1000.0
R9 k
Response threshold I2t monitoring as a function R9
Iweight compensation/Imax
1.0
0.8
0.6
Illegal area
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.03
R46 and
R48 [k ]
0.02
0.01
Fig. 3-7
5 6.8 10 15 22 27 39 56 100 150 220 390

5.6
47 68
470
680 1000
Supplementary current setpoint for electronic weight equalization
Inverter clock frequency PBM

If noise problems occur (the motor makes a whistling sound), the PWM inverter
clock frequency can be adapted by mounting R369 on the basic board.
In this case, it must be observed that the available current (In, Imax) is reduced when the clock frequency is increased. (refer to Pj Section 4.1)
The I2t limiting is designed for a pulse frequency set in the factory to 3.3 kHz
and a max. ambient temperature of 40 C. When this value is exceeded (pulse
frequency and/or ambient temperature), the response threshold must be adapted (refer to Fig. 3-2).
The characteristic is valid according to Fig. 3-1.
VS/3-32

07.94
4 Setpoint interfaces
Feed modules (VS)
Setpoint interfaces
Definitions:
VS
Optimal, taking into account the setpoint input characteristics
Possible
Not permissible, and to some extent also not possible
Table 4-1
Main setpointsupplementary setpoints
Mode
Setpoint
Speed controlled
Current controlled
Main setpoint
Term.24/
0
X
Main setpoint
Supplementary
setpoint
Main setpoint
Main spindle drive

o tion
Main spindle drive
operation
Main setpoint
Main spindle drive

option
C axis
Main setpoint
Int.
setpoint
term.22
Int.
setpoint
term.23
Socket
NZ
Term.258
Supplementary
setpoint
Slave, I controlled
Current setpoint
input
Table 4-2
Term.56/
4
X
X
Supplementary
setpoint
X
Supplementary
setpoint
X
Supplementary
setpoint
Motor direction of rotation for a positive setpoint and S2.1 = ON
Mode
Term.56/14
Term.24/20
S eed controlled
ccw
cw
Current controlled
cw
Term.22
Term.23
R16/18 cw
R19/22 cw
R17/18 ccw
R21/22 ccw
R16/18 cw
R19/22 cw
R17/18 ccw
R21/22 ccw
Socket NZ
Master/slav
term.258
ccw
cw
(slave)
When viewing the motor shaft, drive end

VS/4-33
07.94
Feed modules (VS)
VS

VS/4-34
VS
07.94
0
1
7
5
65
The setting shown in the diagram
3
44
5.1 Presettings
Feed modules (VS)
VS/5-35
Startup with main spindle drive option

The settings for the control parameters for Caxis operation on the parameter
board, control parameters for main spindle drive operation, on the option board.
The main spindle drive option components which have to be modified, are
mounted on solder pins (layout, refer to Section 9).
10
9/
910
0/1
88
5.1
Presettings
5.1.1
corresponds to 7 scale divisions.
Warning
Parameter board changes: Remove R4, R5 and R54 and, if necessary, C4
(when supplied this is not mounted).
If this is not observed, it could result in undesirable axis motion!
Settings with the control board removed
Rampup time
Table 5-1
Rampup time from 0 V to 10 V in s via terminal 56/14, set using potentiometer

R20 and terminal 102
Term.102 open
Term.102 to
term. 9
0.0
1
0.1
0.1
1
1.0
8
0.2
1
2.0
7
0.3
1
3.0
6
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.11
4.0
4
5.0
3
6.0
2
7.0
1
8.0
1
9.0
4
11.0
5
The rampup time range via R20 can be changed by modifying R27/R60.

10
5.1.1 Settings with the control board removed

Feed modules (VS)
04.97
Torque
limiting
Constant power
range
I/I max
R76
100
13
VS
23
Fig. 5-1
R225
70
R214
100
n/n rated in %
Torque limiting
Table 5-2
Adjustable start of the constant power range referred to n

% via R214
Pot. R214
Start of the
range in %
Table 5-3
=max
10 V in
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
Deviation
in %
Table 5-4
+20
10
26
Deviations of the selected power to constant power at the point n

via R213
Pot. R213
I s
R213
22
inmax
%
10
20
Constant torque limiting I

when supplied
/Iset
max
in % via R76 (solder pins), R76 is open
R76 in k
4.3
6.2
8.2
11
15
18
22
27
36
in %
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
m
a
Intermediate values can be determined by interpolating

Table 5-5
Speeddependent torque limiting I

R226 = 20 k
R225 in k
I s
in %
/I
set max
in % via R225 (solder pins) for
2.4
4.7
7.5
11
16
22
30
47
70
100
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
85
12 % I set/Imax are set as standard. Intermediate values are obtained by interpolating.
VS/5-36

07.94

Feed modules (VS)
Normalization ofM/P display

Table 5-6
Normalization via potentiometer R903 (when supplied, factor = 1)
Pot. R903
Normalization
Factor
Relay function, limit value stage

output
10
2.8
2.6
2.4
2.2
2.0
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
Terminal selected using 0 resistors

T.110
T.108
T.115
T.114
R108 1)
R170
R106
1)
R1711)
|Iact |> Ix2)
Fig. 5-2
R107
|n
act|<
T.216
T.214
T.127
R1051)
R99
R103
R97
T.126
1)
R98
1)
R104 1)
min3)
|n act |< nx3)
=n
act
set3)
Relay functions
1) As supplied
2) Relay drops out
3) Relay pullsin if the function is fulfilled.

VS/5-37
VS

Feed modules (VS)
Table 5-7
04.97
Limit value functions
Limit value
stage
Range
Settings via fixed values

Smoothing for relay contact bounce = C87
31 mV,
Suppressed n s
e step
:
= 10 mV,
R179 = 2
I a I x
pot. R211
Pot.
R211
I =in %
VS
n
n
4.5 %...100 %
0
10
0
90
81
71
62
52
43
0.3 %...1.7 %
pot. R10
24
10
14
4.5
plied)
max
steresis
n
1
Pot. R10
=in
n a %
n x
pot. R43
0.3 0.4
0.5
0.7
4
8
3
3 %...100 %
Pot. R43
n
1
n =in %
3.4 13
23
34
44
54
64
n set =
n set*
Smoothing for relay contact bounce =

400 mV hysteresis (as supplied),
7
k
33
0.8
7
10
1.02
1.1
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.74
6
1
5
9
Relay contact bounce smoothing = C68
max
7
74
8
84
9
94
10
104
Monitoring threshold:
20 mV,
n s
e diff
Only in main spindle
extension = 32 ms, C20 = 1 F
operation
Functions via fixed

values
Table 5-8
Settings via fixed values
Function
Component(s)
Effect
Rampfunction generator tracking

R270 = open
Tracking active
Tracking inactive
C40
ms = 10
Correction setpoint for main spindle

operation (term.65 brakes to setpo2)
int,
term.24)
Current actual value/power display
R900 + R901 = open (as supplied)

R900 + 901 = 40 k
No correction setpoint
Correction setpoint via T.24/20
Caxis/main spindle drive op.

setpoint, MSD: term.56/14
setpoint, C axis: term.24/20 or
fixed setpoint via term.22 or
term.23
Changeover speed, term.61
Terminal 61 = open
Terminal 61 at term.9
c
Main
spindle drive operation
Caxis operation
Changeover, refer to Fig. 53
R77/78
1)
1) Changeover speed =
2)
VS/5-38
M/P display
I a display
R160 = 1 k R207 = open
R77 (47000 R78
15)
R77 47 k + R78 (R77

+ 47 k )
Warning: The pulses are only canceled when the n
C40 F
[%]
threshold
is fallen below!
off

07.94

Feed modules (VS)
MSD
operation
Term.61 =
open
Speed
n1
Term.61 = H (w. r. t.
term.9)
Parameter
changeover
point
Change
R77 and R78
over
speed
t
n2
n1 = main spindle drive speed
n2 = Caxis speed
Fig. 5-3
Parameter changeover for Caxis

operation
Changeover function, terminal 61
Closedloop control parameters, drift setting, setpoint input

Adaptation enable
200 ms timer switchedin
Several relay functions inhibited
noff shutdown inhibited
5.1.2
Settings in operation
Setting rule
1. Set the Caxis parameters via the parameter board (tachometer, TN, KP,
drift).
Caxis parameters, refer to the speed controller optimization, Section 2
2. Set the main spindle drive parameters via potentiometers on the option
board front panel:
Pot. R44
Pot. R35=ccw
Pot. R35=cw
Fig. 5-4
2
15
10
1
1
Extending the integral action time using pot. R44 and the influence of pot. R35
on the parameter board, extending TN by a specific factor

VS/5-39
VS
5.2 Analog outputs

Feed modules (VS)
04.97
Table 5-9
Reducing the proportional gain with pot. R45 and the influence of pot. R25 on the
parameter board, reduction of Kp in %
Pot. R45
left
Potentiometer R25 cente

r
right
VS
Table 5-10
33.
1
90.
29.
5
89.
26.
3
87.
23.
3
85.
20.
4
83.
9
95.
1
4
94.
3
8
93.
3
9
92.
3
7
90.
9
11.
5
72.
4
83.
7
Lowest speed before controller and pulse inhibit (braking to n

pulse cancellation) via potentiometer R1
0.61
0.7
n o as a
of max
n
0.34
Table 5-11
Drift compensation via potentiometer R96 for n
0.4
7
0.88
1.02
8.2
4.5
0.1
64.
4
77.
48.
7
65
1.5
10
2.8
for
off terminal 64/65
1.1
1.29
1.42
10
1.56
1.69
Potentiometer R96
5.2
17. 14.
581 77.
6
5
89. 87
=set
0
Control range 30 mV
Analog outputs
Function
Terminal
Boundary condition
Speed actual value
Term.75
Nonnormalized speed actual value as for

test socket X
Power display
(utilization)
Term.162
M/P display (as supplied) Fig. 55,

M/P , Table 56, Normalization
Current actual value
Term.162
I a display by changingover
(Table 58, settings via fixed values)
M display
P display
act
M/P display
act
=I
M /P
max
max
max
t
Fig. 5-5
VS/5-40
07.94
M/P display

Feed modules (VS)
Free for supplementary texts
6
VS

VS/6-41
07.94
Feed modules (VS)
VS
Check the motorPWM inverter connection:

Cable for power connection
Cable for rotor position and tachometer
Main switch: OFF
VS/6-42
07.94

SIMODRIVE
611A Installation and StartUp Guide/IAA/04.97 Edition
No fault
7 Power on
Feed modules (VS)
VS/7-43
Poweron
Main switch: OFF
VS
Adapt the module to the motor,
standard settings, Section 1
Startup with battery box
Connect terminals 48, 63, 64, 663 to terminal

9
Switch (open) between terminal 65 and terminal 9
Terminals 56/14 at the battery box
Main switch: ON
L1, L2, L3 interchanged?
Set 0 V setpoint at the battery box
Briefly enable term.65 (inching)

Openup the connection between
term.63 and term.9
Motor
accelerates?
Yes fault
No
Enter a low setpoint
(e. g. 0.1 V)
Briefly enable term.65
Does drive run

continuously ?
Yes
1

7 Power on
Feed modules (VS)
07.94
Enable term.65
Optimize the speed controller or enter

experience values, Section 2
VS
Inhibit term.65
Startup completed
Inhibit term.63!
Main switch: OFF
Open the connection between term.64, 65 and terminal 9

Remove the battery box from term.56/14
VS/7-44

07.94
8.1.1 User-friendly interface

Feed modules (VS)
Maintenance and diagnostics

8.1
Test sockets and display elements of the feed modules
8.1.1
Test sockets
X
Speed setpoint (output)

Current setpoint (output)
NZ
Supplementary speed setpoint / supplementary

current setpoint 2)(input)
Reference ground (output)
Current actual value
Imax (output) 1)
10 V, corresponds to the set
Speed actual value 10 V at rated speed

(1FT503 /4 0AF71: 11 V) (output)
All outputs have a 1 k
Fig. 8-1
Operating display
Par. board inserted
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Pulse enable 663
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Controller enable 65
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Currentcontrolled
Speedcontrolled operation (standard operation

)
1)
2)
Setting value Imax refer to Section 1.2

Depending on the operating mode, speed/current controlled

VS/8-45
VS
8.1.1 User-friendly interface

Feed modules (VS)
07.94
Fault display
Fault
I t monitoring or
heatsink temperature overtemp.
Rot. pos. encoder
Speed controller
at its limit
VS
Tachometer
monitoring
I a =0
Motor overtemp.
X
X
5 V undervoltage
V faulted)
Effect:
Current
miting
Pulse
cancel.
Signal, NE:
Term.
5.x
T.291
Message FD:
T.297+
T.672/
T.674
Term.
5.x
T.5.x
T.294
Pulse
cancel.
Pulse
cancel.
Pulse
cancel.
Pulse
cancel.
Pulse
cancellation
T.297+
T.672/
T.674
T.672/
T.674
T.288+
T.672/
T.674
T.288+
T.672/
T.674
T.672/
T.6 1)
74
Sequence when the temperature or I 2t monitoring responds

I 2t monitoring:
an alarm is issued at terminal 5.x of the NE module (nonlatching) a minimum of 250 ms before
limiting is activated
when limiting is activated, fault 1 is displayed and a signal is output at terminal 291 (latching)
Heatsink temperature rise monitoring:
an alarm is issued at terminal 5.x of the NE module when the heatsink shutdown temperature is
reached (nonlatching)
the pulses are inhibited, fault 1 is displayed and a signal is output at terminal 291 + terminal
672/terminal 674 after typically 4 s (latching)
Motor overtemperature
SIMODRIVE 611 feed modules with closedloop control for 1FT5 servomotors are equipped with an evaluation circuit for the PTC thermistors integrated in the motor windings.
The motors are protected from inadmissible high winding temperatures with the monitoring combination
(tripping temperature 150 C).
As the drive shouldnt unpredictably intervene in the machining process, the trip is only signaled to the
SIMODRIVE 611 via individual fault signal terminal 289/294/296 (latching) or centrally via terminals 5.1,
5.2 and 5.3 of the infeed module (latching) when the response temperature is reached (the drive is not
shutdown).
There is no internal system response to protect the motor. The user must ensure that the motor can thermally recover after the signal has been issued, by appropriately configuring the adaptation control. In this
case, it may be required to immediately shutdown the motor.
1) Depending on the mode (ready/fault signal)
VS/8-46

07.94
8.1.2 Standard interface

Feed modules (VS)
Continued: Motor overtemperature

A delay time is not permissible.
If the motor is not thermally monitored, when an overload situation occurs or if the drive converter was over
dimensioned, the complete drive could be destroyed.
8.1.2
Standard interface
Test sockets and

fault displays
Current actual value 10 V for I
Current setpoint 10 V at
W
T H2/M
1/
VS
max
max
IRed LED:Motor encoder fault

Tach. fault, rotor position encoder
fault
Red LED:Axis fault
Speed controller at its end stop
Heatsink temperature
Motor temperature rise
I
t monitoring
Speed actual value 10 V at rated speed
(1FT503 /4 0AF71: 11 V)
general reference ground

All outputs
have
a
10
k
output
resistance
A
Fig. 8-2
Sequence when the temperature or I 2t monitoring responds

I 2tmonitoring
min. 250 ms before limiting starts, an alarm is issued at terminal 5.x of the NE module (nonlatching)
fault display H1 is output when limiting starts.
Heatsink temperature monitoring:
an alarm is issued at terminal 5.x of the NE module when the heatsink shutdown temperature is
reached (nonlatching)
the pulses are inhibited, fault H1 is displayed and a signal is issued at terminal 72/terminal
73/terminal 74 of the NE module after typically 4 s (latching)
SIMODRIVE 611 feed modules with closedloop control for 1FT5 servomotors are equipped with an evaluation circuit for the PTC thermistors integrated in the motor windings.
The motors are protected from inadmissible high winding temperatures with the monitoring combination
(tripping temperature 150 C).
As the drive shouldnt unpredictably intervene in the machining process, the trip is only signaled to the
SIMODRIVE 611 or centrally via terminals 5.1, 5.2 and 5.3 of the infeed module (latching) as signal when
the response temperature is reached (the drive is not shutdown).
There is no internal system response to protect the motor. The user must ensure that the motor can thermally recover after the signal has been issued, by appropriately configuring the adaptation control. In this
case, it may be required to immediately shutdown the motor.
A delay time is not permissible.
If the motor is not thermally monitored, when an overload situation occurs or if the drive converter was over
dimensioned, the complete drive could be destroyed.

VS/8-47
8.2 Troubleshooting
Feed modules (VS)
8.2
Troubleshooting
Table 8-1
Troubleshooting
Fault, user
friendly interface
VS
04.97
Fault, standard
interface
Possible fault cause
H1
RMS torque too high? ambient temp. 40 C?
H2
Actual value cable and shield correctly connected? Motor encoder

defective?
H1
Motor overloaded, RMS torque too high?
H2
Refer to F2
H1
Axis mechanically locked? RMS torque too high?
H1
Motor incorrectly connected? External moment of inertia too high?

RMS to high (mechanically locked)?
Motor feeder interrupted, motor feeder, shortcircuit/ground fault

(Vce monitoring stored up to POWERON)?
Fault cannot be removed replace module
5V level faulted
VS/8-48
replace module

07.94
9.1 Connecting terminals

Feed modules (VS)
Appendix
9.1
Connecting terminals
Table 9-1
Term.
No.
Desig.
Function
Ty
e 1
)
U2
V2
W2
Motor connection
I
I
0V
0V
P600
M600
DC link
DC link
Equipment bus
I/O
I/O
I/O
+300 V
300 V
0V...
10V
max.
250V
X151/
351
5
1
4
AS
AS
2
66
9
6
9
2
)2
)
X321
X321
Speed setpoint 1
Differential input
I
I
X331
X331
Checkback contact
Relay, start inhibit
NC
X331
X331
3
Pulse
3
enable
Enable
3
Controller
voltage
enable
3)5)
Enable
Select int. fixed setpoint 3 /
rentcontrolled
operation
Select
int. fixed setpoint 3)cur2
Speed setpoint 2/current setpoint, different input
X331
X331
X331
X331
X331
Current setpoint limiting

Electronics voltage
Integrator inhibit, n controller
Current setpoint (master/slave)
Norm. current actual value
X331
X331
X331
X331
X331
X331
2232
)
2 2
)
4 6
)6
4 6)
2 )6
5 )6
)
28
28
29
29
1
29
3
29
4
29
6
29
7
29
9
X341
X341
X341
X341
X341
X341
X341
X341
X341
Relay signals, center contact

Speed controller at its limit
I
t monitoring
Motor temperature rise
Tachometer/rotor position
der fault
enco-
IO
I
O
I
+21...30
+24
V V
+13...30 V
+24 V
+13...30 V
+13...30 V
I
I
I
I
I/O
O
I
N
NC
N
O
NC
N
O
NC
N
O
NC
According to the
Planning Guide
3ph. 0...450 V AC
PE1
PE2
Max. crosssection
Bolt
Bolt
Busbar
Busbar
Ribbon cable
7)
/1A,
30 V
4)
/2A
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
0V...10 V (340 s
smoothing)
0...30 V
15 V/10 mA
+13...30 V
0 V...10
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
=1 k
V/R
max. 30 V/1 A
max. 30 V/1 A
max. 30 V/1 A
max. 30 V/1 A
max. 30 V/1 A
max. 30 V/1 A
max. 30 V/1 A
max. 30 V/1 A
7
)
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1) I = input, O = output, NC = NC contact, NO = NO contact (for signal: Closed=high, open=low)

2) Reference point of the differential input
3) Reference ground terminal 19 (not connected with general reference ground terminal 15)
4) Voltage referred to PE potential
5) Refer to NE Section 3.1 ... 3.2
6) Terminal T.15 on the NE module is the reference ground.
7) The commonmode range of the differential input is
24V with respect to the PE potential and may never
be exceeded.

VS/9-49
VS

Feed modules (VS)
Table 9-1
Term.
No.
67
67
67
4
04.97
Desig.
Function
Ty
e 1
)
X341
X341
X341
Ready fault signal
X311
Motor encoder
N
I
NC

30 V/1 4)
30 V/1 A
30 V/1 A
Max. crosssection
1.5
1.5
1.5
mm
2
2
2
VS
2) Reference point of the differential input

4) Voltage referred to PE potential
VS/9-50

07.94
Table 9-2
Term.
No.
1 2)
0 2)
6
1 3
7
5 3
1
6
110
108
115
114
216
214
127
126
Table 9-3
Term.
No.

Feed modules (VS)
Main spindle drive option (only possible for userfriendly interface)

Desig.
X312
X312
X312
X312
X322
X322
X322
X322
X322
X322
X322
X322
Function
T = 1 : 10
Caxis operation
n a
P ca act5)
Ic a
n a n
n ac
n sc
min
x
set*
Typ 1
)
+13 V...30
+13 V...30
V/R
0 V... 10 V
0 V... 10 V
I
I
O
O
4
)
4
NO/N
I
NO/N
C I
NO/N
C I
NO/N
C I
)4
)4
)
Max. cross
tion
2
2
2
2
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
= 1.5 k
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Standard interface
Desig.
U2
V2
W2
Function
Motor connection
Typ
1)
Max. crosssection
3ph. 0...450 V AC
According to the
Planning Guide
PE1
PE2
I
I
0V
0V
P600
M600
DC link
DC link
Equipment bus
I/O
I/O
I/O
+300 V
300 V
NC
250 V AC/1 A, 30 V DC/2A
1.5
I
O
+21 V...30 V
+24 V
2
2
I
I
I
O
I
O
0 V... 10 V
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
X151/35
AS1
AS2
663
9 6)
X321
X321
1
X321
X321
56.1
14.1
65.1
9 6)
22.1
9 6)
X331
X331
X331
X331
X331
X331
56.2
14.2
65.2
9 6)
22.2
9 6)
X332
X332
X332
X332
X332
X332
Checkback signal contact

Pulse
2
Enable
2)
voltage
Speed setpoint/current setpoint
(differential input)
2)
Controller
2
enable
Enable
) 2)
Select
voltageI
controller
2)
Enable
voltage
Speed setpoint/current setpoint
2)
Controller
2
enable
Enable
) 2)
Select
voltageI
2)
controller
Enable
voltage
I
I
I
O
I
O
Bolt
Bolt
Busbar
Busbar
Ribbon cable
7)
+13 V...30 V
+24 V
+13 V...30 V
+24 V
0 V... 10 V
+13 V...30 V
+24 V
+13 V...30 V
+24 V
7)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

3) Terminal 15 on the NE module is the reference ground.
4) Can be optionally changedover using jumpers
5) The power display is set as standard
6) refer to NE Section 3.1 ... 3.2
7) The common mode range of the differential input is
24V with respect to the PE potential and may never
be exceeded.

VS/9-51
VS
9.2 Block diagram, MSD option board

Feed modules (VS)
9.2
07.94
Block diagram, MSD option board
VS
R124 R125
V29
V31
C59
V30
C61
V32
U7
K4
3 2 1
UC
R105
X
K3
V12
R107
R104
R97
5
K1
R31
5
1
R48
R2
C5
R906
R5
R270
1
1
R160
N
R902
V39
V20R
V8
3 2
1
R211
Fig. 9-1
C41
V35
3 2 1
V1
N X11
R33
V52
5 4
X12C68
N X3
X1
X4
C40 X2
NX
C28
2
N
3 2 1
V47
R
1
C
V45
R20
X10
R207
2 1
X8 C20
X9
R214
V4
UCX7
R108
R239
3 2 1
R43
R98
R225
V6
V17 V42 R10

UC
R99
V21
3 2 1
V22
3 2 1
5
K2
R226
R274
UC
R103
V14
R213
R100
R106
R76
V10
R85
R171
R78
V9
U
R80
R170
96
R77
6.23
U5
V1
9
V1
8
V43
X5
R161R92
R
R111
R112
C22
R164
R93
X6 C87
1
Block diagram MSD option board
The capacitors are assigned to the adjacent solder pins.
VS/9-52

07.94
9.3
9.3 Block diagram, parameter board

Feed modules (VS)
Block diagram, parameter board
R1
R2
Tacho
meter
1
1
2
X60 X69
R10
X61 X70
R12
R6
X62 X71
R36
R7
R8
X82
R38
R16
R39
R17
R40
R18
S2
R9
Fig. 9-2
X54 X59
C
R35
Adapt
X
X
R5
R25
TN
R4
X53 X58
R11
Kp(N)
X52 X57
R37
R15
R3
R20
X72 R34
R14
X51 X56
Drift
R13
X50 X55
R19
R21
R42
R22
R44
VS
R43
R23
R45
R24
R46
R26
R47
R27
R48
R28
R29
R50
R30
R51
R49
R52
R31
R32
R53
R54
R33
X81
X91
Block diagram, parameter board

9.4 Block diagram, standard interface

Feed modules (VS)
VS/9-53
04.97
9.4
Block diagram, standard interface
VS
VS/9-54

Feed modules, resolver control (VR)

1
5
6
7
8
9
Short startup, standard

..................................
VR/1-3
settings
....
1.1
Pole
...........................................
VR/1-3
numbers
.....
1.2
Speed actual value normalization
......................
VR/1-4
[RPM]
...
1.3
Current controller
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/1-5
Startup is subdivided into
after the standard setting, other startup
settings
. .steps,
.
Optimization,steps
speed
. . . . . . . . can
. . . be
. . .poweredup.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/2-13
can follow, or the. equipment
controller
...
2.1
Tachometer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/2-14
adjustment
...
2.2
Setting the proportional gain
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/2-15
Kp
...
2.3
Setting the integral action
VR/2-16
N ...........................
time T
...
2.4
Drift
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/2-16
Sect. 1
offset
.....
Startup, supplementary
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/3-17
functions
....
3.1
Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Sect.
. . . 2. . . . . . .
VR/3-17
processing
.....
3.2
Current setpoint
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/3-17
limiting
...
Sect. 3
3.3
Other
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/3-18
functions
. . . . .interfaces
Setpoint
3.4
Operating feed modules without connected
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/3-20
motor
..
Setpoint
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/4-21
interfaces
.....
4.1
Overvie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VR/4-21
w
......
4.2
External speed setpoint
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/4-22
smoothing
..
Free for
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/5-23
expansions
.....
Free for
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/6-25
expansions
.....
Power
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/7-27
Sect. 8
up
......
Maintenance and
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/8-29
diagnostics
....
Appendi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sect.
. . . .9 . . . . . . . VR/9-31
x
......
9.1
Termin
..............................................
VR/9-31
als
......
9.2
Block
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/9-32
9.2.1
Block diagram, resolver
.............................
VR/9-32
9.2.2
Block diagram, DIL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/9-34
switch
...
9.3
Connector
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/9-35
9.3.1
X311/X312, encoder interface, axis 1/axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VR/9-35
9.3.2
X391/X392, WSG interface, axis
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR/9-35
1/axis 2
..

Edition
VRi
12.94
Sect.
4
Siemens AG 1997
All Rights
reserved
VR
Startup steps for

feed drive modules,
resolver control
Short startup
standard settings
Optimization,
speed controller
Supplementary functions
VR
Power.up, Sect. 7
Service and
diagnostics
Appendix
VRii
1.1 Pole numbers
07.94
Short startup, standard settings
The setting elements (switches) are located on the board, and must be set before the control card is installed in the inverter module.
1.1
Pole numbers
Wichtig
The pole (pair) numbers for the motor and resolver must be set before start
Otherwise, the drive will be locked.
Axis 1:
Axis 2:
Table 1-1
DIL switch S1, contacts 14

Pole numbers
2p motor
2presolver
Axis 1
S1.x ON
1+2
S1.x ON
3+4
Axis 2
S2.x ON
1+2
S2.x ON
3+4
The pole pair numbers of the motors are dependent on the shaft height.
Table 1-2
Pole numbers of 1FT6 motors
Shaft height
36
48
63
80
100
132
Pole No. 2P
Table 1-3
Pole numbers of 1FK6 motors
Shaft height
36
48
63
80
100
Pole No. 2P
The pole (pair) number of the standard resolver is 2p=2.

The pole (pair) number of the resolver is specified on the motor rating
plate.

VR/1-3
VR
1.2 Speed actual value normalization [RPM]
04.97
1.2
Speed actual value normalization RPM

These normalizations are valid for standard resolver pole numbers, 2p=2.
Normalization for special pole numbers, 2p=4, 6, 8, on request
It is recommended that normalization is set up for the motor rated speed. For
motors with rated speeds 4500 RPM it is recommended that the normalization is
set, which is closest to the required rated system speed.
For motors with rated speed 1500 RPM, the 2000 RPM normalization should be
set.
Axis 1:
Axis 2:
Table 1-4
VR

DIL switch S4 contacts 58
Speed normalization
2000
3000
3000
Axis 1
n rated
S4.x ON
6000
1+3
2+4
1+2+3+4
Axis 2
S4.x ON
5+7
6+8
5+6+7+8
Optionally possible
Refer to Section 2.1 for more detailed information regarding the speed ranges
which can be set.
VR/1-4

07.94

1.3
Current controller settings
DIL switch
Axis 1:
Axis 2:
DIL switch S3
DIL switch S6
Current limit
(set
max
value)
[%]
ILimit (power module)
Imax must be reduced down to at least the peak current permitted for the motor.
Table 1-5
Current actual value normalization%
I
Axis1
Axis2
Current controller
gain
100
70
S3.xMI
ON
1+2
S6.x ON
1+2
LI
Kp(I)
I max *
<
LA
25
ILimit* Current limit*
V
R
25
Imax = set maximum current (RMS value) of the axis in A

LA = rotating field inductance of the motor in mH (RMS value) (refer to the
Planning Guide, AC Motors for Feed and Main Spindle Drives).
Roundoff the calculated values to values which can be set!
Table 1-6
Current controller gain Kp (I)
Kp(I)
7.5
8.5
9.5
Axis 1
S3.x ON
3+7
4+8
3+4
+
7+8
5+9
3+5
+
7+9
4+5
+
8+9
3+4
5+7
+
8+9
3+6
+
7+1
0
Axis 2
S6.x ON
3+7
4+8
3+4
+
7+8
5+9
3+5
+
7+9
4+5
+
8+9
3+4
5+7
+
8+9
3+6
+
7+1
0
Adaptation tables
Definition:
10.
54+6
11.
53+4
12.
5
5+6
13.
5
3+5
14.
5
4+5
4+6
+
8+10
3+4
6+7
+
8+1
0
5+6
+
9+1
0
3+5
6+7
+
9+1
0
4+5
6+8
+
9+1
0
+
8+10
6+7
+
8+1
0
+
9+1
0
6+7
+
9+1
0
6+8
+
9+1
0
16
3+4
5+6
+
7+8
+
9+1
0
3+4
5+6
+
7+8
+
9+1
0
o = Contact in the basic OFF setting

x = Contact in the ON setting

VR/1-5

Table 1-7
04.97
Adaptation tables for feed modules, resolver control 3/6A
Current act. val.

Axis 1: S3
Axis 2: S6
Servomotor
1FT
Nm
V
R
n rated
RPM
Contact
1+2
Current controller gain Kp(I)

Axis 1: S3
Axis 2: S6
Contact
max
3+
7
o
4+
8
o
5+
9
x
6+1
0
o
o
K (I)
60314AK
0.83
1.2
6000
70
60344AK
1.65
2.15
6000
100
60414AF
2.15
1.55
3000
100
60414AK
2.15
2.55
6000
100
4.0
60444AF
4.15
2.50
3000
100
7.5
6061
6AC
60616AF
3.30
1.60
2000
100
3.30
2.25
3000
100
6062
6AC
5.00
2.30
2000
100
1FK
M o Nm
n rated
RPM
Contact
1+2
60326AK
0.90
1.40
6000
60406AF
1.30
1.10
3000
4.0
x
100
3+
7
x
4+
8
x
70
10.5
16.0
11.5
8.5
Contact
max
5.0
K (I)
5+
9
o
6+1
0
o
6.0
4.0
60406AK
1.3
2.2
6000
100
2.0
60426AF
2.65
2.20
3000
100
4.0
VR/1-6

07.94
Table 1-8

Adaptation table for feed modules, resolver control 5/10 A
Current act. val. normaliz.

Axis 1: S3
Axis 2: S6
Servomotor
1FT
M o N
60344AK
1.65
n rated
RPM
Contact
1+2
2.15
6000

Axis 1: S3
Axis 2: S6
Contact
max
70
3+
7
o
4+
8
o
5+
9
x
6+1
0o
K (I)
5.0
60414AF
2.15
1.55
3000
70
14.5
60414AK
2.15
2.55
6000
100
7.5
60444AF
4.15
2.50
3000
100
13.5
60444AK
4.15
4.85
6000
100
4.0
60616AF
3.30
2.25
3000
100
16.0
60616AH
3.30
3.35
4500
100
7.5
60616AK
3.30
4.10
6000
100
4.0
60626AC
5.00
2.30
2000
70
16.0
60626AF
5.00
3.40
3000
100
10.5
60626AH
5.00
4.80
4500
100
5.0
60626AK
5.00
6.40
6000
100
3.0
60646AC
7.90
3.50
2000
100
14.5
60646AF
7.90
5.00
3000
100
7.5
60818AC
6.60
3.40
2000
100
13.5
1FK
M o N
n rated
RPM
Contact
1+2
60406AK
1.30
2.20
6000
70
3+
7
o
4+
8
x
5+
9
o
60426AF
2.65
2.20
3000
100
7.5
60606AF
5.00
3.60
3000
100
7.5
60806AF
6.60
4.50
3000
100
7.5

Contact
max
6+1
0o
K (I)
3.0
VR/1-7
VR

Table 1-9
04.97

Axis 1: S3
Axis 2: S6
Servomotor
1FT
VR
n rated
RPM
Contact
1+2
o
60444AK
4.15
4.85
6000

Axis 1: S3
Axis 2: S6
Contact
max
100
3+
7
x
4+
8
o
5+
9
x
6+1
0o
K (I)
6.0
60616AF
3.30
2.25
3000
70
16.0
60616AH
3.30
3.25
4500
100
11.5
60616AK
3.30
4.10
6000
100
7.5
60626AF
5.00
3.40
3000
100
16.0
60626AH
5.00
4.80
4500
100
8.5
60626AK
5.00
6.40
6000
100
5.0
60646AC
7.90
3.50
2000
70
16.0
60646AF
7.90
5.00
3000
100
12.5
60646AH
7.90
7.60
4500
100
5.0
60646AK
7.90
9.90
6000
100
3.0
60818AC
6.60
3.40
2000
70
16.0
60818AF
6.60
4.90
3000
100
10.5
60818AH
6.60
7.40
4500
100
5.0
60818AK
6.60
9.40
6000
100
3.0
60828AC
10.40
5.50
2000
100
14.5
60828AF
10.40
8.20
3000
100
6.0
60848AC
16.20
7.55
2000
100
10.5
60848AK
16.20
20.50
6000
100
1.0
61028AB
22.40
7.40
1500
100
12.5
1FK
M o Nm
60606AF
5.00
60636AF
n rated
RPM
Contact
1+2
3.60
3000
9.10
6.60
3000
60806AF
6.60
4.50
60836AF
13.30
8.50
61008AF
15.00
10.20
VR/1-8
Contact
max
70
3+
7
x
4+
8
o
5+
9
o
100
3000
100
3000
100
3000
100
6+1
0x
K (I)
9.5
6.0
12.5
7.5
3.0

07.94
Table 1-10


Axis 1: S3
Axis 2: S6
Servomotor
1FT
Nm
6AK
60646AF
6064
6AH
6064
6AK
6081
8AH
6081
n rated
RPM
Contact
1+2
Contact
max
4+
8
x
5+
9
o
6+1
0x
K (I)
5.00
4.80
4500
70
3+
7
x
5.00
6.40
6000
100
9.5
7.90
5.00
3000
70
16.0
7.90
7.60
4500
100
10.5
7.90
9.90
6000
100
6.0
6.60
7.40
4500
100
10.5
6062
6AH
6062

Axis 1: S3
Axis 2: S6
11.5
8AK
60828AF
6.60
9.40
6000
100
6.0
10.40
8.20
3000
100
13.5
6082
8AH
6082
10.40
12.20
4500
100
6.0
10.40
14.65
6000
100
4.0
16.20
7.55
2000
70
14.5
16.20
11.30
3000
100
9.5
16.20
16.70
4500
100
4.0
16.20
20.50
6000
100
3.0
22.40
10.00
2000
100
16.0
22.40
14.40
3000
100
8.5
22.40
20.40
4500
100
4.0
22.40
7.40
1500
70
16.0
22.40
10.20
2000
100
13.5
22.40
14.20
3000
100
7.5
22.40
20.60
4500
100
3.0
41.50
13.80
1500
100
14.5
41.50
18.40
2000
100
8.5
22.00
16.30
3000
100
8.5
n rated
RPM
Contact
1+2
4+
8
x
5+
9
x
8AK
6084
8AC
60848AF
6084
8AH
6084
8AK
6086
8AC
60868AF
6086
8AH
6102
8AB
6102
8AC
61028AF
6102
8AH
6105
8AB
6105
8AC
60848SF
1FK
M o Nm
Contact
max
60636AF
9.10
6.60
3000
70
60836AF
13.30
8.50
3000
100
13.5
61008AF
15.00
10.20
3000
100
6.0
61018AF
22.40
14.40
3000
100
5.0
61038AF
30.00
19.00
3000
100
3.0

6+1
0o
K (I)
3+
7
o
7.5
VR/1-9
VR

Table 1-11
07.94

Axis 1: S3
Axis 2: S6
Servomotor
1FT
M o Nm
n rated
RPM
Contact
1+2
Contact
max
60626AK
5.00
6.40
6000
70
6064
6AH
60646AK
7.90
7.60
4500
70
11.5
7.90
9.90
6000
100
9.5
60818AK
6.60
9.40
6000
70
6.0
60828AF
10.40
8.20
3000
70
14.5
6082
8AH
60828AK
10.40
12.20
4500
100
11.5
10.40
14.65
6000
100
6.0
60848AF
16.20
11.30
3000
100
16.0
6084
8AH
60848AK
16.20
16.70
4500
100
6.0
16.20
20.50
6000
100
5.0
6086
8AC
60868AF
22.40
10.00
2000
70
16.0
22.40
14.40
3000
100
9.5
6086
8AH
6102
22.40
20.40
4500
100
6.0
22.40
10.20
2000
70
16.0
22.40
14.20
3000
100
11.5
6102
8AH
61058AB
22.40
20.60
4500
100
5.0
41.50
13.80
1500
70
16.0
6105
8AC
61058AF
41.50
18.40
2000
100
13.5
41.50
27.70
3000
100
6.0
61088AB
58.00
18.50
1500
100
16.0
6108
8AC
61326AB
58.00
24.00
2000
100
9.5
62.00
18.50
1500
70
16.0
6132
6AC
61326AF
62.00
25.00
2000
100
12.5
62.00
37.00
3000
100
6.0
61346AB
79.00
24.00
1500
100
16.0
6134
6AC
61366AB
79.00
31.50
2000
100
14.5
95.00
28.00
1500
100
14.5
60848SF
22.00
16.30
3000
100
14.5
6084
8SH
60848SK
22.00
22.90
4500
100
6.0
22.00
31.00
6000
100
4.0
60868SF
29.50
22.30
3000
100
9.5
6105
8SC
50.00
25.00
2000
100
11.5
8AC
61028AF
VR/1-10
4+
8
x
5+
9
o
K (I)
3+
7
x
VR

Axis 1: S3
Axis 2: S6
6+1
0x
11.5

07.94

1FK
M o Nm
n rated
RPM
Contact
1+2
60836AF
13.30
8.50
3000
61008AF
15.00
10.20
3000
61018AF
22.40
14.40
61038AF
30.00
19.00
Contact
max
70
3+
7
o
4+
8
x
5+
9
x
70
3000
100
3000
100
K (I)
6+1
0x
14.5
7.5
7.5
5.0
VR

VR/1-11
07.94
VR
The unit must be poweredup to optimize the speed controller. Therefore,
9/
6
4
10
3
2

VR/1-12
07.94
2 Optimization, speed controller

10
0/1
1
The setting shown in the diagram corVR/2-13

responds to 7 scale divisions.
VR
Optimization, speed controller

The additional smoothing functions in the speed controller loop (to dampen mechanical resonance effects) are described in Section 3. Proceed as follows
when optimizing the speed controller:
1. Tachometer adjustment
2. Gain Kp
3. Integral action time TN
4. Drift compensation (offset)
please observe Section 7 Poweringup.
7
6
55
4
3

2.1 Tachometer adjustment

2.1
03.96
The actual drive speed can, for a 10 V speed setpoint, be varied within the
following range around the rated speed set as described under Section 1.2:
Potentiometer
Setting range
0.6 rate
n
d
act
nN
1.
8
rated
The rated speeds, set according to Section 1.2 result in the following setting
ranges for a 10 V speed setpoint:
VR
nrated
2)
3510 RPM
to
1760 RPM
1170 RPM
1)
2)
5400 RPM
n rated
2)
nmotor N 2)
10800 RPM
n rated
2)
nmotor N 1)
to
1500
to
2000
2000
3600 RPM
3000
3000
4500
6000 [RPM]
6000 [RPM]
Rated motor speed

Rated speeds which can be set using the resolver control
Fig. 2-1
When reducing the speed setpoint, the setting range is also appropriately reduced. It is recommended, that motors with a 6000 RPM rated speed are operated
with a 8 V speed setpoint, in order to limit the selectable maximum speed.
VR/2-14
Warning
Only the specified setting ranges are possible!
The setting range and maximum speed setpoint must be defined, so that the
maximum permissible speed of the motor is never exceeded. The maximum
permissible motor speeds are specified in the Planning Guide.

07.94
2.2
2.2 Setting the proportional gain Kp

Setting the proportional gain Kp

The proportional gain Kp of the speed controller can be set using potentiometer
Kp. The gain, set with the Kp potentiometer is only insignificantly influenced by
the setting of the TN potentiometers.
Kp
170
160
140
120
100
VR
80
60
40
20
0
10
Setting, potentiometer Kp
Fig. 2-2
Proportional gain Kp as a function of the Kp potentiometer
If the electronic weight equalization is active (refer to Section 3.3) this proportional gain is increased by the following factor:
Kp (with weight equalization)
Kp

1+
Iweight equalization
IMax
VR/2-15
2.3 Setting the integral action time T

2.3
12.94
Setting the integral action time TN

The speed controller integral action time is set using potentiometer TN.
TN in ms
45
40
30
20
10
0
VR
12
Setting of pot. T
Fig. 2-3
2.4
10
Integral action time T Nas a function of T potentiometer

N
Drift offset
Compensation for nset = 0 using a potentiometer
Potentiometer drift
VR/2-16
Control range
45 mV

07.94
3.1 Position processing

Startup, supplementary functions

3.1
Position processing
The WSG interface is not influenced by the controller inhibits (terminals 63, 64,
65, 663) and from the central reset (terminal R). The output signals are switched
into a highohmic condition if encoder faults develop and for a poweron reset.
Switch for
axis 1
S1.x
S1.x
S2.x
S2.x
2p=2, 4, 6, 8 corr. to p=1, 2, 3, 4

2p=2, 4, 6, 8 corr. to p=1, 2, 3, 4
S1.6=OFF
S1.6=ON
S2.6=OFF
S2.6=ON
Pulse number of the WSG

interface
S1.7=OFF
S1.7=ON
S2.7=OFF
S2.7=ON
A before B, clockwise dir. of

B before A, clockwise dir. of
rotation
512 pulses/revolution
1024 pulses/revolution
S1.8+S11.x=OFF
S1.8=ON
S11.1=ON
S11.2=ON
S11.3=ON
S11.4=ON
S11.5=ON
S2.8+S11.x=OFF
S2.8=ON
S11.6=ON
S11.7=ON
S11.8=ON
S11.9=ON
S11.10=ON
Offset by 0 mechanical
Offset by 5.625 mechanical
3.2
3)

selected using terminal 96
or settingup operation
for
Caution!
The same limiting is effective for both functions
3)
4)
2
2

Function
2)
VR
Effect
1
Motor pole pair
1)
Resolver pole pair )
No.
4)
Phase sequence of
tracks A, B (WSG)
Zero mark
offset
1)
Switch for
axis 2
Switch for
axis 1
S12.x=OFF
S12.4=ON
S12.3=ON
S12.3+4=ON
S12.2=ON
S12.2+3=ON
S12.1=ON
Switch for
axis 2
S12.x=OFF
S12.8=ON
S12.7=ON
S12.7+8=ON
S12.6=ON
S12.6+7=ON
S12.5=ON
Effect
Limiting to 100%
Limiting to 75%
Limiting to 55%
Limiting to 45%
Limiting to 25%
Limiting to 20%
Limiting to 5%
The pole pair numbers must be set before startup (refer to Section 1)
When viewing the drive shaft end
The resulting zero mark offset is the sum of all set offsets
The number of zero marks per mechanical revolution is the same as the pole pair number p of the resolver

VR/3-17
3.3 Other functions

3.3
Other functions
Function
Integrator inhibit, speed

Integrator inhibit, I
Fault
message
controller
Master/slave
2)
Timer
stage
Functio 4)
n
VR
07.94
Switch for
axis 1
1)
Smoothing:
Speed setpoint
Speed actual value
Speed controller
T limits in the speed controller
SET
Weight equalization
Weight equalization
SET
neg. I
Calculating the
smoothing time
constants
S5.1=OFF/ON
S5.2=OFF/ON
S5.5=OFF/ON
Switch for
axis 2
S5.7=OFF/ON
S5.3=OFF/ON
S5.4=OFF/ON
S5.5=OFF/ON
S5.6=OFF/ON
S5.8=OFF/ON
Components
for axis 1
Components
for axis 2
C1
C1
43
C1
34
R4
48
R3
R3
48
C1
C1
49
C1
47
R4
54
R3
R3
55
5)
5)
5)
6)
6)
6)
5)
5)
5)
6)
6)
6)
Effect
Enable/inhibit
Enable/inhibit
Changeover, fault/ready signal
3)
2nd axis as
1
s / 300 ms
slave
As supplied
33 nF corresponds to 220 s
1 nF corresponds to 160 s
Speed setpoint t set= C135(C148) 6.67 k

Speed actual value t act= C143(C144) 6.67 k
Speed actual value t nReg= C134(C147) 160 k
The following components are on the component side (Page 2):C135, C143,
C134, R348, R349, R454
The following components are located on the solder side (Page 1):C148,
C149, C147, R355, R356, R448
External dimensioning, speed setpoint smoothing
VR/3-18
Refer to Chapter 4.2.

07.94
Parameterization
of the electronic
weight equalization
3.3 Other functions

IWeight equalization/Imax
not in the permissible range
1.0
0.8
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.08
0.06
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
Fig. 3-1
Master slave
operation
RX [k ]
5
10
20
33
56
100 150 220 390
47 68
680
470
VR
Supplementary current setpoint for electronic weight equalization
Currentcontrolled operation must always be selected for the slave axis using
terminal 22. For the 2axis control, master and slave can only be operated with
opposing directions of rotation.
When using a oneaxis control as master, the directions of rotation for the master and slave can be selected to either be opposing or the same. The selection
is realized by connecting the current setpoint output (terminal 258, terminal 15)
to the current setpoint differential input (terminal 24, terminal 20).
This function is only effective in the closedloop current controlled mode; in the closedloop speed controlled mode, the
current controller integrator is always enabled
2) For terminal 65 and monitoring speed controller at its limit
1)
Caution: Master and slave directions of rotation oppose each other

Adaptation, only for difficult operating conditions.
Adaptation is realized, if required, by solderingin SMD components
5) SMD component, type of construction 0805
6) SMD component, type of construction 0204/MiniMelf; equivalent, type of construction 0805
3)
4)

VR/3-19
3.4 Operating feed modules without connected motor

3.4
07.94
Operating feed modules without connected motor

Twoaxis modules can be operated as singleaxis module using the measures
subsequently described.
To permit correct operation of the drive group, the motor temperature and encoder fault monitoring signals must be suppressed at the axis with is not connected.
To realize this, the following signals at the encoder interface (X311/X312) of the
axis which is not connected, must be connected using shortcircuit jumpers.
Measure
Signal
Pin
Jumper
Pin
Signal
TEMP_PLUS
13
25
TEMP_MINUS
SIN_PLUS
RES_POS
SIN_MINUS
11
RES_NEG
VR
VR/3-20
Warning
If measure 1 is not made, the group signal I2t motor temperature of the
URE module is set to fault (overtemperature).
If measure 2,3 is not made, the ready relay of the I/R and UE module
fault/not ready.

07.94
Setpoint interfaces
4.1
Overview
Definitions:
X
Optimal, taking into account the characteristics of the setpoint input

Possible
Not permitted, also, to some extent, not possible
Table 4-1
Main setpointsupplementary setpoints
Operating mode
Speedcontrolled
Currentcontrolled
Setpoint
T.56/14
Main setpoint
T.24/20
Supplementary
setpoint
Main setpoint
T.258/ 1)
15
Supplementary
setpoint
Slave, Icontrolled
Current setpoint input
Main setpoint
Master, speedcontrolled
Current setpoint output
Main setpoint
1)
Supplementary
setpoint
X
Supplementary
setpoint
Only for 1axis version,

For 2axis version, the connection is realized on the board

VR/4-21
VR
4.2
04.97
External speed setpoint smoothing

Mounting locations C135 and C148 are provided on the board (refer to Section
3.3) for the internal speed setpoint smoothing. These mounting locations are
provided for SMD capacitors.Time constants of approx. 1 ms can be achieved.
Higher time constants must be realized by connectingup the appropriate circuitry to the speed setpoint input, outside the board.
The following external circuit is recommended:
20k
Rext=2k
VR
20k
. 56
e
r
e
. 14
R ext=2k
External speed
setpoint smoothing
20
k
20k
Internal speed
setpoint input
Fig. 4-1
The following is valid for the smoothing time constant of the speed setpoint:
t
set, total
set
t set, external
VR/4-22
07.94
= t
set
+ set,
t external
= internal speed setpoint smoothing (refer to Section 3.3)

=C
ext. * 2 * R
ext.=
ext.
* 4k

5 Free for expnsions
Free for expansions
5
VR

5 Free for expnsions
VR/5-23
07.94
VR/5-24
07.94

6 Free for expansions
Free for expansions
6
VR

6 Free for expansions
VR/6-25
03.96
7 Powerup
7
VR
Check connection, motorPWM inverter:

power connecting cable
0V
Main switch: OFF
Yes fault
resolver

VR/6-26
continuously?
07.94
Nofault
VR/7-27
Powerup
Main switch: OFF
Adapt module to the motor,

standard settings, Section 1
Startup using the battery box
Connect terminals 48, 63, 64, 663 to terminal 9

Switch (open) between terminal 65 and terminal 9
Terminal 56/14 at the battery box
Main switch: ON
L1, L2, L3 interchanged?

encoder cable
Set the setpoint from the battery box to
pole pair number setting for motor and
Briefly enable T.65 (inching)

Open connect. between T.63 and T.9
Motor
accelerates?
No
enter a low setpoint
(e. g. 0.1 V)
briefly enable T.65
Drive runs
Yes
1

7 Powerup
03.96
Enable terminal 65
Optimize the speed controller or set known

values, Section 2
Inhibit terminal 65
If required, commission supplementary functions: Section 3
VR
Startup completed
Inhibit terminal 63!
Main switch: OFF
open the connection between T.64, 65 and T.9

disconnect the battery box from T.56/14
VR/7-28

07.94
8 Maintenance and diagnostics

Maintenance and diagnostics

Test sockets
Terminal 16 = I
ses.
actand
Normalization:
LED display
Table 8-1
terminal 75 =n act are available for measurement purpo-
Terminal 16 10 V corresponds to Imax

Terminal 75 10 V corresponds to n rated (refer to Sect. 2.1)
An LED is available on the front panel for fault diagnostics.

Depending on the operating mode selection, either ready or fault is displayed.
LED display
LED dark
LED bright
Effect in the ready mode
Both axes of a twoaxis board are

enabled
Effect in the fault mode
Both of the axes of a twoaxis board

are not inhibited as a result of a fault
signal.
Table 8-2
Fault signals, causes
Fault
Speed controller at its endstop
Encoder fault
Heatsink overtemperature
1)
At least one axis is inhibited via a terminal or as the result of an fault

signal.
At least one axis is inhibited as the
sult of an fault signal.
Effect
1)
Store
d
Store 1)
d
Prealarm to the NE module, stored after 4 1)
sPrealarm to the NE module, not stored
Stored = pulse inhibit

VR/8-29
VR
8 Maintenance and diagnostics

X391/X392
07.94
To support fault diagnostics, the following signals are available at the connector
of the WSG interface. 2)
Signal level : HCMOS / 5V
Table 8-3
Signals for fault analysis
Signal
Name
Pin
READY
Hardware reset
Power supply voltage o.k.
Power supply voltage not o.k.:

Runup after poweron
P5 defective
ER_IL
ER_TNR
t monitoring
Speed controller end

stop
Enable
WSG signals
EN_WS
G
VR
VR/8-30
Warning
2)
Status
L=Low
Status
H=High
No fault
Fault: Heatsink temperature too high
10
No fault
Fault: The speed controller has been

at its limit for 1s/300ms
11
WSG interface inhibited

A, B, R signals in a highohmic condition
hardware reset active
encoder fault
WSG interface enable

A, B, R signals valid
Internal signals on the board for fault analysis!

Not intended for use in external boards!

07.94
9.1 Terminals
Appendix
9.1
Terminals
Table 9-1
T.
No.
Terminals
Locatio 2
)
n
Ty
e 1
Function
Typ. voltage/limit
values
0V... 10V
56
X321/322
Speed setpoint
14
X321/322
Differential input
24
X321/322
Speed/current setpoint
20
X321/322
Differential input
75
X321/322
Speed actual value
15
X321/322
Reference potential
16
X321/322
Active current actual value
96
X321/322
+13V...30V
X321/322
Switch
limiting
s
in I
Enable potential
+24V
X321/322
Changeover, n/Icontrolled
+13V...30V
9
22
0V
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
0V... 10V
Enable potential
24V
663
X331
Pulse enable
+21V...30V
AS
1
AS
2
9
X331
X331
floating contact
X332
Enable potential
N
C
N
OC
65.
1
9
X332
Controller enable, axis 1
X332
3)
Enable
potential
Controller enable, axis
2
X332
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
0V... 10V
X331
65.
2
1.5
mm
1.5
0V... 10V
3)
Max. crosssection
max.
250V
3
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
/1A
/1A
+13V...30V
D
0
24V
+13V...30V
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
For the 1axis version, X332 has the following assignment:

Table 92
T.
No.
Terminals
Location
Function
Ty
e 1
Typ. voltage/limit
values
+24V
X332
Enable potential
65.
1
15
X332
Controller enable
+13V...30V
X332
Reference potential
0V
258
X332
Current setpoint
1)
2)
3)
I = input, O = output, NC = NC contact

X321=1st axis, X322=2nd axis
Only for 2axis version
Max. crosssection
0V... 10V
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
2
2
2
2
NO = NO contact (for signal: Closed= high/open= low)

VR/9-31
VR
9.2 Block diagrams

12.94
9.2
Block diagrams
9.2.1
Block diagram, resolver control
X
X
S
VR
S
S
X
R323 C172
R454
R652
R348
R675
C134
R518
R151
R422
R623
R566
R374
R349
R371
C143
C135
C6
R624
Fig. 9-1
VR/9-32
S S
Component side

07.94
9.2 Block diagrams

VR
S
W
C
R
C
Fig. 9-2
Solder side

VR/9-33
9.2.2 Block diagram, DIL switch

9.2.2
04.97
Block diagram, DIL switch

S1
S2
S3
VR
S4
S5
S6
S11
S12
Fig. 9-3
VR/9-34
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Motor pole number

Resolver pole number
NC
Phase sequence of tracks A, B (WSG)
Pulse number, WSG interface
Zero mark offset
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Motor pole number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Resolver pole number

NC
Phase sequence of tracks A, B (WSG)
Pulse number, WSG interface
Zero mark offset
Current controller gain (active current)
Axis 1
Axis 2
Axis 1
Current controller amplifier (reactive current)
Speed actual value normalization, axis 1

Axes 1 and 2
Speed actual value normalization, axis 2
Integrator inhibit, speed controller, axis 1
Integrator inhibit, current controller, axis 1
Integrator inhibit, speed controller, axis 2
Integrator inhibit, current controller, axis 2
Ready/fault signal
2nd axis as slave; only valid for 2axis control
Timer stage, axis 1
Timer stage, axis 2
Axes 1 and 2

Current controller gain (active current)
Axis 2
Current controller amplifier (reactive current)
Zero mark offset, axis 1

Axes 1 and 2
Zero mark offset, axis 2
Current setpoint limiting, axis 1

Axes 1 and 2
Current setpoint limiting, axis 2
DIL switches

07.94
9.3 Connector assignment

9.3
Connector assignment
9.3.1
X311/X312, encoder interface, axis 1/axis 2
Resolver
control
25pin subminiatureD plug connector, UNC440 screw locking,

connected using preassembled cable
Table 9-2
Signal
Resolver control
Motor
SIN_PLUS
SIN_MINUS
5, 8, 24
COS_PLUS
11
COS_MINUS
12
RES_POS
10
RES_NEG
11
TEMP_PLUS
13
TEMP_MINUS
25
VR
Refer to Section 3.4 for axis which is not used
9.3.2
X391/X392, WSG interface, axis 1/axis 2
Resolver
control
25pin subminiatureD plug connector, UNC440 screw locking,

connected using preassembled cable
Table 9-3
Signal
1) Standard WSG interface type: RS422A / driver: 75ALS192
Remarks
Resolver control
Numerik
FMNC
WS
G
1)
Reference
pole
2
11
WS
G
WS
1)
RS422A
RS422A
3
1
4
15
1)
1)
RS422A
1)
RS422A
A_INV
G
WS
G
WS
B
B_INV
G
WS
G
WS
R
R_INV
READY
ER_IKL
ER_TNL
EN_WS
G
Type
Warning
2)
1)
RS422A
1)
RS422A
G
2
only
)
X392
Diagnostic
sDiagnostic
2
sDiagnostic
s
HCMOS !
HCMOS !
HCMOS !
HCMOS !
3
12
4
13
12
1
NC
9
NC
10
NC
11
NC
14
13
12
10
11
NC
NC
NC
NC
Internal signals on the board for fault analysis!

Not intended for use in external boards!

9
6
10
7
VR/9-35
07.94
VR
VR/9-36

Main spindle modules (HS)

1
First
steps
1.1
.....................................................
......
StartUp
......................................
Guidelines
....
1.2
Startup
......................................
instructions
....
1.3
Operator control and display elements, control
........
parameters
.
1.4
Overview, setting
.....................................
data
....
1.5
Connectio
............................................
ns
.....
Determining and setting the system
...................
configuration
...
2.1
Motor and converter data
.............................
2.1.1
Initializing the system configuration with standard
.........
2.1.2
System configuration with special
.....................
2.1.3
System configuration with star/delta motors, 2
...........
motors
..
2.2
Standard
.....................................
2.2.1
Operating
........................................
2.2.2
Firmware version and module
.......................
2.2.3
Setting parameters for standard
...................
applications
..
2.3
Other
........................................
2.3.1
Oriented spindle stop (via NC auxiliary function
...........
2.3.2
C
.................................................
2.3.3
Spindle
.......................................
2.3.4
Openloop torque controlled operation
...........
2.3.5
Monitor
.........................................
2.3.6
HPC axis (FW
......................................
2.00)
....
Parameterization of the drive converter
...................
interfaces
...
3.1
Analog speed setpoint
.............................
interface
...
3.2
Input
..........................................
3.2.1
Permanentlywired terminal
........................
3.2.2
Freelyprogrammable terminal
.....................
functions
...
3.3
Output
.........................................
3.3.1
Permanentlywired relay
...........................
3.3.2
Freelyprogrammable relay
........................
3.3.3
Variable relay
.....................................
3.3.4
Motor encoder signals for
..............................
3.3.5
Analog
..........................................
outputs
.....
Controller
..........................................
optimization
.....
4.1
Optimization, speed
..............................
controller
....
4.2
Optimization, current
.............................
controller
....

Edition
HS/1-3
HS/1-4
HS/1-7
HS/1-8
HS/1-12
HS/1-13
HS/2-15
HS/2-15
HS/2-15
HS/2-17
HS/2-20
HS/2-24
HS/2-24
HS/2-25
HS/2-26
HS/2-29
HS/2-29
HS/2-30
HS/2-30
HS/2-43
HS/2-47
HS/2-47
HS/3-53
HS/3-53
HS/3-56
HS/3-56
HS/3-57
HS/3-59
HS/3-59
HS/3-59
HS/3-63
HS/3-64
HS/3-65
HS/4-69
HS/4-69
HS/4-75
HSi
HS
07.94
HS
HS
Diagnostics and fault

....................................
analysis
.....
5.1
Diagnostic
.........................................
5.1.1
Measured value
.................................
5.1.2
Status
.........................................
5.1.3
Diagnostic
....................................
5.1.4
Test sockets X1, X2,
...................................
5.1.5
Minimum/maximum value
..........................
5.1.6
Transient recorder
................................
5.1.7
Openloop current/frequency
........................
control
....
5.2
Fault
...........................................
5.2.1
Fault display, fault
.........................
5.2.2
Fault message
......................................
list
......
Appen
.....................................................
dix
.......
6.1
Flow diagram for short start
...........................
up
.....
6.2
Code numbers for the power modules and standard
......
motors
..
6.3
Connectio
...........................................
ns
......
6.4
Connector
....................................
assignment
....
6.5
Addresses, RAM
................................
variables
.....
6.6
Setting and check data (parameter
......................
list)
....
HS/5-77
HS/5-77
HS/5-77
HS/5-78
HS/5-81
HS/5-82
HS/5-84
HS/5-84
HS/5-86
HS/5-87
HS/5-87
HS/5-88
HS/6-93
HS/6-94
HS/6-99
HS/6-103
HS/6-108
HS/6-112
HS/6-113

ii
07.94
1 First steps
HS/1-3
First steps
Warning
This unit must be professionally transported stored, installed and mounted
well as careful operator control and service to guarantee perfect, safe and
ble operation.
Severe bodily injuries or material damage can result if this warning
is not observed.
The boards have components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
Please observe the ESDS information in the foreword.
Note
HS
The board MLFB (Order No.) 6SN11210BA110AA1 can only be operated

with firmware from 3.00.
The boards, MLFB (Order Nos.):
6SN11210BA110AA0
6SN11210BA120AA0
6SN11210BA130AA0
may only be operated with Firmware 2.xx.

1.1 StartUp Guidelines
12.94
1.1
StartUp Guidelines
Structure of the
The Startup Guide is structured according to the sequence of the various
Startup Guide
startup steps.
To startup standard applications, where the preset drive converter interfaces
(Section 1.5) and controller optimization when shipped are adequate, then
the highlighted startup steps are of significance.
2 System
1 First steps
Startup
guidelines
Startup
instructions
Operator control
display elements,
and
control
parameters
HS
Overview, setting
data
Connections
Converter interfaces
Motor and converter

data sets
standard motors
special motors
star/delta
motors, 2 motors

interface
Input terminals
4 Contr. optimization
Speed controller
current controller
Output terminals
Standard applications
Additional applications
auxiliary function
M19
CAxis
Spindle positioning
torquecontrolled
operation
monitor function
HPC axis
5 Diagnostics, fault analysis

Diagnostic resources
Fault analysis
6
dix
Flow diagram for short startup
Code numbers for power sections

and standard motors
Addresses, RAM variables
Connection overviews
Fig. 1-1
Setting and monitoring data
Startup
steps
Number
HS/1-4
07.94

Parameter list
Warning
Parameter settings, which are not listed in the parameter list
(refer to Section 6.6) may not be changed.
The parameter descriptions are in the form of tables.

The sequence in which they are listed is the actual parameterizing sequence.
HS/1-5
HS
Table 1-1
Example of the parameter display
Parameter attributes
Number
Mot. 1
040.1
Mot. 2
270.1
Change
effective
P051
online,
RESET,
after
initialization,
after conversion
setting range
Value range
10
Dimensions
Description
Parameter designation
Brief description of the parameter
FW x.xx
Parameter
attributes
Mot. 1
Generally valid parameters, parameters for motor 1 (star) when using
star/delta motors or 2 motors
Mot. 2
Parameters for motor 2 (delta) when using star/delta motors or 2 motors
(P001)
Display parameter
P040.1
Gearbox stagedependent parameters

07.94
Change effective
Online
Change is immediately effective
RESET
The unit must be powereddown and up again
After
conversion
A conversion program is initiated by setting to 1H, after which the parameter is automatically reset to 0H (P143, P177, P237, P239).
After initialization
Initialization is started by setting P097 to 1H.
P051
Write protection parameters
Remove write protection by entering 4H and 10H
Setting range
HS
For several control words, the functions are activated by

setting bits.
Bit 8
Bit 9
Example:
0100H
0200H
or
or
Bit 6
Bit 7
0040H
0080H
A combination of several functions is entered by hexadecimal addition.

Example:
Bit 8 + bit 9
0300H
or
Bit 6 + bit 7
00C0H
Description
FW x.xx
Firmwarerelease dependent coding of the function and parameter extensions. The extension is available from the specified firmwarerelease.

HS/1-6
07.94
1.2
1.2 Startup instructions

Startup instructions
Startup possibilities
using
operator control and display elements (refer to Section 1.3)
Reinitialize drive
converter
(if required)
(startup of series machines):

RS232C interface with an IBM ATcompatible computer and startup software (refer to foreword)
Enter P095 power module code number according to Table 61.
Motor code number and motor encoder pulse number are saved
If an already initialized driveconverter is to be reinitialized, then proceed as
follows:
if required, backup the setting data (parameters)
remove write protection:
Set P051 to 4H
A1are automatically identified from FW 3.00.
Power module with MLFB (Order No.) 6SN112 1A 0
start initialization: Set P097 to 0H

overwrite the parameters in the drivemachine data memory:
Set P052 to 1H, and wait until P052 resets itself to 0H.
poweron reset:
Powerdown the unit and powerup approximately 2 s after the display has
disappeared:
P095 must then appear in the display.
HS/1-7
1)
HS
initialize (Section 2.1)
Firmware replacement (if required)
The firmware can be replaced using the userprompted startup software for
main spindle and induction motor modules, from version V2.00.
Firmware release
Board
before FW 3.00
6SN11210BA1 0AA0
from FW3.00
6SN11210BA110AA1
Procedure:
backup setting data (parameters)
replace the firmware using the startup program
initialize with the pulses and controller inhibited (Section 2.1)
reload the backedup settings
backup the setting data in the drivemachine data memory (Section 1.3)
Startup of series
machines, module
replacement,
component replacement
The drive converter setting data (parameters) can be saved on floppy disk using
the startup software. Proceed as follows to startup additional drive converters
1.
Initialize with the pulses and controllers inhibited:
on the floppy disk, and therefore do not have to be entered.

Start initialization.
2. Load and save the setting data from the floppy disk.
1)
It is then no longer possible/necessary to enter P095.

1.3 Operator control and display elements, control parameters

1.3
07.94
Operator control and display elements, control parameters
Operator control
and display elements
The following operator control and display elements are available on the front
panel to startup and parameterize the SIMODRIVE 611 analog system, main
spindle drive module:
3 op. contr. keys + ,
and
key)
6character LCD
The functions of the operator control elements are illustrated using parameter
P039 as example.
Gearboxstage dependent parameters are listed with subparameter numbers
(e.g. P039.1 toP039.8).
<<
HS
<
>>
>
Parameter
number
Subparameter number
Parameter value
HS/1-8
<
<<
>
>>

07.94

Control parameters
Table 1-2
Note
If data storage (P052) is interrupted due to power failure or the power being
disconnected, then the modified/changed values are lost, and when the
power
returns, the converter displays fault message F07. The parameter values
can be reset after fault message F07 is acknowledged (refer to Sec.
5.2.2).
Control parameters
Number
Change
effective
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P051
Online
P151
P051
P052
P152
Online
P053
Online
0...7FFF hex
0...1 hex
0...FFFF hex
Write protection
Remove the write protection by entering 4H or
10H.
Transfer parameters into FEPROM
Transfer into the drivemachine data memory is
initiated by setting to 1H.
The parameter is reset to 0H after successful
transfer.
Control word
Bi
t
Value
0000
0001
0000
4
5
H
0002
0000
H
0010
H
0000
0020
H
The ready relay pullsin if there is

no fault and the pulses and
controller are enabled.
no fault.
For a rampfunction generator
stop, the speed setpoint is
digitally
set to zero but the motor remains
magnetized.
The drive pulses are canceled
when the drive comes to a stop.
Speed setpoint smoothing,
Speed setpoint smoothing, active
Speed actual value smoothing inactive
Speed actual value smoothing active if simultaneously
P090 bit 3=0 FW 3.0
Bit 10/bit 9/bit
8
9
10
8 0000H
0100H
0200H
0300H
0400H
0500H
0600H
0700H
Inverter clock
frequency
[kHz]
3.2
2.8 FW 3.0
6.3
5.0 FW 3.0
4.7
3.9 FW 3.0
7.8
5.9 FW 3.0
Note:
A pulse frequency > 3.2 kHz is
only possible if the drive is de
rated (refer to Fig. 13).

HS/1-9
HS

Table 1-2
Control parameters
Number
Change
effective
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P051
Setting range
Description
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
P090
04.97
Online
10
0...FFFF hex
0800
Fault message F79 not suppressed,

Fault message F79 suppressed
H
0000
1000
H
Rampfunction generator
active
tracking,
inactive
0000
2000
H
Bipolar speed setpoint evaluation

Unipolar speed setpoint
evaluation
FW
2.00
0000
8000
H
5
Control word
Bi
t
0
HS
0000
Value
0000
0001
H
Parameter format, hex display

Parameter format, dec display
Caution!
Parameter settings in the hex
format are ineffective!
0000
0002
H
Fault message F09 activated

Fault message F09 suppressed
FW 2.00
0000
Extended monitoring for F09 inactive

Extended monitoring for F-09 active (shortcircuit M/P5) FW 3.00
0004
H
0000
RESET
0008
H
3
Online
0000
0010
H
Speed controller without integration inhibit

Speed controller with integrator
inhibit (for M19)
0000
0020
H
Fault message F-18 suppressed

Fault message F-18 active (FW
3.00)
0000
Speed controller integrator, when

limited, is set to the difference
between a torque limit and P component
Speed controller integrator is held
when limited FW 2.00
0040
H
07.94
Speed controller clock

[ s]
Standard operation
1000
HPC axis
without filter 500
with filter
600
possible from FW 3.0
Standard operation
525
HPC axis
without filter 300
with filter
350
If bit 3 is changed, it only
becomes
effective after saving in the FEPROM and poweringdown and
on
again
HS/1-10
Cyclic display of parameter number active

Cyclic display of parameter number inactive FW 3.0


Various inverter clock frequencies can be parameterized, please observe cur-
rent derating.
Table 1-3
Power
dule
m
type
Currents as a function of the inverter clock frequency, MSD

analog f
Order Nos.
6SN11231AA0
6SN11241AA0
6SN11351BA1
50 A
80 A
108 A
120 A
160 A
200 A
300 A
400 A
In/Is6/Ima
in A
Code
No.
0CA
0DA
0LA
0GA
0EA
0FA
0JA
0KA
Power
dule
type
6
7
13
8
9
10
11
12
Order Nos.
6SN11231AA0
6SN11241AA0
6SN11351BA1
50 A
80 A
108 A
120 A
160 A
200 A
300 A
400 A
Cod
No.
0CA
0DA
0LA
0GA
0EA
0FA
0JA
0KA
6
7
13
8
9
10
11
12
=3.20
In/Is6/Ima
in A
In/Is6/Imax
in A
f
=4.70
=6.30
In/Is6/Imax
in A
f
=7.80
kHz
24/32/32
30/40/51
45/60/76
45/60/76
60/80/102
85/110/127
120/150/19
3
200/250/25
7
kHz
20/26/26
26/34/44
39/52/65
39/52/65
51/68/86
73/95/109/
101/127/16
3
169/211/21
7
kHz
15/20/20
21/28/36/
32/43/54
32/43/54
41/54/69
60/78/90
81/102/131/
135/169/17
4
kHz
10/14/14
17/23/29
26/34/43
26/34/43
31/42/53
48/63/72
62/78/101
104/130/13
4
In/Is6/Ima
in A
In/Is6/Imax
in A
In/Is6/Ima
in A
In/Is6/Imax
in A
=2.80
kHz
24/32/32
30/40/51
45/60/76
45/60/76
60/80/102
85/110/127
120/150/19
200/250/25
7
=3.90
=5.00
kHz from
F
22/29/29
28/37/48
42/56/71
42/56/71
56/74/95
79/103/119
111/139/17
185/232/23
8
kHz
3.00
19/25/25
25/33/42
37/50/63
37/50/63
49/65/83
71/91/106
98/122/157
163/203/20
9
HS
=5.90
kHz
16/21/21
22/30/38
34/45/57
34/45/57
43/58/73
63/82/95
86/108/139
144/180/18
5
HS/1-11
1.4 Overview, setting data
04.97

M
1.4
Overview, setting data

S
S
M
C T
Fe
Rg
C
R
P
P P P P OP P P P
sP PP
P P P P P Siemens
P PPP
A PPPP TPP
T
P P
A reserved
AGV
All Rights
P1997
PPP
Dd
IA
2
I
p P P
s m
m d m
d E c
S
C PPP
P P P
Df
T
P P P P P P P P P
P P P P P P P P P P
P
P
P P
S P
S P P PP
f P
HS
S
S P
C P
P P P
P P A P PP T P
P P P P P P P P P P
S P P PP
s
P
So
Sss
MP
P
!
G
?
P
PP
MPP
MP
PP
HS/1-12
Fr
D
X
X
Fig. 1-2
As
rf
5 1 2
E E E E E E E E
X
A A A A A A
X
X X
Setting data
07.94
1.5 Connections
1.5
Connections
Spindle encoder, Bero
or encoder output at the NC
X432
Warning!
Motor
encoder,
RON 350
Test sockets
DAU 3 X1
It is not permissible to connect spindle

encoders to MSD control modules
(MLFB 6SN11
BA130 A0)! If this
is not observed, the drive converter and
spindle encoder could be damaged.
X412
X2 DAU 4
IR
X421
56
14
24
8
Inputs
663
X431
65
81
E1
X451
nset1
A91
DAU 1
M
A92
M
nset2
DAU 2
Outputs
IF
RF
289
X441
HSS
2nd Md limit1)
A11
nact = nset1)
A21
A31
Mndact
< <Mndx1)
min1)
E2
E3
E4
TH = 01)
Reset1)
M191)
A41
A51
nact < nx1)
A61
Converter overtemp.1)
E5
E6
E7
Md controlled1)
Oscillation1)
G. box stage, bit 01)
672
673
674
E8
E9
9

Enable voltage
AS1
AS2
RS232C
Interface
X411
Motor temp. rise1)
HS
Ready/fault
Signal. contact
Start inhibit
X4332)
Bero connection
LC display
+
X151
Equipment bus
P 600
DC link
M 600
Motor terminals
Fig. 1-3
U2
X351
V2
W2
PE1
PE2
PE3
Connections
1) Freelyprogrammable terminals and relay functions as supplied

2) only for MLFB (Order No.) 6SN11210BA110AA1

HS/1-13
07.94
HS
HS/1-14

Power modules with MLFB (Order No.) 6SN12 1A 0
07.94
A1 are automatically identified from FW 3.00.
2.1.1 Initializing the system configuration with standard motors

HS/2-15
HS
Determining and setting the

system configuration
Warning
The motor could accelerate to inadmissibly high speeds and terminal 64
and terminal 65 (controller inhibit) could become ineffective if incorrect
are set in P098. Only terminal 663 (axisspecific pulse cancellation) open
effective.
2.1
Motor and converter data sets
2.1.1
Initializing the system configuration with standard motors
Initializing
Table 2-1
Initialization
Number
Chance
effective
P051
Setting range
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P095
After
initial
ization
6...13 dec
P096
After
initial
ization
101...425 dec
P098
After
initial
ization
P097
128...4096 dec
0...1 hex
Description
Power module code number

Presetting: 7 (Section 6.2) from FW 3.00
Presetting: 1)
3
Motor code number
Presetting: 101 (Section 6.2)
Encoder pulse number, motor measuring
system
Presetting: 2048 for 1PH4, 1PH6
Adapt for 1PH2 and toothedwheel encoder.
Initialization
SEtUP message is displayed.
The selected motor/power module combination is
loaded into the drivemachine data memory.
The P000 operating display is displayed after
successful initialization.
1)
It is then no longer possible to change P095.

2.1.1 Initializing the system configuration with standard motors

07.94
Operation from
an uncontrolled
infeed
Table 2-2
Operation from uncontrolled line supply infeed (UE)
Number
Chance
fective
P051
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P173
After
conversio
n
10
P176
After
conversio
n
10
1...150 %
P177
online
10
0...1 hex
P052
online
0...1 hex
100...6000 RPM
Speed at start of field weakening

1
Multiply init. by the fact. sup 0.002
V
V
(corresponds
to 0.8 for su
ply =400V
V
)
pp
Stall torque reduction
1 2
Multiply init. value by the
V
=400
factor
0.002
sup
sup
( ply
ply
V
Start calculation, motor
The calculations for the entered V)
motor are
started.
99 is entered in P096.
Parameter transfer into the FEPROM
HS
HS/2-16

07.94
2.1.2 System configuration with special motors

2.1.2
System configuration with special motors

Note
When special motors are used, the motor data must be discussed with the
sponsible SIEMENS office.
Overview
Initializing special motors

Motor data set
Characteristics for the flux setpoint and magnetizing inductance.
Initializing
special motors
Table 2-3
Initializing special motors
Number
Chance
effective
P051
Setting range
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P095
After
initial
ization
6...13 dec
P096
After
initial
ization
101...425 dec
P098
After
initial
ization
P097
128...4096 dec
0...1 hex
HS
Description

Presetting: 7 (Section6.2) from FW 3.00
Presetting: 1)
3
Motor code number
Motor code number of a standard motor is entered, whose motor data approximately
correspond
to those of the special motor.
system
Presetting: 2048
Initialization
SEtUP message is displayed.
The selected motor/power module combinations
are loaded into the drivemachine data memory.
The operating display P000 is displayed after
successful initialization.
1)

not possible to change P095.
A1 are identified automatically from FW 3.00. It is then

HS/2-17

Motor data set
Table 2-4
For special motors, the motor data must be entered. The motor data list (P159
to P176) is provided in Section 6.6.
Motor data set
Number
HS
04.97
Chance
fective
P051
Setting range
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P158
online
P159
to
P176
After conversion
10
P177
online
10
0...1 hex
Start calculation, motor 1 (P096)

The calculations for the entered special motor are
started.
99 is entered in P096.
P052
online
0...1 hex
HS/2-18
0.000
mH
Refer to Section
6.6
from FW 3.00
Lowleakage motors require a series reactor to
smooth the phase currents. The series reactor
acts on the drive converter just like an increased
stator leakage reactance P169/229.
Previously, P169/P229 had to be manually adapted. P158 and P294 influence the stall limiting
and
the preassignment (presetting) of the current
controller.
Motor data for motor 1
Motor data is entered for the special motor

07.94

Flux setpoint and

magnetizing inductance characteristic
Table 2-5
Flux setpoint and magnetizing inductance characteristic
Number
Chance
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P172
After conversion
10
10...10000 RPM
Upper speed
characteristic
(magnetizing inductance characteristic)
P173
After conversion
10
100...6000 RPM
Speed at the start of field weakening

Speed at the start of field weakening for the flux
setpoint characteristic and the lower speed for h
L
characteristic
1
must be multiplied by the factor sup 0.0
V
V
02
ply
(corresponds to 0.8 for
= 400V)
P175
After conversion
10
100...300 %
V
Gain factor,
L
After conversion
pp
characteristic
(at n=P
. 100 %
172)
(at n=P
173)
1
100 % = constant
over the complete speed
range
P175 =
P176
su
10
1...150 %
h
2
h
Stall torque reduction factor

Stall torque limit:
P176 > 100 %: Stall torque limit increased
P176 < 100 %: Stall torque limit decreased
For operation from an uncontr. infeed, the calc.
0.0 2
value must be mult. by the fact. su
02V
(V
pp
(corresponds to 0.64 for su
= 400V)
V
pp
Magnetizing inductance
L h
Flux setpoint
P175 %
h2
L h1
(Rated value)
P
173
Speed
RPM

100 %
P173
P
172
Speed
RPM
HS/2-19
HS
2.1.3 System configuration with star/delta motors, 2 motors

2.1.3
04.97
System configuration with star/delta motors, 2 motors

Note
When special motors are used, the motor data must be discussed with the
sponsible SIEMENS office.
Overview
Initializing star/delta motors, 2 motors

Motor data sets
flux setpoint and magnetizing reactance characteristic
Motor changeover
Initializing star/
delta motors, 2
motors
Table 2-6
HS
Number
Chance
fective
ef-
P051
Setting range
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P095
After
initial
ization
6...13 dec
P096
After
initial
ization
101...425 dec
Description

Presetting: 7 (Section 6.2) from FW 3.00
Presetting: 1)
3
Motor code number
The following motor code number should be entered, depending on the system configuration:
Star/delta standard motor
Enter the even (star motor)
Motor code number
Star/delta special motor
Enter an even motor code number
of a standard motor (star),
whose motor data approximately correspond
to those of the special motor.
2 standard motors
Enter the motor code number of the first
standard motor
1. stand. motor is entered
2 special motors
Enter a motor code number of standard
motor
whose motor data approximately correspond
to the first special motor.
P098
1)
After
initial
ization
128...4096 dec

It is then not possible to change P095.
HS/2-20

system
Presetting: 2048
A1 are automatically identified from FW 3.00.

07.94

Table 2-6
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
Chance
fective
ef-
P097
P051
Setting range
0...1 hex
Description
Initialization
The SEtUP message is displayed.
The selected motor/power module combination is
loaded into the drivemachine data memory.
The operating display P000 is displayed
after successful initialization.
P238
After conversion
10
101...338 dec
P239
online
10
0...1 hex
Start the calculation for motor 2 (P238)
P052
online
0...1 hex
Motor data sets,

special motors
Motor code number

The motor code number is entered for the 2nd
motor (delta) depending on the system
configuration.
Procedure as for P096.
For special motors, the motor data must be entered. The list of motor data sets
is provided in the Appendix (refer to Section 6.6).
P158 to P176, star motor data, or data set, motor 1
P294, P219 to P236 delta motor data or data set, motor 2
Table 2-7
Motor data sets
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P159
to
P176
P219
to
P236
Chance
fective
efAfter conversion
P051
10
Setting range
Description
Refer to Section
6.6
Motor data for motor 1/motor 2

Motor data is entered depending on the system
configuration:
Star/delta standard motor
no input required
Star/deltaspecial motor,
enter the motor data for star (P159 to P176)
and delta (P219 to P236)
2 standard motors
no input required
2 special motors
Enter the motor data for the 1st special motor
(P159 to P176) and 2nd motor (P219 to
P236) input
P158
P294
online
0.000
mH

from FW 3.00
Lowleakage motors require a series reactor to
smooth the phase currents. The series reactor
acts on the drive converter just like an increased
stator leakage reactance P169/229.
Previously, P169/P229 had to be manually adapted. P158 and P294 influence the stall limiting
and
the preassignment (presetting) of the current
controller
HS/2-21
HS

Table 2-7
04.97
Motor data sets
Number
Setting range
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
Chance
fective
ef-
P177
P237
online
10
0...1 hex
Start calculation, motor 1(P096)/motor 2

(P238)
The calculations for the entered motor data are
started if P180=0.
P052
online
0...1 hex
P051
Flux setpoint and

magnetizing inductance characteristic
Table 2-8
Flux setpoint and magnetizing inductance characteristic
Number
HS
Mot. 1
P172
Mot. 2
P232
P173
P175
Chance
fective
Setting range
P051
Description
After conversion
10
10...10000 RPM
Upper speed
characteristic
(magnetizing inductance characteristic)
P233
After conversion
10
100...6000 RPM
P235
After conversion
10

Speed at the start of field weakening for the flux
setpoint characteristic and the lower speed for h
L
When an uncontr. infeed is used, the calc.
1
value be multiplied by the factor sup 0.00
must
V
V
2
ply
= 400V)
V
pp
Gain factor
characteristic
L
h (at n=P
. 100 %
P175 =
172)
L2h (at n=P
173) over the complete speed
100 % = constant
100...300 %
L
range
P176
P236
After conversion
10
1...150 %
Stall torque reduction factor

Stall torque limit:
P176 > 100 %: Stall torque limit increased
P176 < 100 %: Stall torque limit decreased
For oper. from an uncontr. infeed, the calc. va2

lue must be mult. by the factor sup 0.
V
(V
ply
= 400V)
V
pp
Magnetizing inductance
h
Flux setpoint
P175 %
L h
2
L h
(Rated value)
P173
HS/2-22
Speed
RPM
100 %
P173
P172
Speed
RPM

07.94

Motor
changeover
Table 2-9
Motor changeover
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P180
Chance
effective
online
P051
10
Setting range
0...1 hex
Description
Enable motor changeover (star/delta)

0H: Motor changeover not possible
1H: Enable motor changeover
Note:
For the changeover request, a freely
programmable input terminal (E1 to E9) must be assigned
function number 5 (parameterization, Section
3.2.2)
HS

HS/2-23
2.2 Standard applications

04.97
2.2
2.2.1
Operating display
The actual converter operating status is displayed in parameters P000 and
P100.
Table 2-10
Operating display
Display
Function group
Relay function
freelyprogr. relay function 1 terminal A11
n
nse
freelyprogr.
relay function 2
minal terA21
HS
| | < Mdx1)
M
freelyprogr.
relay function 3
terminal A31
|
inac-
freelyprogr.
relay function 4
terminal A41
tive
| < nmin1)
| < nx1)
freelyprogr.
relay function 5
terminal A51
P245
1)
mot
temp
freelyprogr. relay function 6
terminal A61
P246
var. relay function
1)
(P
186)
ready/fault
terminal
672/674
P053
ready
The segment is
driven if the appropriate relay has
pulledin.
1)
Operating mode
Equipment status
drive not enabled:progress

condition refer
column
equipment status
pulse enable at
the NE module
missing
(T.63/T.48)
speed controlled operation
axisspecific
torque controlled operation
controller enable
led operation
with slip monitoring
missing at the
NE
module
(T.64
and/
or
controller
enable missing at
the spindle
main
module (T65)
RFG enable
missing (T.81)
spindle po-
Display in P000:
(only for star/delta
mode)
star circuit
ted
pulse enable
missing (T663)
torque control-
Operating mode
M19
Operating mode
delta circuit selected
Gearbox stage
Gearbox stage
is selected
Gearbox stage
2 is selected
digital filter is
active
Gearbox stage
3 is selected
i play in P100:
ly for spindle
t o posiing mode)
Gearbox stage
position 1 selected
sitioning
mode
4 is selected
Gearbox stage
5 is selected
setpoint enable
Operating
mode
Caxis
Operating mode
HPC axis
0.5 ms or 0.3ms
Operating mode
HPC axis
0.6 ms or
0.35ms
diag. functions, I/f controlled operation
Oscillation function has been
selected (from
fct. 3.00)
position 2
selected
missing (select
terminal
function No. 16)
que direction diso
l y for enabled
motor:
motor operation
generator operation
Speed controller
clock fast,
clock is active
Gearbox stage
position 3 selected
position 4 selected
is selected
Gearbox stage
7 is selected
Gearbox stage
incremental
positioning selected
8 is selected
Gearbox stage 1...8
Selected via freely
programmable
terminal
function
P081...P089
=9, 10, 11
as supplied
HS/2-24

07.94
2.2.2 Firmware version and module versions

2.2.2
Firmware version and module versions
Table 2-11
Firmware and module version
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
Chance
effective
P051
Setting range
(P099)
0.00...99.00
(P150)
Description
Firmware release
Board code
Function of connector X432:

F00
No function
H
200
with additional input for
spindle encoder
300
Output, pulse encoder signal
H
for external use
HS

HS/2-25
2.2.3 Setting parameters for standard applications

2.2.3
04.97
Setting parameters for standard applications
Overview
Speed settings
torque limits
Motor temperature monitoring
Oscillation
Speed
setting values
Table 2-12
Speed settings
Number
HS
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P022
P261
Chance
effective
online
P051
4
Setting range
1.. r
.n a
RPM
Shutdown speed, pulse cancellation

When the controller is inhibited and the shutdown
speed has been fallen below, the drive is
switched
into a nocurrent condition (shutdown without
overshoot).
0...15000 ms
Pulses are canceled with a delay after the

troller is inhibited FW 3.00
Pulse cancellation can be delayed after controller
inhibit after braking along the down ramp via
P025.
t
e
online
P025
Control inhibit
Description
Braking along the

Pulse cancellation
initiated
down ramp
Shutdo
speed P022
wn
P029
P036
HS/2-26
Time delay, P025

P264
online
online
0.. max
.n Mot
RPM
400...400 dec
Speed limiting
Max. motor speed setting
Encoder phase error correction
If the two encoder tracks are not precisely shifted
through 90 , then this results in torque ripple.
Setting resolution 1 corresponds to 0.18
max. value 400 corresponds to 72

07.94

Table 2-12
Speed settings
Number
Chance
effective
Setting range
P051
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P037
P267
online
1...32000 RPM
Changeover speed, motor encoder evaluation

Above this speed, the fine evaluation of the
speed
actual value generation is disabled.
(from firmware V2.00, no longer relevant)
P038
P268
online
1...500 RPM
Hysteresis, P037/P267
(from firmware V2.00, no longer relevant)
Torque limit values
Table 2-13
Torque limits
Number
Chance
fective
Setting range
P051
Description
HS
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P
039.1
P
269.1
online
5...300 %
1st torque limit

(referred to the rated motor torque)
P041
P271
online
5...100 %
2nd torque limit

Is activated by terminal 111 and when the speed,
set in P050/P290 is exceeded.
P050
P290
online
P
040.1
P
270.1
online
P042
P272
online
P043
P273
online
0.. max
.n 5...100
Mot %RPM
Changeover speed from Md1 to Md2
1.. max
.n
0.. Mot
Changeover speed for P040/P270
.n
Torque [%]
(referred to the rated motor
torque)
Motoring
Generating
max
Mot
RPM
RPM
Regenerative limiting
(referred to P039/P269 or P041/P271)
Hysteresis, P042/P272
P050
P
039.1
P041
P
Speed [RPM]
040.1
P
039.1
P042
Max. selectable torque limit:

I maxco
I 0nv.mot
I rated
maximum converter current

noload motor current
rated motor current
2max
02
Iconv
2ratedmot IMot
02
100 %
(referred to 10 s overload)
Mot
mot

HS/2-27

04.97
Motor temperature
monitoring
Table 2-14
Motor temperature monitoring
Number
HS
Chance
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P063
P291
online
0...170 C
Maximum motor temperature

when exceeded, after approx. 1 s:
Alarm motor overtemperature relay
Time in P065:
Pulse cancellation and fault message F14
P064
online
0...170 C
Fixed temperature
The motor parameter is calculated using this
fixed
temperature if a value
0. Caution!
The motor temperature monitoring is
inactivated.
P065
online
0...600 s
Timer, motor temperature monitoring
Oscillation
Table 2-15
Oscillation
Number
Chance
fective
P051
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P154
online
max ...
n max
RPM
Oscillation setpoint 1
P155
online
Mot
maxMot...
n max
RPM
P156
online
Mot
10...10000
ms
P157
online
10...10000 ms
0...10000 ms from
FW 3.00
Oscillation pause time 1

Oscillation interval time 2
When a 0 is entered, only the value in P154 is
effective, from FW 3.00
Speed [RPM]
P154
Time [ms]
P155
P156
HS/2-28
P157

07.94
2.3 Other applications

2.3
Other applications
2.3.1
Oriented spindle stop (via NC auxiliary function M19)

Function M19 can be selected using a select terminal (E1 to E9) (refer to Section 3.2.2).
Table 2-16
Oriented spindle stop (via NC auxiliary function M19)
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P054
Chance
effective
online
P051
4
Setting range
max ...
n max
RPM
Mot
Description
M19, speed setpoint normalization

Speed, which is reached for the analog input voltage in P024.
+ = clockwise rotation for a positive speed
setpoint
= counterclockwise rotation for a negative
speed setpoint
P055
online
C000...4000 hex
M19, offset correction

e. g. positive correction 2FH
negative correction FF00H
P056
online
0.. max
.n Mot
RPM
M19, changeover speed

Speed changeover point of the setpoint
normalization factor. When the selected speed is fallen below, the values, entered in parameters P054
and> P055 become effective.
P058
online
0.. max
.n Mot
RPM
P062
online
0.. max
.n Mot
RPM
P090
online
10
0...FFFF hex

Shutdown threshold, roundingoff M19

If the selected speed is fallen below, the speed
setpoint smoothing and roundingoff are
disabled.
Restart is realized after canceling M19 operation.
FW 2.00
M19, switching threshold, I component speed
controller
Speed actual value threshold for switchingin the
integral action time from the speed controller. The
integral action time is reenabled if the absolute
value of the speed, entered in P062, is fallen
below.
Control word
P062 is activated by setting bit 4 = 1 (corresponds to 10H) in P090.w
HS/2-29
HS
2.3.2 C axis
2.3.2
07.94
C axis
Caxis operation can be switchedin using a select terminal
(E1 to E9) (Section 3.2.2). The setpoint can only be entered via terminals 24
and 8.
Table 2-17
Caxis
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P
114.1
Change
effective
online
Setting range
P051
4
r
n a
t
P
115.1
HS
2.3.3
online
r
RP
a
M
C000...4000 hex
Description
Normalization, speed setpoint C axis

Speed, which is reached for the analog input voltage in P024.
+ = clockwise rotation for positive speed setpoint
= counterclockwise rotation for negative speed
setpoint
Offset correction for P114
Max. correction value 2000 or E000 corresponds
approx. to 1/8 of P114, if P024 = 10.0
Spindle positioning
Overview
function description
Position reference values
Function parameter 1
Position controller
Openloop control parameters
diagnostics parameter
short startup
Function description
HS/2-30
Without a higherlevel closedloop position control loop of a numerical control,

the main spindle is positioned from the same direction of rotation or with a direction of rotation reversal.

07.94
2.3.3 Spindle positioning

There are various ways of sensing the position:

with motor encoder (sin/cos tracks) without gearbox (all parameters are pre
initialized for this case)
with motor encoder (sin/cos tracks) and external zero marks (BERO) at
the spindle when the gearbox stage is changedover
with incremental spindle encoder (max. 8192 pulses per revolution), only for
versions with spindle encoder input (6SN11 BA120 A0)
Spindle encoder signals are always evaluated as squarewave including
pulse quadrupling.
Warning
It is
possible to connect spindle encoders to main spindle drive control
cards with pulse encoder signal outputs for external use
(MLFB 6SN11
0VA0)! If this is not observed, the equipment and
spindle encoder could be damaged.
The hardware configuration must be entered via P141.

The select terminal function Positioning on (Funct.No. 28) must be connected
via parameters P081 to P089 to one of the freelyprogrammable terminals
E1 to E9 (refer to Section 3.2.2). Positioning is initiated by connecting the enable voltage to the selected terminal.
Positioning is executed in several phases:
Drive braking
Starting from any speed, the drive brakes down to the search speed along
the ramp specified by the rampup/rampdown generator. The speed setpoint is entered from the positioning control and if a speed setpoint is injected
at terminal 56, this is suppressed.
The search speed, is the highest speed from which the drive can brake at
the reference position in one revolution without overshoot. The upper search
speed limit is defined by the deceleration capability of the drive, and thus by
the external moment of inertia.
Position identification
The closedloop position controller is switchedin after the search speed
has been reached and the zero mark identified.

HS/2-31
HS

07.94
Travel to reference position

The final rotation before the target is subdivided into three phases, dependent on the distance from the target.
Speed (RPM)
Search speed
P146
Ref. position identified

Braking
curve
P139
Gradient
1 P136
Phase 1
Gradient 2
P13 or138
3
360
Last revolution
P134
HS
Fig. 2-1
0
P135
Distance
(degrees)
Travel into position
The initiation points and gradients of the individual sections can be set.
Thus, the approach characteristics can be adapted to the widest range of
requirements (P134 to P139).
If the drive is rotating at a lower speed than the search speed, it can accelerate up to the search speed to reduce the positioning time. (P142).
In most cases, it is sufficient to adapt the search speed P146 and adapt
parameters P137 or P138 for optimization purposes.
Reference format
The position reference value may only have values from 0 to max. +32767;
from firmware release V2.00 max. 64000 I/rev. (corresponds to max. encoder pulse number between two zero pulses). The direction of rotation is obtained from the polarity of the search speed. Position reference values are
entered in encoder pulses.
When positioning with the motor encoder, P141 allows a multiplication factor to be entered to improve the reference value resolution. This multiplication factor can be 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 and 32. The multiplication factor can be selected so high that an arithmetic pulse number of up to 32768 is obtained.
Example:
RON350 standard encoder (2048 pulses). When using multiplication factor
16 this results in a calculated pulse number of 32768. This value must be
entered into P131. Setpoint inputs from 0 to 32768, from firmware release
V2.00, max. 64000 pulses/revolution are possible. If higher values are entered, fault message FP01 is output when positioning.
HS/2-32

07.94

Enter the position reference value

Positioning can be realized with four internal position reference values per
gearbox stage (P121 to P122 and P124 to P125).
Select terminal
function 23
Select terminal
function 27
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
Position reference
value
1
2
3
4
Parameter for position reference

value
P121
P122
P124
P125
Another reference value can be selected, using select terminal functions 23

and 27 after the reference position has been reached. In this case, the signal at both terminals must be changed within 20 ms so that it can be considered to be simultaneous.
When selecting a new position via a gearbox stage terminal, the in position
status is only executed, if the signal at the terminal, with function 28 (positioning on) again changes from low to high. Contrary to select terminal functions 23 and 27, in this case, the zero mark is always passedover again.
Incremental position reference value
An incremental position reference value per gearbox stage can be entered
via parameter P123. If the spindle is in position, and a positive edge appears at the freelyprogrammable terminal, assigned the select function 22,
then the incremental position reference value is added to the current position reference value, and the drive travels to this calculated new position.
This procedure can be restarted after the new position has been reached.
For parameter P123, contrary to P121, P122, P124 and P125, negative values are also permissible.
Zero mark offset
A zero mark shift can be entered via parameters P129/P130.
Setting possibility:
Select positioning control (P149 = 1H)
Inhibit controllers and pulses.
Rotate the spindle through a complete revolution and then set it into the required position (check via P140corresponds to the position actual
value).Set P129 to 1H, and wait until the parameter is automatically set
again to 0H. The current position is now transferred as the new zero mark.
The difference to the actual zero mark is displayed in P130. If the spindle is
now positioned to 0H, then the spindle moves to the position, which was
stored in P130.
Relay signals
Select relay functions 9 and 10 (refer to Section 3.3.2) are available for the
position reached relay signals. The associated tolerances are entered via
parameters P144 and P145.

HS/2-33
HS

07.94
Spindle resynchronization (zero mark)

When using a BERO zero mark, the position counter status of the spindle is
resynchronized after each gearbox stage change. This resynchronization
can be inhibited, or can be selected specifically via select terminals.
Setting possibility:
Spindle resynchronization can be suppressed after a gearbox stage
change, by setting bit 1 in parameter P149. In this case, a signal change at
one of the freelyprogrammable terminals, assigned the select terminal
function gearbox stage, bit 0 to bit 2, is then interpreted as parameter
changeover from the position controller. Actual mechanical gearbox stage
changeovers, when positioning to a motor encoder with external zero mark
must be signaled to the position controller via select terminal function 29.
Select terminal function 29 latchesin. The high signal level must be available for at least 20 ms.
Position reference
values
Table 2-18
HS
Position reference values
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P121
online
0...64000 dec
Position reference value 1

Value is entered in encoder pulse number
(max. input is increments per revolution)
P122
online
0...64000 dec
P123
online
32768...32767
dec
Position reference value, incremental

Value is entered in encoder pulse number
(max. input is increments per revolution)
P124
online
0...64000 dec
P125
online
0...64000 dec
HS/2-34

07.94

Function
parameter 1
Table 2-19
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P126
online
0.0...180 degrees
P149
online
0...FFFF hex
P129
online
0...1 hex
P130
online
0...64000 dec
Zero mark shift

Enters the difference to the hardware zero mark
P131
online
128...64000 dec
Max. pulse number between 2 zero marks

The pulse number for one spindle revolution is
entered.
If a spindle encoder (squarewave signals) is
used, then quadrupling must be taken into account.
If positioning is realized with gearbox and BERO,
the difference between two consecutive BERO
zero marks can be readout via P133. P133
indicates the most accurate results in the speed
range 100 to 500 RPM. Data readout at
standstill
indicate incorrect values.

Bandwidth integrator enable, speed controller

In order to improve the approach characteristics
when positioning, it is sometimes advantageous,
if
the speed controller integrator is disabled. The
integrator inhibit (I component = 0) is canceled in
the target range. The target range bandwidth can
be set via this parameter.
Startup parameter, C axis/position.
The integrator inhibit function is enabled by
setting
bit 5 (20H) via P149.
Setting the internal zero mark
When bit 0 (1H) is set, the zero mark offset to the
hardware zero mark is entered in P130 (actual
position counter status).
HS/2-35
HS

07.94
Position controller
Table 2-20
Position controller
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P134
online
P135
online
P136
online
degrees
0...FFFF hex
P137
online
0...FFFF hex
P gain, gradient 2
Gain setting when positioning with spindle encoder.
P138
online
0...FFFF hex
P139
online
0...FFFF hex
P gain, gradient 2 (HMS)

Gain setting when positioning with motor
encoder.
Multiplier for braking parabola
Factor to set the gradient of the braking
stic, refer to Fig. 2-1.
0.0...180.0
degrees
0.0...180.0
Intervention point P136

Intervention point P137/P138
P gain, gradient 1
HS
HS/2-36

07.94

Control parameters
Table 2-21
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P141
Change
effective
online via
P143
P051
4
Setting range
0...FFFF hex
Description
Switching parameters, positioning

Bi
t
Value
0000H
0001H
1
0
1
1
1
Evaluation of the motor encoder

signals (HMS evaluation)
Evaluation of the spindle
encoder
signals
Note: X432 must be configured
as
spindle encoder input. This is
only
possible for board versions
6SN11210BA12 (always) and
6SN11210BA1 (using
P033=0). Otherwise, fault message F10 is output. Spindle encoder signals are always evaluated as squarewave, including the
pulse quadrupling.
0000H
0002H
Zero pulse from the encoder

External zero pulse (e.g. Bero )
0000H
Spindle encoder phase

is not inverted
Spindle encoder phase
sequence
is inverted (actual value reversal)
0004H
0100H
Setpoint multiplication factor 2

positioning to a motor encoder
with internal zero mark.
0200H

0400H

0800H

for positioning to a motor
encoder
1000H

for positioning to a motor
2
Note:
After changing the setpoint multiplication factor
(bits 8 to 12), before transferring the new settings
the pulse number must be adapted in P131
using
P143.
The changed settings must then be activated
using P143.
The setting of parameter P141 is transferred
activated, by changing the contents of parameter
P143 from 0 to 1!

HS/2-37
HS

Table 2-21
07.94
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P143
online
0...1 hex
Transfer parameter P141

Values changed in P141 are transferred if P
143
= 1. The parameter is automatically reset to 0.
P142
online
0...21 hex
Flag for speed increase

Bi
t
Value
0000H
0
0001H
The spindle is not accelerated to

the search speed, and the
spindle
moves into position from the instantaneous speed.
0000H
Zero mark monitoring (fault

FP02) is enabled. When
positioning with a BERO, the zero mark
is evaluated at each positioning
sequence, otherwise, only after
gearbox stage changeovers. The
zero mark monitoring is also inhibited after gearbox stage changeover, with P142, bit 0 = 1.
0020H
Zero mark monitoring (fault

FP02) is inhibited.
HS
5
HS/2-38
The drive first accelerates to

search speed, if positioning is
started from a speed which is lower than the search speed, and
then the position is approached
(faster positioning).

07.94

Function
parameter 2
Table 2-22
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P144
online
0.00...18.00 degrees
P145
online
0.00...18.00 degrees
P146
online
0...4
n
P148
online
0.0...180.0
degrees
rated

Description
Response bandwidth, relay 1

Setting for the relay signal in position 1 (refer to
Section 3.3.2)
Response bandwidth, relay 2
Search speed
Speed setting value, where the position approach
sequence is started.
Motion window
If the spindle is moved out of its position for pulse
inhibit during positioning operation, then when
the
pulses are reenabled, the reference position is
reapproached through the shortest path. If bit 3
is
set in P149, this is only realized, if the motion
window (P148) was not exited, and the terminal
with function No. 28 (high) was not switched.
HS/2-39
HS

Table 2-22
07.94
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P149
Change
effective
online
P051
4
Setting range
0...FFFF hex
Description

Bi
t
Value
0000H
0
0001H
0000H
1
0002H
HS
0000H
0004H
0000H
0008H
0000H
When a positioning command is received (terminal with function No.

28, high), then the spindle is re
synchronized, if the signal changes
at a freely programmable terminal,
assigned with the select terminal
function gearbox stage bit 0 to bit
2.
The spindle is only resynchronized, if there was a positive edge at
a select terminal, with function 29,
before the positioning command.
Position reference values are not
mirrored.
The absolute position reference values are mirrored.
For positioning sequences the
tion is approached from the selected direction.
The position always approached
with the same direction of rotation;
the direction of rotation is specified
by the polarity of the search speed.
(Exception, refer to P148)
The speed controller integral action
time is active.
The speed controller integral action
time is disabled. In the target range
(can be set via P126), the integral
action time becomes active again.
0020H
0040H
Overshoot reduced after braking to

the search speed FW 2.00
0000H
Speed setpoint roundingoff

(P019) is also effective during positioning.
Speed setpoint roundingoff
(P019) is deactivated when the
sitioning command is received. The
speed setpoint smoothing (P018)
is never active during positioning,
independent of P149.
0080H
HS/2-40
Positioning inhibited, the control is

not processed for positioning, i. e.,
positioning is not possible, and any
position actual value displays are
not accurate!
The control is processed for
ning, and positioning is possible.

07.94

Diagnostic
parameters
Table 2-23
diagnostics parameter
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
(P100)
Operating display P100

(refer to Section 2.2.1)
(P128)
Actual position reference value

The actual reference position is displayed in
parameter P128 in encoder pulses. The value is only
updated, if the positioning software is enabled
with
P149 = 1.
(P132)
Absolute position actual value without zero

mark offset
(P133)
Difference between 2 ext. zero marks

Displays the difference between two consecutive
BERO zero marks (P141 = 2).
(P140)
Absolute position actual value with zero mark

shift
(P147)
Position counter status with reference to the

BERO
The position counter status when positioning with
a BERO is displayed.
(P320)
Diagnostics, motor encoder zero mark
(P321)
Diagnostics, spindle encoder zero mark

HS/2-41
HS

Short
startup
07.94
Startup example
Hardware design: Encoder signals and zero pulse from the motor encoder
P149 must be set to 1H to enable the position program.

Enter the hardware configuration via parameter P141
0 corresponds to the encoder signals from the motor encoder
Set P141 to 0H (this is the presetting; if P141 is changed, the change must
be transferred with P143 = 1 .
Enter a pulse number between two zero marks in P131
Can the
position be set
by manually rotating the
spindle?
No
Yes
1. Issue controller and pulse inhibit.
HS
2. Rotate the spindle through a complete revolution, and

then rotate it to the reference position (the position actual
value is displayed via P140).
1. Enable drive
(terminals 663, 65, 81)
2. With the speed setpoint entered, rotate
the spindle through at least one revolution and then stop in position.
3. Disconnect terminals 65 and 663.
Write 1H into P129: The parameter value automatically resets itself, so that this position is defined
as software zero mark.
The offset to the hardware zero mark is displayed in parameter P130.
Test position value:

1. Enable the drive (terminals 663, 65, 81)
2. Enter the speed setpoint
3. Select the select terminal (E1 to E9) with function No. 28 for positioning.motor brakes to the search speed, and stops in the specified reference position.
The
(The position reference value and actual value can be checked using P128 and
P140.)
Required position
reached?
No
Change position value via

P121
Yes
Optimize position using parameters P134 to P139.
The search speed can be changed via P146. Additional functions (refer to the parameter description,
tables 2-21 and 2-22) via parameters P142 and P149. The response bandwidth for both relay
signals
can be changed via P144 and P145.
Store the changed parameters in FEPROM (P052).
End
HS/2-42

07.94
2.3.4
2.3.4 Openloop torque controlled operation (master/slave)

Openloop torque controlled operation (master/slave)
Overview
parameter settings
Parameter description
slip monitoring
Function description
Openloop torque controlled operation is necessary if the speed controller in

the NC is used or for the slave drive for master/slave applications. The open
loop torque controlled mode can be selected via a select terminal, E1 to E9 (refer to Section 3.2.2). For master/slave operation
(2 spindle drives can be operated rigidly coupled), the torque setpoint must be
fed from the master via a D/A converter output (adaptation P066 or P068
refer to Section 3.3.5) to the slave drive (adaptation P048, P049).
Warning
If the mechanically rigid coupling is released, the slave drive must be changed
over to closedloop speed control, otherwise the drive will accelerate to max.
speed, although the d setpoint input is 0.
M
Master drive
Speed setpoint
Term. 56/14
D/A converter output

assignment via P066/068
M
3
Term. A9n
Speed
setpoint
Torque setpoint
Term. 56/14
Slave drive
M dset adaptation
Term. 24/8 via P048/049
Speed setpoint
for the slave for
openloop torque
control operation
with slip
Slip monitoring
Term. E n
Select terminal,
torque control
(fct. No. 4)
Term. E
or
Rigid or quasi
rigid coupling,
which can also be
operationally
released.
M
3
Select terminal,
slip monitoring
(fct. No. 32)
FW 2.00
Slave drive:
For rigid coupling, openloop torque control With
coupling released, closedloop speed control
Fig. 2-2
Master/slave operation

HS/2-43
HS

04.97
Note
For controller inhibit in the openloop torque controlled mode, the spindle
be braked via
setpoint input; the pulses are only internally canceled
after the shutdown speed (P022) has been reached.
Parameter
settings
Example:
In order that the torque setpoint is available at terminals A92 and M of the master drive torque setpoint, address 0C6CH must be written into parameter
P068. Parameter P069 can be used, by shifting, to define which voltage is
available at a specific torque.
The normalization of the rated motor torque can be taken from the contents of
address 0F52H. Address 0F52H must be entered into P250 in order to determine this value, and the normalization value for the rated torque can be read
out of P251.
HS
Value to be
(hex)
Output voltage
D/A converter 2 [V] at
M drated
Contents,
P251 (hex)
Shift factor
P069
0C00
0
1
2
3
0C00
1800
3000
6000
0.94
1.88
3.75
7.50
1000
0
1
2
1000
2000
4000
1.25
2.50
5.00
At the max. output voltage, the torque limit in P039 must be taken into account
(160 % corresponds to M drated . 1.6), and it must be ensured, that saturation
does not occur (> 10 V).
If the slave drive is switched to the torque mode, parameters P048 and P049
are still effective. Torque adaptation can be executed using P048 (corresponding to P014 in closedloop speed controlled operation) and torque drift can
be compensated with P049 (corresponding to P015 in closedloop speed
controlled operation). Parameter P049 is not suitable for compensating for
frictional forces. P048 and P049, are ineffective in the closedspeed controlled mode.
From firmware release 3.00
The torque data is updated every 1 ms via address 304C (previously 20 ms)
and is normalized with 5 V the rated motor torque.
Example:
Output via terminals A92 and M
P68=304CH P69=0H
Normalization can be influenced by P26.
For P26=100%, 5 V corresponds to the rated torque.
For P26=160%, 8 V corresponds to the rated torque.
HS/2-44

07.94

Parameter
description
Table 2-24
Parameter description
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P048
online
250...250 %
Normalization, dset
The setting is referred to the rated motor torque.
P049
online
C000...4000 hex
Torque setpoint offset
Openloop torque
control with slip
monitoring
FW 2.00
The mechanical coupling between drives through a friction connection can

cause the openloop torque controlled slave drive to slip.
Using this function, the slave drive monitors the speed actual value deviation
from the speed setpoint, and reduces the drive torque when a specific speed
tolerance has been exceeded.
Assignment, speed setpoint channels:
HS
master drive, terminals 56/14

slave drive, terminals 24/8
The slip monitoring function can be activated using the select terminal function
No. 32 (refer to Fig. 2-2).

HS/2-45

Table 2-25
12.94
slip monitoring
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P340
online
0.1...100.0 %
Speed deviation, slip monitoring

Permissible speed deviation referred to the actual
speed setpoint.
P346
online
0.0...100.0 %
Hysteresis to P340
P341
online
0.0...100.0 %
Torque reduction, slip monitoring

If the speed deviation, parameterized in P340, is
fallen below, the torque setpoint is reduced.
P343
online
0...999 ms
Delay time, slip monitoring

Delay time, until the torque reduction has been
canceled.
P344
online
0.01...100.00
%/ms
Torque reducing speed, slip monitoring

Speed, at which the torque setpoint is reduced.
P345
online
0.01...100.00
%/ms
Torque increasing speed, slip monitoring

Speed, at which the torque setpoint is increased.
(P347)
online
Speed deviation, actual slip monitoring

If the displayed value is greater than the
threshold
set in P340, slip occurs and the monitoring
becomes active.
HS
n
P346
ctn set
P340
n
set
Reduction
tor for
M
100
%
fac-
dset
P344
P345
P
341
t
P343
(P347) =
a
cn
set
100 %
s
e
HS/2-46

07.94
2.3.5 Monitor function

2.3.5
Monitor function
The address contents (data in the RAM area) of the main spindle drive module
can be read via parameters P249 to P251.
Note
A list of important measurement quantities (RAM variables) and their
are
provided in the Appendix (Section 6.5).
addresses
Table 2-26
Monitor function
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P249
online
10
0...FFFF hex
Segment, memory location monitor

Segment address selection
P250
online
10
0...FFFF hex
Address, memory location monitor

Offset address selection
P251
online
2.3.6
Value display, memory location monitor

Displays the contents of address P249/P250
HPC axis (FW 2.00)

In the HPCaxis mode, only the freelyprogrammable terminals E1 to E6 can
be assigned with functions.
Overview
converter interfaces
controller optimization
diagnostics
Function
description
The HighPrecision C axis (HPC) mode permits improved load and control characteristics by reducing the speed controller clock to 0.5 or 0.6 ms. 0.3 or 0.35
ms is possible from FW 3.0.
Expanded functional scope in the HPCaxis mode:
flux adaptation (noise reduction)
it is possible to parameterize 2 digital filters in the torque setpoint channel for 0.6 ms speed controller clock (from FW 3.0=0.35 ms possible)

HS/2-47
HS
2.3.6 HPC axis

07.94
The following functions are not available in the HPCaxis mode:

torque setpoint smoothing
reciprocation
NC auxiliary function M19
2nd torque limit value
rampfunction generator
gearbox stage changeover
spindle positioning
reduced terminal and relay functions
smoothing D/A converter P/P max display
System
configuration
Prerequisites for HPCaxis operation:

speed range:
n rated motor
selection only possible for motor 1 (star operation)

HPC axis has priority over a standard C axis
HS
changeover into the standard mode is realized online; all functions are
then available again.
Selecting HPC axis
Table 2-27
Selecting HPC axis
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P149
Change
effective
online
P051
4
Setting range
0...FFFF hex
Description

Bi
t
8
Value
0000H
0100H
HPC axis cannot be selected

HPC axis can be selected
The HPCaxis mode is selected via the select

terminal function No. 30
Torque limit values

Table 2-28
Torque limit values
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P109
online
5...180 %
Torque limit value, HPC

Sets the max. permissible torque, referred to the
rated motor torque.
P110
online
5...100 %
Regenerative limit, HPC

Limits the torque in regenerative operation, referred to P109.
HS/2-48

07.94
2.3.6 HPC axis

Drive converter
interfaces
Analog setpoint
The analog speed setpoint or Md setpoint can only be entered via setpoint
channel 2
(terminal 24/8).
The speed setpoint is limited to
Table 2-29
n rated motor.
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P093
online
C000...4000 hex
Offset correction, speed setpoint HPC

Drift adjustment for the analog speed setpoint input
P094
online
r
1...
+ r
1 RPM
n a
Normalization, speed setpoint HPC

The speed, which should be reached, at the analog input voltage, which was set in P024, can be
set using P094.
Permanentlywired terminal functions

Terminals 663, 65 and 81 are also available in the HPCaxis mode.
Freelyprogrammable terminal functions
Only the input terminals E1 to E6 (P081 to P086) are evaluated.
The following terminal functions are available (refer to Section 3.2.2)
Table 2-30
Terminal functions
Terminal functions
Function No.
Reset fault memory (R)

(fault acknowledgment)
Opentorque loop controlled operation
Integrator inhibit, speed controller
Speed setp. smoothing
25
Suppress F11 (travel to endstop)
26
HPC axis
30
Inverter clock frequency

33.34
HS/2-49
HS
2.3.6 HPC axis

07.94
Permanentlywired relay functions

Terminals 672/673/674 are also available in the HPCaxis mode.
Freelyprogrammable relay functions
The statuses of the nonavailable relay functions are frozen when the HPC
axis mode is selected.
The following relay functions are available (refer to Section 3.3.2):
Table 2-31
Relay functions
Terminal functions
Function No.
n a
min
< overtemperature, alarm
Motor
HS
Converter overtemperature, alarm
Variable relay function 1
Controller optimization
Table 2-32
Speed setp. smoothing
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P106
online
3...10000 ms
Smoothing time, speed setpoint HPC

(switchedin/out using P053 or via select terminal function No. 25)
P053
online
0...FFFF hex
Control word
Bi
t4
Value
0000H
0010H

Speed setpoint smoothing active
Speed controller gain, integral action time

Table 2-33
Speed controller gain, integral action time
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P111
online
3.0...240.0 dec
P gain, speed controller HPC

The Pgain setting is, for the same gain factor, a
factor of 4 smaller than in the standard mode.
P112
online
2...6000 ms
Speed controller integral action time, HPC
HS/2-50

07.94
2.3.6 HPC axis

Flux adaptation
Table 2-34
Flux adaptation
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P119
Change
effective
online
P051
4
Setting range
5...100 %
Description
Flux adaptation, HPC

Reduction of the motor magnetic flux
(noise reduction)
Digital filter, torque setpoint channel

2 digital filters can be parameterized in the HPCaxis mode, which are connected in series.
However, a filter can only be activated, if the speed controller sampling time
is set to 0.6 ms via P117.
The actual sampling time can be seen in the operating display (Section
2.2.1).
(digital filter, also refer to Section 4.1).
Table 2-35
HS
digital filter, torque setpoint channel
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P118
Change
effective
online
P051
4
Setting range
0...FFFF hex
Description
Typ. torque setpoint filter

Bi
t
0
P091
online
P092
online
P107
online
P108
online
45...750 Hz
0.50...10.00 dec
45...750 Hz
0.50...10.00 dec

Value
0000H
0001H
0000H
0100H
Bandstop characteristics, standard mode

Low pass characteristics, standard mode
Bandstop, filter 1 HPCaxis
mode
Low pass filter 1 HPCaxis mode
FW 2.00
0000H
Bandstop filter 2 HPCaxis mode
0200H
Low pass filter 2 HPCaxis mode

FW 2.00
Frequency filter 1 HPC

Low pass filter: 3 dB transition frequency
Bandstop: Center frequency
Quality, filter 1 HPC
Filter quality of the bandstop filter,
quality = 1, corresponds to 1.00
Frequency, filter 2 HPC
Quality, filter 2 HPC
HS/2-51
2.3.6 HPC axis

Table 2-35
04.97
digital filter, torque setpoint channel
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P117
Change
effective
P051
4
Setting range
0...FFFF hex
Description
Torque setpoint filter selection

Bi
t
0
online
online
online
RESET
HS
Diagnostics
Value
0000H
0001H
Filter, standard mode inactive

Filter, standard mode active
0000H
Filter 1 HPCaxis mode inactive
0100H
Filter 1 HPCaxis mode active

FW 2.00
0000H
Filter 2 HPCaxis mode inactive
0200H
Filter 2 HPCaxis mode active

FW 2.00
0000H
Speed controller sampling time

0.5 ms,
no filter is possible in the HPC
axis mode. 0.3 ms possible from
FW 3.00
Speed controller sampling time
0.6 ms,
filters can be activated in the
HPCaxis mode, FW 2.00.
0.35 ms possible from FW 3.00.
0400H
The following diagnostic functions are not available in the HPC axis mode:
diagnostics parameter P020 (dn/dt monitoring), P320, P321
transient recoder function
I/f controlled operation (openloop)
HS/2-52

07.94
3.1 Analog speed setpoint interface


interfaces
3.1
Analog speed setpoint interface
Overview
speed setpoint channel selection

normalization, analog speed setpoint
unipolar speed setpoint input (fixed direction of rotation)
HS
Steadystate minimum speed
Speed setpoint
channel selection
Table 3-1
Speed setpoint channel selection
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P113
Change
effective
online
P051
4
Setting range
0...3 dec
Description
Channel selection, speed setpoint

P
113
0
1
2
1
3
Term.
56/14
off
on
off
on
Term.
24/8
off
off
on
on
1) Setpoint inputs are added

HS/3-53

07.94
Normalization,
analog speed setpoint
Table 3-2
Normalization, analog speed setpoint
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P
014.1
P
258.1
Change
effective
online
P051
4
Setting range
max ...
n max
RPM
Mot
HS
P024
online
P
015.1
online
5.0...15.0 V
C000...4000 hex
Description
Speed for max. motor operating speed

Speed, which is achieved for the analog input
voltage in P024.
+ = clockwise direction of rotation for a positive
speed setpoint
= counterclockwise direction of rotation for a
negative speed setpoint
Normalization, setpoint
Analog speed setpoint voltage for P014/P258
Note: Maximum setpoint voltage at terminal
56/14
and terminal 24/8,
11 V.
Offset correction, speed setpoint
e.g.
positive correction value 2FH
negative correction value FF00H
Unipolar
speed setpoint input
Table 3-3
Unipolar speed setpoint input
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P053
Change
effective
online
P051
4
Setting range
0...FFFF hex
Description
Control word
Bi
t
1
HS/3-54
Value
0000H
2000H
Speed setpoint, bipolar

by generating the absolute
value
of the speed setpoint, only one
direction of rotation is
permitted.
The direction of rotation is defined using P014/P258.
FW 2.00

07.94

Steadystate
minimum speed
Table 3-4
Number
P030
Change
effective
online
P051
4
Setting range
0.. max
.n Mot
RPM
Description
No steadystate operation in the speed range
around zero.
The range is runthrough with the current ramp
up or rampdown times, if the speed setpoint exceeds the steadystate minumum speed in the
opposite direction of rotation.
Zero speed can only be achieved by inhibiting the
permanentlywired enable signals.
FW 2.00
Effective setpoint [RPM]
200
200
Input setpoint [RPM]
HS

HS/3-55
3.2.1 Permanentlywired terminal functions

3.2
Input terminals
3.2.1
07.94
Warning
Terminal function parameters P081 to P089 may only be programmed
the pulses are canceled (terminal 63 or terminal 663 open).
Table 3-5
Terminal function
HS
Description
Axis specific
enable
The inverter enable (motor control) is realized if the enable voltage is

at terminal 663 (axisspecific pulse enable) and terminal 65 (controller
enable).
If the axisspecific pulse enable is removed with the motor is still rotating, the
inverter is inhibited after 20 ms and the motor coasts down in a nocurrent
condition.
Controller enable
If terminal 65 is opened while the motor is still rotating, the drive brakes along
rampfunction generator ramp.
If the absolute speed falls below
m threshold (P022), the inverter is
the and
n the motor is brought to a standstill
i inhibited
with no overshoot.
Ramp
function generator
fast stop
If the enable voltage is connected to terminal 81, the speed setpoint is

the input is left open, the speed setpoint is digitally set to zero. The drive
brakes
along the torque limit without rampfunction generator. If bit 1 is set in P053,
the
pulses are inhibited when the speed becomes zero.
HS/3-56
Terminal
number
663
65
81

03.96
3.2.2 Freelyprogrammable terminal functions

3.2.2
Overview
Terminal function assignment

terminal functions
Terminal function
assignment
Table 3-6
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P081
to
P089
Change
effective
online
P051
4
Setting range
1...34 dec
Description
Terminal function assignment E1 to E9

Terminals E1 to E9 are assigned by entering the
function number. The factory setting is provided
in
the following table.
HS
Terminal functions
Table 3-7
Terminal functions

HS/3-57

Terminal function
HS
07.94
Description
Fct.
No.
Input
terminal
when
supplied
2nd torque
limit
The 2nd limit torque becomes active if this terminal is energized and the
speed in P050 is exceeded.
E1 (P
081)
Reciprocation
The speed setpoints, described in Section 2.2 Standard applications, are

to changeover gearbox stages.
E6 (P
086)
Reset
fault memory (R)
Remote acknowledgment of fault messages.

Terminal 65 (controller enable) must be open to acknowledge faults.
E3 (P
083)
Openloop torque
controlled mode
Changeover from speed controlled to torque controlled operation
E5 (P
085)
Star/delta operation
Changeover between star (open) and delta operation (enable voltage)
M19 operation
NC auxiliary function for oriented spindle stop. When this terminal is energized,
setpoint normalization, entered in P054 is selected, if the speed falls below the
value entered in P054.
E4 (P
084)
Rampup time = 0
If the enable voltage is connected to this terminal, the internal rampfunction

rator is bypassed
E2 (P
082)
Integrator inhibit
speed controller
The integral component of the speed controller can be inhibited via this terminal
Gearbox stage
E7 (P
087)
E8 (P
Using these terminals, a total of eight parameter sets

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 be entered for setpoint normalization,
g
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 controller setting, torque limiting and torque monitoring.
10
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
11
If this terminal is open, the setpoint is a digital zero. When the enable voltage is
connected to this terminal, the setpoint is enabled (analog setpoint or oscillation
setpoint). If the terminal function is not selected, the setpoint is enabled.
16
088)
E9 (P
089)
Incremental positioning
If the spindle is in position, and if the enable voltage is connected to the terminal,
then the incremental position reference value in P0123 is added to the actual
position reference value. The drive then moves to the thus calculated new position.
22
Position ref. values

1...2
Together with the terminal, function number 27, this terminal is used to select the
position reference value defined via parameters P121, P122, P124, and P
(Section 2.3.3.)
23
Caxis
The more finely graduated setpoint normalization, set in P114 is used in the C
mode. Only setpoint 2 (terminal 24 and terminal 8) are evaluated.
24
Speed setpoint
thing
By connecting the enable voltage to this terminal, a speed setpoint smoothing

tion is activated. The smoothing time is entered in P018 (also with P053).
25
Suppressing F11
By connecting the enable voltage to this terminal, fault message F11 (speed controller at its limit) can be suppressed.
26
Position
reference values 3..4
Together with the terminal, function No. 23, this terminal is used to select the position reference value, defined using parameters P121, P122, P124, and P125
(Section 2.3.3.)
27
Positioning on
By connecting the enable voltage to this terminal, positioning is initiated.
28
Spindle
re synchronization
A positive edge at this terminal results in resynchronization when the next

ning command is received via terminal, function No. 28.The function latches.
29
HPC axis
By connecting the enable voltage to this terminal, the HPC axis mode is selected
when bit 8 was set in P149. FW 2.00
30
Slip monitoring
By connecting the enable voltage to this terminal, the openloop torque control is
activated with slip monitoring. FW 2.00
32
Parameter
P053 P331 P332
0
1 0 1
0
0
1 1
Bit
0
Bit
1
Bit
Setpoint enable 2
for speed setpoint)
HS/3-58
It is possible to toggle between four clock frequencies

using these terminals. (from FW 3.00)
33
34

07.94
3.3
3.3 Output terminals

Output terminals
3.3.1
Warning
It is only permissible to program the relays (P241 to 247) if the pulses are
celed (terminal 63 or 663 open).

Table 3-8
Terminal
tion
Description
Terminal
number
The relay function can be selected using P053:

Ready/
no axis
specific
fault
Bit
Value
0000H
0
0001H
Checkback
gnal, start inhibit
3.3.2
Overview
The relay pullsin, if there is no

and the pulses and controller are
enabled.
Ready relay pullsin, if there is no
fault.
The relay (NC contact) pullsin, if the enable voltage

connected to terminal 663, axisspecific pulse
is
enable.
672
673
674
AS1
AS2
Message assignment
relay functions
Messages which can be parameterized
Control word messages
Note
The relay signals are updated with 20 ms for a 1 ms speed controller clock. For
a 0.5 ms speed controller clock, every 10 ms (refer to P90 bit 3).

HS/3-59
HS
3.3.2 Freelyprogrammable relay functions

07.94
Message
assignment
Table 3-9
Message assignment
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P241
P246
Change
effective
online
P051
4
Setting range
1...20 dec
Description
Programmable messages 1 to 6
Relay outputs A11 to A61 are assigned by entering the function number. The factory setting is
provided in the following table.
HS
HS/3-60

07.94

Relay functions
Table 3-10
relay functions
Relay function
Fct.
No.
Relay
output
The relay pullsin, if the calculated speed actual value, after a setpoint step,
enters the tolerance bandwidth around the new setpoint and has stayed
this tolerance bandwidth at least 200 ms. The message is latched in the
ted position, until the speed setpoint changes. The tolerance bandwidth can
parameterized in P027.
Even if the calculated speed actual value exits the tolerance bandwidth again
after 200 ms, the signal remains active, unless, in the meantime, the setpoint
has changed.
If the tolerance bandwidth is reexited before 200 ms, the acceleration completed message remains inactive. The relay does not dropout due to speed
fluctuations caused by load changes. The time of 200ms can be
parameterized
via P256 FW 3.00 onwards.
A11 (P241)
The relay pullsin at d < d . . This can be set using P047. If the
a
= s dropsout when the speed setpoint is changed, then
d < d
n e only
the dropout
M
rel
can
800ms after the relay a = s has pulledin again.x The
time of 800ms can be parameterized via P257 from FW 3.00.
A21 (P242)
< min
n c a n< x
n
alarm
The relay pullsin for

n
The relay pullsin at
A31 (P243)
< ; this can be set via P023.

n
The relay dropsout whennthe motor has an overtemperature condition; this
be set via P063. If the fault condition remains, the drive converter shuts
with fault message F14 after the time, set in P065.
A41 (P244)
A51 (P245)
Drive converter temperature

alarm
The relay dropsout, if the thermoswitch of the main heatsink responds. If the
overtemperature condition remains, the conv. shuts down after approx. 20 s
with the F15 fault mess.
Refer to the description, variable relay function, Section 3.3.3
A61 (P246)
Rampup completed
M d <
dx
M
n a
Description
< m ; this can be set via P021.
ac
Refer to the description, variable relay function, Section 3.3.3
In position 1
The relay pullsin if the positioning program was executed, and the spindle is
located within the tolerance bandwidth, set in P144.
In position 2
The relay pullsin if the positioning program was executed, and the spindle is
located within the tolerance bandwidth, set in P145.
10
Relay, star operation
The external auxiliary contactor to change over the winding into the star
guration, can be controlled via this relay.
11
Relay, delta operation
The external auxiliary contactor to change over the winding into the delta
guration, can be controlled via this relay.
12
The message a = s (actual) is active, after the calculated speed

value has entered the speed tolerance bandwidth around the setpoint, and
remained in this tolerance bandwidth for at least 200 ms. If the tolerance
width is exited, then the message a = s (actual) immediately becomes
inactive. The time of 200ms can be parameterized via P256 from FW 3.00.
20
= s
n
(actual)

HS/3-61
HS

07.94
Messages which
can be parameterized
Table 3-11
Messages which can be parameterized
Number
P051
Setting range
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P
021.1
P
260.1
online
0.. r
.n a
P
023.1
P
262.1
online
0.. max
.n Mot
online
0.. r
027.1
P
047.1
263.1
online
P256
online
0.00...0.50
P257
online
0.00...1.00
HS
Change
effective
.n
RPM
RPM
/16
RPM
a
0...100
%
Description
n m for
a
m message
Response value of the a
m relay
n
<
c
n for a
message i
Response value of the a <
relay
n
c
Tolerance bandwidth for the a
s
sage
=
mesM d for the
d message
The setting refers to the actual torque limiting
Delay time
n
Delay
time
M
= s message FW 3.00
n
d message FW 3.00
<
Control word
messages
Table 3-12
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P247
HS/3-62
Change
effective
online
P051
4
Setting range
0...FFFF hex
Description

Bi
t0
Value
0001H
0002H
0004H
0008H
0010H
0020H
Relay function, term. A11 is inverted


07.94
3.3.3 Variable relay functions

3.3.3
Variable relay function
Table 3-13
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P185
online
0...FFFF hex
Address for monitoring 1

Address of the RAM variables
P186
online
0...FFFF hex
Threshold for monitoring 1

Comparison value for RAM variables, contents
(addresses, Section 6.5)
P187
online
0.00...10.00 s
Pullin delay, monitoring 1
P188
online
0.00...10.00 s
Dropout delay, monitoring 1
P189
online
0...FFFF hex
Hysteresis, monitoring 1
(hysteresis for threshold, P186)
P190
online
0...FFFF hex
P191
online
0...FFFF hex
P192
online
0.00...10.00 s
P193
online
0.00...10.00 s
P194
online
0...FFFF hex
(hysteresis for threshold, P191)
P247
online
0...FFFF hex
Control word message

Bi
t
8
Value
0000H
0100H
0000H
0200H
0000H
2
1
3
HS
1000H
0000H
2000H
Variable relay function 1 with

sign interrogation
absolute value interrogation
sign interrogation
P186 as threshold
Variable relay function 1 as bit
test. The threshold (P186) is
ANDed with the RAM variables
to be monitored (P185)
FW2.00
P191 as threshold
test, FW2.00
Note
A list of the most important measured quantities (RAM variables) and their
dresses is provided in the Appendix (Section 6.5).

HS/3-63
3.3.4 Motor encoder signals for NC

3.3.4
07.94
Motor encoder signals for NC
Table 3-14
Motor encoder signals for the NC
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P033
Change
effective
online
P051
4
Setting range
0...7 dec
Description
Encoder resolution for the NC

When using squarewave converted motor encoder signals, the following multiplication factors
can
be set.
P
Factor
Limiting speed
RPM for
RON350/
ERN 1387
033
1
2048
16000
0.5
1024
16000
4096
5000
8192
2500
Pulses are not output

from FW 3.00
HS
Square
wave
ses
Toothedwheel
encoder 256
I/rev.
1
256
24000
0.5
128
24000
512
24000
1024
12000
Toothedwheel
encoder 512
I/rev.
HS/3-64
07.94
512
12000
3
5
0.5
256
12000
1024
12000
2048
6000

3.3.5 Analog outputs

3.3.5
Analog outputs
Overview
Function
technical data
Parameterization DAU 1, DAU 2
Fine normalization
Function
Technical data
analog output of RAM variables for measurement and diagnostics
2 output channels at terminal A91 (DAU 1) and terminal A92 (DAU 2)

10 V range
rough normalization, offset compensation
fine normalization for
HS
absolute speed actual value

Utilization
M rated
/
polarity of the output voltage can be set through fine normalization
( 200 %)


HS/3-65
07.94
Parameterization
DAU 1, DAU 2
Table 3-15
Parameterization DAU 1, DAU 2

Number
Setting range
Description
Address, DAU 1
Address of the RAM variables, which are to the
output at DAU 1.
Presetting:
m (RAM address: 3044H)
n/n
a 1
Shift factor, DAU
Selected data values are shifted to the left
1 corresponds to multiplying by
2 corresponds to multiplying by n
n
2
Offset, DAU 1
Compensation of a possible offset for DAU 1
Mot.
1
P066
online
0...FFFF hex
P067
online
0...15 dec
P078
online
7F...FF80 hex
P068
online
0...FFFF hex
Address, DAU 2
Presetting: Utilization
m or
m )
(M/M address: 3048H)
P/P a
(RAM
a
A smoothing function can be set using P071.
P069
online
0...15 dec
Shift factor, DAU 2
P079
online
7F...FF80 hex
Mot.
HS
P051
Change
effective
Output
voltage
Offset, DAU 2
1st overflow
2nd overflow
+10.0
3.
overflow
4. overflow
10.0
0000
H
2000H
4000
H
Shift factor = 0
Shift factor = 2
HS/3-66
6000H
8000
H
A000H
Offset = 0 V
Fine normalization = 100 %
C000
H
E000
H
FFFFH
Hex numerical value
07.94

Fine normalization
Table 3-16
The coarse normalization (P067, P069) must be set to 0H.
Fine normalization
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P012
online
200.0...200.0 %
Normalization DAU a display

For P012 = 100 %, the following is valid:
Max. speed (P029) corresponds to +10 V.
Only effective at address 3044H, preset to
DAU1. Update clock is 1 ms from FW 3.00 (previously 20ms)
P013
online
200.0...200.0 %
Normalization DAU Utilization display

Utilization display
n=0
:
/ dmax
r
to n r
n
:a
m M
a
a
>
P account
(taking
into
the actual torque limits P
P041)
The following is valid for P013 = 100 % :
Max. torque or output corresponds to +10 V.
Only effective at address 3048H, preset to
DAU2. Update clock is 1 ms from FW 2.40 1ms
(previously 20ms)
P026
online
200.0...200.0 %
P071
online
2...32767 ms
HS
Normalization DAU
rated
For P026 = 100 %, the following is valid:
rated torque corresponds to +5 V
M/ r
is signed, i.e.
Mnegative
a
a
rated torque corresponds to 5 V.
Only effective at address 304CH. Update clock is
1 ms from FW 3.00 1ms (previously 20ms)
Smoothing time, DAU utilization display
(from FW 2.40, not in the HPCaxis mode)
Output via address 3048 H, preset at DAU2.
Note
A list of the most important measured quantities (RAM variables) and their
dresses is provided in the Appendix (Section 6.5).

HS/3-67
07.94
HS
4
HS/3-68

07.94
4.1 Optimization, speed controller

1
HS/4-69
HS
4.1
Overview
speed setpoint smoothing

Gain, integral action time
Speed controller adaptation
Torque setpoint smoothing (pT )
Delay time, speed controller at endstop
Speed setpoint
smoothing
Table 4-1
Number
Change
effective
P051
Change effective
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P018
online
3...10000 ms
Smoothing time, speed setpoint smoothing

(switchon/off using P053 or via select terminal
function No. 25)
P019
online
0...30 dec
Degree of roundingoff, speed setpoint

(
element)
p only effective for active speed setpoint smooIs
thing.
0
no roundingoff
: max. roundingoff
30:
P053
online
0...FFFF hex
Control word
Bi
t
5

Value
0000H
0010H
Speed setpoint smoothing inactive

Speed setpoint smoothing active, if simultaneously, P090
bit
3=0

07.94
Speed actual value

smoothing
Table 4-2
Number
Change
effective
P051
Change effective
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P034
online
1...10 ms
Smoothing time, speed actual value

(Enabled/disabled using P053 bit 5) FW 3.00
P053
online
0...FFFF hex
Control word
Bi
t
4
Value
0000H
0020H

inactive
active
Table 4-3
HS
Number
Change
effective
P051
Change effective
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P
016.1
online
0.01...64.00 s
P
017.1
online
0.01...64.00 s
P053
online
0...FFFF hex
Description
Rampup time, rampfunction generator
(from n 0 to m P029)
n
a
Rampdown time,
rampfunction generator
(from m to n 0 P029)
n
Controla word
Bi
t
1
2
Speed
Value
0000H
1000H
Rampfunction generator trakking active

Rampfunction generator trakking inactive
Rampfunction
Speed set-
Rampfunction
generator output
point
generator output
Speed
Speed setpoint
Speed actual value

Without rampfunction generator
tracking
HS/4-70
Speed actual value

Time
With rampfunction generator

tracking
Time

07.94


Table 4-4
Number
Change
effective
P051
Change effective
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P
031.1
P
online
3.0...120.0 dec
P gain, speed controller
online
5...6000 ms
Integral action time, speed controller
online
032.1
P090
0...FFFF hex
Control word
Bi
t
Value
0000H
0040H
If the speed controller is at its

max, the integral component is
set to 0.
If the speed controller is at its
max, the integrator is held.
FW 2.00
HS

HS/4-71

07.94
Speed controller
adaptation
Table 4-5
Number
Mot.
Mot. 2
Change
effective
P051
Change effective
Description
1
P195
P283
online
P196
P284
online
P198
P285
online
P199
P286
online
1...200 %
Reduction factor, P gain

(multiplication of the Pgain characteristic over
the
complete speed range)
P201
P288
online
5...6000 ms
Integral action time, upper adaptation speed
P202
P289
online
1...200 %
Reduction factor, integral action time

(multiplication of the integral action time
ristic over the complete speed range)
P203
P293
online
0...7 dec
Control word adaptation, speed controller

Adaptation only possible in gearbox stage 1!
HS
0.. max
.n
0.. Mot
max
RPM
.n1.0...120.0
RPM
Mot
dec
Lower adaptation speed

Upper adaptation speed
P gain, upper adaptation speed
Bit
1
Value
0000H
0002H
No adaptation
active
Integral action
tigain m e
P032.1
m
s
P202
P199
P199
P202
P031.1
P195
P198
P201
Spee
d
R
P
M
196
HS/4-72

07.94

Torque setpoint
smoothing (pT )1
Table 4-6
Torque setpoint smoothing (pT )
Number
Change
effective
P051
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P035
online
P045
P274
online
P046
P275
online
P044
online
3...10000 ms
1.. max
.n Mot
RPM
0.. r
RPM
.n0...1
a hex
Smoothing time, torque setpoint smoothing

Switchin speed, torque setpoint smoothing
The torque setpoint smoothing is switchedin
above this speed
Hysteresis P045/P275
Select, torque setpoint smoothing
0: no torque setpoint smoothing
1: torque setpoint smoothing above the switchin
speed P045
HS

HS/4-73

07.94
Digital filter
torque setpoint
channel
Table 4-7
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P051
Change effective
P281
online
online
4
4
P103
P276
online
P104
P277
online
0.10...10.00 dec
P280
online
online
4
4
0...FFFF hex
0...1 hex
P118
P117
HS
Change
effective
0...FFFF hex
0...1 hex
50...450 Hz
Amplitude
Description
Torque setpoint filter type

0: bandstop characteristics
1: low pass characteristics
Frequency, torque setpoint filter
Low pass:
3 dB transition frequency
Bandstop:
center frequency
Quality, torque setpoint filter
Filter quality of the bandstop,
quality = 1, corresponds to 1.00
Select torque setpoint filter
0: disable digital filter
1: enable digital filter
P
Amplitude
3dB {
104
P
0.5
104
P103
Low pass
Freque
ncy
P103
Bandstop
Frequency
Hz
Delay time speed

controller at its
endstop
Table 4-8
Delay time, speed controller at endstop
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P248
HS/4-74
Change
effective
online
P051
4
Change effective
Description
100...10000 ms
Delay time, fault message F11

The fault message is output, if the speed
controller
is at its limit in the time specified in P248 and
the
speed actual value does not exceed the internal
threshold r
/256.
n
a

07.94
4.2 Optimization, current controller

4.2
Optimization, current controller
Note
Normally, it is not necessary to change the following parameters, as the optimum current controller setting is calculated from the motor and power
data.
Overview
Current controller
Current controller
Table 4-9
Current controller
Number
Change
effective
P051
Description
Correction, P gain, current controller

A signed offset is added to the current contr. P
gain.
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P116
P278
online
225...255 dec
P120
P292
online
500...10000 RPM
online
(P316)
HS
Change effective

Changeover speed, current controller adaptation

The current controller P gain is increased when
the speed is exceeded.
Display, Pgain, current controller
Displays the actually effective current contr. P
gain.
HS/4-75
4.2 Optimization, current controller

04.97

Table 4-10
Inverter clock frequency 1
Number
Mot. 1
P053
Mot. 2
Change
effective
online
P051
4
Change effective
0...FFFF hex
Description
Control word
Bi
t
8
9
1
0
Value
0000H
0200H
0400H
0600H
0100H
0300H
0500H
0700H
Pulse freq. [kHz]

3.2
4.7
6.3
7.8
2.8 from FW 3.00
5.0 from FW 3.00
3.9 from FW 3.00
5.9 from FW 3.00
Note: An inverter clock frequency > 3.2 kHz is

only possible with derating
(refer to Table 13).
HS
Table 4-11
Inverter clock frequency 2
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P331
P332
P333
Change
effective
online
online
online
P051
4
4
4
Change effective
07Hex
07Hex
07Hex
Description
Inverter clock frequency 2 from FW 3.00

Setting possibility
Value
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
(P330)
HS/4-76
online
2.87.8kHz
Pulse freq. [kHz]

3.2
2.8
6.3
5.0
4.7
3.9
7.8
6.1
Display of the actual clock frequency

07.94
5.1 Diagnostic aids

Diagnostics and fault analysis

5.1
Diagnostic aids
5.1.1
Measured value displays
Table 5-1
Number
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
20000...20000
RPM
Speed setpoint
20000...20000
RPM
Speed actual value
(P001)
(P002)
(P102)
(P003)
0...500 V
(P004)
0...100.0 %
(P006)
0...700 V
DC link voltage
(P007)
0...150 A
Motor current
(P008)
0...100 kVA
Motor reactive power
(P009)
0...100 kW
Motor active power
(P010)
0...150 C
Motor temperature
(P101)
200...200 %
(P330)
2.8...7.8 kHz

HS
Motor voltage
Utilization (referred to the actual torque limit)
Setpoint for torquecontrolled operation

HS/5-77
5.1.2 Status displays

5.1.2
07.94
Status displays
P000, P100
operating display
refer to Section 2.2.1, Table 2-10
P011
Status of the binary inputs
Table 5-2
P011, status of the binary inputs
Display
Display
value
HS
Term.
central63
pulse enable
NE
Term. E6
Term. E2
freely
programmable
via P086
freely
programmable
via P082
Term. E7
Term. 64
central
controller
enable
NE
Term. E3
freely
programmabl
e via P087
freely
programmabl
e via P083
Term. 65
axisspecific
controller
enable
Term. E8
freely
programmabl
e via P088
Term. E4
freely
programmabl
e via P084
Term.
open81
ramp
function
generator fast
stop
Term. E9
Term. 663
axisspecific
pulse enable
freely
programmabl
via P089
Term. E5
freely
programmabl
via P085
Term. E1
freely
programmabl
via P081
Several messages can be displayed. The hexadecimal addition is displayed.

Example: 4H + 8H = CH
HS/5-78

07.94

P254
Display of active
functions 1
Table 5-3
P254 display of active functions 1
Display
Display
value
Fct. No. 9
gearbox stage
bit 0
Fct. No. 10
gearbox
stage
bit 1
Fct. No. 11
gearbox
stage
bit 2
Fct. No. 16
setpoint
enable
Fct. No. 5
Fct. No. 1
star/delta
2. torque limit
Fct. No. 6
M19
operation
Fct. No. 7
T
=0
Fct. No. 8
integrator
inhibit,
speed
controller
Fct. No. 2
oscillation
HS
Fct. No. 3
reset fault
me- (fault
mory
acknowledgment
Fct. No. 4
torque
controlled operation


HS/5-79

07.94
P255
Display of active
function 2
Table 5-4
P255 display of active functions 2
Display
Display
value
suppress
F11
Fct. No. 26
slip
Fct.monitoring
No. 32
Fct. No. 33
HS
Fct. No. 23
position ref.
values 1...2
Fct. No. 27
position ref.
values 3...4
Fct. No. 28
positioning on
Fct. No. 30
HPC axis
Inverter clock
frequency
bit 0
Fct. No. 24
Fct. No. 22
Fct. No. 34
C axis
incremental
positioning
Inverter clock
frequency
bit1
Fct. No. 25
Fct. No. 29
speed
setpoint
smoothing
active
Spindle
re
synchronization

HS/5-80

07.94
5.1.3 Diagnostic parameters

5.1.3
Diagnostic parameters
Table 5-5
Number
Mot. 1
(P
020)
Mot. 2
Chang
effective
P051
Setting
range
Description
Diagnostic, speed actual value

When continuously increasing by several increments,
there is an increased noise level. (counter for dn/dt
monitoring)
Possible causes:
encoder shield not grounded
encoder defective
electronic ground not OK
motor ground not connected to the main spindle
drive
module
measuring circuit 1 defective
entered motor moment of inertia was too high (P
159,
P219)
(P
028)
Diagnostic
Bit
Value
0008
H
HS
Alarm, temperature sensor

interrupted
short circuit
13
2000
H
Divisioninterrupt due to an error in the

calculation routine as incorrect data
were
input.
(P
299)
Checksum, parameter
For each save (P052 = 1H), the checksum is
generated
over the parameter contents. Thus, if there is a change
in
the drivemachine data, this will be identified.
(P
320)
Diagnostics, motor encoder zero mark from FW 3.00

There is an increased noise/disturbance level if this
continuously increases by several increments.
Possible causes:
encoder defective
drive
module
Defective measuring circuit
(P
321)
Diagnostics spindle encoder zero mark from FW

Prerequisite: Positioning with spindle encoder has been
selected, spindle encoder pulse number in P131.x is to
the power of 10.
There is an increased noise/disturbance level if this is
continuously increased by several increments.
Possible causes:
encoder defective
drive
module
measuring circuit defective

HS/5-81
5.1.4 Test sockets X1, X2, IR

5.1.4
07.94
Test sockets X1, X2, IR
Overview
function
technical data
assignment
Normalization, IR
Parameterization X1 (DAU 3), X2 (DAU 4)
Function
Technical data
Analog output of the phase current actual value and RAM variables for
measurement and diagnostics.
phase current actual value at test socket IR

2 output channels at X1 (DAU 3) and X2 (DAU 4)
HS
voltage range 0...+ 5 V (0 corresponds to +2.5 V)

rough normalization, offset compensation for X1 and X2 via parameter
Assignment
X1
X2
IR
Fig. 5-1
X1:
Test socket DAU 3
X2:
IR:
Test socket DAU 4

Current act. value, phase R
M:
Reference ground
Assignment, test sockets
Normalization,
phase current IR
Table 5-6
HS/5-82
Normalization, IR
Power module
Power module code

numbers (P095)
Normalization, IR
50 A
50 A corresponds to 8.25 V
80 A
120 A
160 A
200 A
10
300 A
11
400 A
12
108 A
13

07.94

Parameterization
X1 (DAU 3),
X2 (DAU 4)
Table 5-7
Parameterization X1 (DAU 3), X2 (DAU 4)
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P076
online
0...FFFF hex
P077
online
0...15 dec
P080
online
7F...FF80 hex
P072
online
0...FFFF hex
P073
online
0...15 dec
P074
online
7F...FF80 hex
Output
voltage
+5.0
Description
Address, DAU 3
Address of the RAM variables which are to be
output at DAU 3.
Presetting:
r
(RAM address: 3050H)
P/P
a
Shift factor, DAU 3
Selected data values are shifted to the left

1 corresponds to multiplication by
2 corresponds to multiplication by n
n
2
Offset, DAU 3
A possibly existing offset is compensated for DAU
3
Address, DAU 4
Presetting: a (RAM address: C04H)
n
c
Shift factor, DAU
4
HS
Offset, DAU 4
1.
overflow
2. overflow
3. overflow
4. overflow
+2.5
0.0
0000
H
2000H
4000H
Shift factor = 0
Shift factor = 2
6000H
8000H
A000H
Offset = 0 V
C000H
E000H
FFFFH
Hex numerical value
Note
A listing of the most important measured quantities (RAM variables) and
addresses are provided in the Appendix (Section 6.5).

HS/5-83
5.1.5 Minimum/maximum value memory

5.1.5
04.97
Minimum/maximum value memory
Function
Monitoring RAM variables for minimum and maximum values.
Table 5-8
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P181
online
P179
online
0...2 hex
(P182)
Minimum value, min/max memory
(P183)
Maximum value, min/max memory
HS
0...FFFF hex
Address for min/max memory

Address for RAM variable
Min/max memory selection
0H: stop memory function
1H: start memory function with absolute value
generation
2H: start memory function with bipolar evaluation
Note
A listing of important measured quantities (RAM variables) and addresses is
provided in the Appendix (Section 6.5).
5.1.6
Transient recorder function
Function
Technical data
Simultaneous tracing of 2 RAM variables and output via test sockets X1 and X2.
parallel tracing of two 16bit signals

640 values tracing depth
1 ms sampling time (P090, bit 3=0) or 0.525 ms (P090, bit 3=1, from
FW 3.00)
start and stop conditions (trigger conditions)
cyclic output via D/A converters
trigger condition for data output
HS/5-84

07.94
5.1.6 Transient recorder function

Parameterization
Table 5-9
Parameterization
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P207
online
0...10 hex
Transient recorder setting

1H: start via P206 without start and stop condition
2H: start condition P208 and P209, no stop
condi
tion, start via P206
5H: stop condition via P210 and P211, no start
condition, start via P206
6H: trace with start and stop condition
4H: preassigning the trace memory via P217
P212
online
0...FFFF hex
Address, signal 1
A listing of important measured quantities (RAM
variables) and their addresses are provided in the
Appendix (Section 6.5).
P213
online
0...FFFF hex
Address, signal 2
P208
online
0...FFFF hex
Address for the start condition

Address of the RAM variables, which start the
trace
P209
online
0...FFFF hex
Threshold for the start condition

Start condition mask, is compared with the RAM
variable in P208
P210
online
0...FFFF hex
Address for the stop condition
P211
online
0...FFFF hex
Threshold for the stop condition
P206
online
0...1 hex
Transient recorder selection

The transient recorder function is started by setting to 1H.
P215
online
0...15 dec
Shift factor, signal 1

Refer to the description, test sockets X1, X2,
Section 5.1.4
P216
online
0...15 dec
P217
online
0...FFFF hex
Trigger signal 1
Trigger signal amplitude low for D/A converter
output
P218
online
0...FFFF hex
Trigger signal 2
Trigger signal amplitude high for D/A converter
output
P214
online
0...1 hex

Start output for tracing

Cyclic outputs of the traced values on the D/A
converter
Trace signal 1 DAU 3 (X1)
The previous assignment of the D/A converters
are buffered and are reset after output has been
completed.
HS/5-85
HS

07.94
Note
A listing of the most important measured quantities (RAM variables) and
addresses are provided in the Appendix (Section 6.5).
5.1.7
Openloop current/frequency control
Function
Diagnosing motor encoder faults
Function
information
Above the field weakening speed (P173), the absolute current should be selected to be less than the noload current, as otherwise voltage limiting will be
initiated. The result is then erratic running and torque surges.
The frequency should be slowly changed, as I/f operation is prone to stalling.
Table 5-10
Current/frequency control (openloop)
Number
HS
Change
effective
P051
Mot. 1
Mot. 2
P311
online
P312
online
P313
online
HS/5-86
Setting range
0.0...100.0 %
0.0...800.0 Hz
0...1hex
Description
Current for I/f control

(referred to the rated motor current)
Frequency for I/f control
Selection, I/f control
0H: I/f control off
1H: I/f control on

07.94
5.2 Fault analysis

5.2
Fault analysis
5.2.1
Fault display, fault acknowledgment
Fault display
Display
Inactive
1 fault
Several faults, changeover using
key
Fault message number (refer to Table 511)

= fault
= positioning error
Fig. 5-2
Fault display
Fault acknowledgment
HS
by
P
key
Depress the
key with the controller inhibited.
If the fault can be acknowledged, the system returns to the operator control
program.
If the fault cannot be acknowledged, for example, there is a defect, then this
can be temporarily suppressed in the display.
remote acknowledgment
One of the following terminals is energized, with the controller inhibited:
terminal R reset at the NE or monitoring module
terminal reset fault memory at the main spindle drive module
powerdown
Powerdown the converter and after the display has disappeared after approx. 2 s, powerup again.
Fault suppression
by
key
The system returns to

minute after depressing the

key, without acknowledging the fault.
HS/5-87
5.2.2 Fault message list

5.2.2
Table 5-11
Fault
messag
e
F04
04.97
Fault message list

Fault message list
Fault
Cause
Erroneous
A/D converter (setpoint channel) faulted
setpoint conversion
F07
Data save on
If the fault message is repeatedly

output during data save,
FEPROM unsuccessful
then the FEPROM is defective.

If the fault message occurred directly
Troubleshooting
If this repeatedly occurs, replace the
control board
1Restart data save via P52=1

2Replace the control board if
fault F07 reoccurs
after the driveconverter was poweredup,

then the drive converter was previously
powereddown during a data save. The last
HS
parameter changes have therefore

not been saved. A new data save
must be initiated.
F08
Irretrievable
data loss
F09
Fault encoder
system 1
Defective FEPROM
Motor encoder not connected or defective

Motor encoder cable defective
(motor encoder)
Measuring circuit 1 (speed actual value
Replace the control board
Check the encoder cable/screen or

replace the motor encoder, or
replace the control board
sensing) defective, incorrectly inserted

or incorrect device (P150).
The fault message can be suppressed using
P090
bit 1 from FW2.00.
F10
Fault,
equipping
parameterization
,
encoder system
2
Positioning with spindle encoder selected

(P141=1, P143=1), incorrect board
Correctly adapt P33 (refer to the

Startup Guide, Section 3.3.4)
version
Use the correct
FW 1/2

(P141=1, P143=1), there is no spindle
encoder
inserted at X432 FW 3.00
control board version

Connectup the spindle encoder

(P141=1,
P143=1) with output of squarewaveconverted
motor encoder signals X432 (P033<>0)
FW 3.00
Output of squarewaveconverted
motor encoded signals at X432 (P033<>0)
selected, a spindle encoder is inserted at
X432
FW 3.00
HS/5-88

07.94

Fault
Fault
messag
e
F11
Cause
Speed controller
is at its limit,
Motor overloaded
DC link busbar
speed actual va-
not connected
lue missing
Troubleshooting
Prevent motor overload (P004<100%)
Tightenup DC link busbar
DC link fuse defective

Transistor in the power module defective
Replace the power module
Motor encoder not connected
Connectup the motor encoder
Motor encoder cable defective

Motor encoder defective
Motor ground not connected
Screen, motor encoder cable not connected
Replace the motor encoder

Secure the PE/motor connection
Ground the screen or replace the encoder
Motor not connected or phase missing
cable
Motor stalled/rotor locked
Connectup the motor with the correct
Measuring circuit 1 (speed actual value sensing) defective
phase sequence
Remove the mechanical blockage
or incorrectly connected
The contactor between the motor and
(the delay time can be set via P248.)
drive converter must be closed

Motor
F14
overtemperature
Motor
Motor overloaded
Motor current too high, e.g. due to
Reduce motor load

Correct motor data
incorrect motor data (P096)
Changeover to the 2nd temperature sensor
Temperature sensor defective (motor)
Connectup the fan
Motor fan defective
Replace the control board or
Measuring circuit 1 (speed actual value

motor)
defective
motor encoder
Replace the motor
Motor winding shortcircuit

F15
Drive converter
overtemperature
Drive converter overloaded (incorrect motor/

drive converter assignment, incorrect load
duty
cycle )
Correct motor/drive converter assignment

(P95/96)
Ambient temperature too high
Reduce
limit (P39)
M
Power module too small
Fan failed
Replace power module
Defective temperature sensor

Acknowledgment: Only after cooling down to below 50 C
15K, by poweringdown and power-
ingup again
F16
Incorrect
power module
code
Incorrect code number 3 selected in P095

(for power modules without automatic
Load the correct code number
identification)
Incorrect code number selected in P095
(for power modules with automatic
identification)
F17
motor
rate
from FW3.00
Incorrect motor/drive converter assignment
> I module
power
d

correctly set motor or
select a larger power module
HS/5-89
HS

Fault
messag
e
F18
04.97
Fault
Fault
encoder system
2
(spindle
encoder)
Cause
Spindle encoder not connected or defective
FW 3.00
Spindle encoder cable defective
FW 3.00
Troubleshooting
Connect a spindle encoder or replace
Check the encoder/drive converter
connecting cable
Measuring circuit 2 defective

FW 3.00
The fault message can be suppressed via P090
bit 5.
F19
Temperature
sensor
Temperature sensor defective (PTC thermistor

at 20C 600 , if required, use the 2nd
Interrupted
PTC thermistor of the motor)
Shortcir-
Connection to the sensor interrupted
cuited
Replace the temperature sensor

Reestablish the connection between the
temperature sensor motor/drive converter
Measuring circuit 1 defective

Acknowledgment: Only by switching the supply
voltage off and on
HS
F61
Maximum motor
frequency
exceeded
F79
Division interrupt
(this message
Encoder pulse number (P098) incorrectly

entered FW 2.00
No forcelocked connection between the
master/slave
Correctly enter the encoder pulse number

(P98)
Reestablish the mechanical forcelocked
connection (slavedrive)
Incorrect motor data in P159 to P176 or

P219 to P236
Enter the correct motor data

(field weakening > 1:16)
Setpoint input too high (Pto

P125, P131). Position reference value, ex-
Setpoint input must be set

lower (max P131)
can be suppressed by setting

P053, bit 11)
FP01
FP02
Setpoint > encoder pulse

number
Zero mark monitoring has
responded
ternal
Zero mark signal from the encoder or BERO
interrupted
Incorrect parameterization (P131)
Set the BERO clearance lower or replace

the BERO
Replace the cabling
Replace the encoder
Parameter setting in P131 greater than
the pulse number per revolution
HS/5-90

07.94
Fault
messag
e
FP03

Fault
Cause
Zero mark
offset > encoder
Troubleshooting
Value in P130 > the pulse number in P131
The entry in P130 must be set lower than

the value set in P131
When setting P129=1, there is

no valid zero mark, e.g.
The spindle must rotate through at least
pulse number
FP04
No valid
zero mark
after poweron
after the gearbox stage change
one
revolution
(rotate through
,
360
and then set P129 to 1 again). If
the fault still occurs,
check the zero mark
If a BERO is used, adjust the clearance,
check the cabling or
replace the BERO
For spindle/motor encoder,
check the cabling or replace the encoder
Faults
after
HS
supply ON
Operating control display inactive
at least two phases missing (NE module)
at least two input fuses have ruptured (NE module)
defective electronics power supply in the NE module
converter bus connection (ribbon cable), main spindle drive module
NE module not inserted or defective
control components defective
EPROM/FEPROM defective
firmware not loaded
Controller enable (without fault message)
Motor rotates at a max. 30 RPM at nset > 30 RPM or the motor oscillates
(oscillation is not selected) at nset < 30 RPM
incorrect motor phase sequence as the feeder cable is interchanged
(change 2 phase connections).
motor encoder pulse number which was entered is too high
Motor remains stationary for speed setpoints other than zero
reciprocation function is selected (P154, P155=0)
Motor briefly moves
defective power module

HS/5-91
04.97
HS
HS/5-92
07.94

6 Appendix
Appendix
HS
Before the converter is poweredup:

check the connections according to the system circuit diagram.
yes
Fault
yes

HS/6-93
no
6.1 Flow diagram for short startup

6.1
07.94
Flow diagram
for short startup
parameter values can be reset after acknowledging fault message F07 (refer
Siemens AGFault
1997 All Rights reserved
Warning
If a fault is acknowledged at the NE module, with the main spindle drive module enabled, then the drive accelerates
set.
to n
Note
If data save is interrupted due to power failure or the power being disconnected, then the values which were changed since the last data save are lost,
the drive converter displays fault message F07 after the power returns.
The
to Section 5.2.2).
START
HS
withdraw pulse and controller enable (terminal 663, terminal 65) or
disconnect completely.
determine the code number for the motor and power
section
(list, refer to tables 61 to 3-5)
Powerup the converter
(supply ON)
Does the display

remain inactive?
no
Does a
flashing
F... appear?
no
Does the
operating display
P000 appear
(refer to
Sect. 2.2.1)
yes
1
HS/6-94
07.94

Set P051 to 4H
(remove write protection)
Set P097 to 0H
(start initialization)
The module was already

commissioned once. In order
to adapt a new
motor, the initialized
status must be estab
lished.
Set P052 to 1H
(write into FEPROM)
Wait until P052 is again set to 0H,
then switch the converter off and 2 s
after the operating display has been
canceled, powerup again.
P095 or P096 display

P095:Enter the power module code No.
or check
P096:enter the motor type
P098:enter the number of
encoder pulses per motor revolution.
HS
Set P097 to 1H
SEtUP is
displayed
Wait until operating
display P000 appears
Is a special
motor used, where
there is no code number
defined for P096?
yes
Set P051 to 10H

no
Set P051 to 4H.
Enter P159 to P176
Set P177 to 1H (calculate motor

Wait until P177 is again set to 0H.
Set P051 to 4H.
Set P052 to 1H.
The motor data are transferred into the
FEPROM.

HS/6-95

07.94
Check the following parameters and if required modify:

P014
Normalization, nset
P015
Offset correction, nset
P024
Normalization, nset
P016
Rampup time, RFG
P017
Rampdown time, RFG
P029
Max. motor speed, nmaxmot
P021 to P023 ,
P027
Relay response values for

speed monitoring
P039 to P043
Torque limits
P047 to P050
HS
P081 to P089
Freelyprogrammable
terminal functions
P185 to P194,
Freelyprogrammable
P241 to P246
relay functions
P180
for Y/ motor
Values changed?
no
yes
Set P052 to 1H
The changed values are transferred
into the FEPROM.
HS/6-96

07.94

Status of the two center digits of the

operating display P000 (refer to
Section 2.2.1)
All enable signals at the NE and

MSD modules are switchedout.
Connect the enable voltage to all

enable signals at the NE module.
Axisspecific pulse enable, connect

the enable voltage to terminal 663 on
the main spindle drive module.
Controller enable
Connect the enable voltage to terminal
65 on the main spindle drive module.
HS
Connect the speed setpoint at terminal 56 and 14 and set to 0 V (display

at P001).
Is
terminal fct. 16
(setpoint enable) selected
and not switched
in.
no
yes
Cancel rampfunction generator fast stop, terminal 81.
Cancel rampfunction generator fast stop, terminal 81.
Enable the setpoint enable

via select signal
Slightly increase the speed setpoint. For fault message

F11, the speed actual value is faulty, or the motor is incorrectly connected. If the motor oscillates, then either the
motor phase sequence is incorrect, or reciprocation is pre
selected.

HS/6-97

07.94
Disable the RFG via term. 62 (TH = 0) if the terminal is parameterized.
Optimize the speed controller via P031 and P032.
Readjust the limit values or relay control thresholds as required.
no
Values changed?
yes
Set P052 to 1H.
HS
Wait until P052 is again set to 0H. The changed values are transferred into the
FEPROM.
After startup, save the changed

parameter values in the file or
document in list form.
Set P051 to 0H.
End
HS/6-98

07.94
6.2 Code numbers for the power modules and standard motors
6.2
Code numbers for the power modules and standard motors
Table 3-1
Powe
mod.
type
Order No.
6SN11231AA0
6SN11241AA0
6SN11351BA1
50 A
0CA
80 A
Power module code

number
P095
Peak output current,
S640 % 10 min A
S640 %. 10 s A
24
32
32
0DA
30
40
51
108 A
0LA
45
60
76
13 FW 2.40
120 A
0GA
45
60
76
160 A
0EA
60
80
102
200 A
0FA
85
110
127
10
300 A
0JA
120
150
193
11 FW 2.00
400 A
0KA
200
250
257
12 FW 2.00
Table 3-2
Rated
current
A
Motor code number
Rated motor
Motor no
current
load current
[A]
[A]
Rated speed
RPM
MLFB
1PH6...3ph.
motor
Rated
output
kW
101 NF4
101 NG4
103 NF4
103 NG4
105 NF4
105 NG4
105 NZ4
107 NC4
107 NF4
107 NG4
3.7
4.7
5.5
7.0
7.5
9.5
12.0
5.0
9.0
11.5
12.5
13.7
17.9
19.4
22.5
25.3
27.0
22.7
26.9
29.8
6.2
6.9
9.1
9.9
11.5
13.1
15.6
11.7
14.2
15.6
1500
2000
1500
2000
1500
2000
3000
750
1500
2000
131 NF4
131 NG4
131 NZ0
133 NB4
133 NF0
133 NF4
133 NG0
133 NG4
135 NF0
135 NF4
135 NG4
137 NB4
137 NF4
137 NG0
137 NG4
137 NZ4
138 NF0
138 NF4
138 NG4
9.0
12.0
8.0
4.5
11.0
11.0
14.5
14.5
15.0
15.0
20.0
7.9
18.5
24.0
24.0
11.0
22.0
22.0
28.0
27.2
32.1
23.2
26.0
26.7
31.3
31.5
37.5
35.0
41.3
50.6
43.6
50.2
50.0
57.8
41.8
51.5
61.0
66.1
11.7
13.6
10.9
9.8
11.5
13.4
14.5
16.1
16.1
18.8
22.8
18.6
22.9
23.2
26.5
18.0
24.6
28.7
31.4
1500
2000
1500
525
1500
1500
2000
2000
1500
1500
2000
525
1500
2000
2000
750
1500
1500
2000

Maximum
speed
RPM
9000
8000
Motor code
No. P096
101
102
103
104
105
106
140
131
107
108
109
110
141 FW 2.00
132
111
112
136
113
114
115
116
133
117
137
118
143 FW 3.00
119
120
121
HS/6-99
HS
Table 3-2
MLFB
1PH6...3ph.
motor
HS
Motor code number
Rated motor
output
kW
Rated motor
current
[A]
Motor no
load current
[A]
Rated speed
RPM
161 NF0
161 NF4
161 NG4
163 NB4
163 NF0
163 NF4
163 NG4
163 NZ0
167 NB4
167 NF0
167 NF4
167 NG0
167 NG4
168 NF0
22.0
22.0
28.0
11.5
30.0
30.0
38.0
19.0
14.5
37.0
37.0
45.0
45.0
40.0
53.5
60.8
68.1
66.2
72.5
86.0
84.0
56.0
78.0
79.6
95.7
83.3
91.0
84.0
23.9
26.9
31.3
27.8
33.3
40.3
37.5
25.2
34.4
36.3
43.5
32.2
41.0
38.0
1500
1500
2000
500
1500
1500
2000
950
500
1500
1500
2000
2000
1500
186 NB4
186 NB9
26.8
30.8
66.0
67.0
35.5
35.0
610
700
186 NB4
186 NE4
186 NF4
206 NB4
206 NE4
206 NF4
226 NF4
22.0
42.0
50.0
32.0
63.0
76.0
100.0
66.0
86.0
100.0
96.0
125.0
149.0
192.0
35.5
46.0
52.0
48.0
64.0
68.0
79.0
500
1250
1500
500
1250
1500
1500
MLFB1PH7...
motor
101xNF4
103xNF4
105xNF4
107xNF4
131xNF4
133xND4
133xND4
137xND4
137xNG4
163xND4
163xNF4
167xNF4
1842NE
1842NB
184xNTx
1862NE
1862NB
186xNTx
2242NF
2242NC
HS/6-100
04.97
Rated motor
output
kW
3.7
7
7
9
11
12
20
17
28
22
30
37
40.0
22.0
21.5
60.0
29.6
29.6
100.0
55.0
Rated motor
current
[A]
8.9
16.2
16.4
20.8
23.1
28
43
40.7
58.6
52.7
70.3
77.8
85.0
54.0
76
120.0
75.0
106
188.0
117.0
Motor no
load current
[A]
4.82
7.84
8.36
9.91
8.36
12.7
17.4
18.5
21.4
24.1
30.1
31.9
46.2
34.7
40
63.0
42.5
56
73.0
63.5
Rated speed
RPM
1500
2000
1500
1500
1500
1000
2000
1000
2000
1000
1500
1500
1250
500
500
1250
500
500
1500
700
Maximum
speed
RPM
6500
6100
5000
Motor code
No. P096
122
123
124
134
125
126
127
139
135
128
129
138
130
142 FW 2.00
161
167
160
163
164
162
165
166
168 FW 2.00
Maximum
speed
RPM
Motor code
No. P096
9000
9000
9000
9000
8000
8000
8000
8000
8000
6500
6500
6500
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
4500
4500
400 FW 3.00
402 FW 3.00
403 FW 3.00
404 FW 3.00
406 FW 3.00
408 FW 3.00
409 FW 3.00
411 FW 3.00
412 FW 3.00
414 FW 3.00
415 FW 3.00
417 FW 3.00
418 FW 2.40
419 FW 2.40
424 FW 3.00
420 FW 2.40
425 FW 3.00
421 FW 2.40
422 FW 2.40
423 FW 2.40

07.94
Table 3-3
MLFB
Y/ motors
Star/deltamotors
Rated motor
output
kW
Rated motor
current
[A]
Y/
Motor no
load current
[A]
Y/
Rated speed
RPM
Maximum
speed
RPM
Motor code
No. P096
1334NB8
1374NB8
4.3
7.5
15.3/13.5
25.2/22.5
6.4/8.0
11.7/13.5
525/1250
525/1250
8000
200
202
1634NB8
1674NB8
11.5
14.5
39.5/35.2
45.5/40.5
14.3/20.8
17.9/23.2
500/1250
550/1250
6500
204
206
1864NB8
2064NB8
2264NB8
22.0
32.0
42.0
55.0/50.0
76.0/73.0
94.0/88.0
31.0/35.0
38.0/49.0
56.0/55.0
500/1250
500/1250
500/1250
5000
208
210
214 FW 2.00
Table 3-4
MLFB
motors
Watercooled motors
Rated motor
output
kW
Rated motor
current
[A]
Motor no
load current
[A]
Rated speed
RPM
Maximum
speed
RPM
Motor code
No. P096
1034NG6
8.5
36.4
17.7
2000
18000
301
1054NG6
12.0
51.3
24.4
2000
17000
303
1074NG6
1334NF6
16.0
14.0
55.5
55.9
26.9
21.4
2000
1500
16000
305
307
1354NF6
20.0
76.6
29.7
1500
15000
309
1374NF6
25.0
92.8
35.9
1500
14000
311
1384NF6
28.0
102.2
40.0
1500
13000
313
1634ND6
25.0
103.8
42.4
1000
12000
315
1674ND6
31.0
129.4
50.7
1000
11000
317
1684ND6
35.0
143.9
58.6
1000
10000
319
1034NF2
1054NF2
1074NF2
7.5
11.0
14.0
25.2
36.6
45.0
11.5
16.4
19.0
1500
1500
1500
9000
300
302
304
1334NF2
1354NF2
1374NF2
1384NF2
15.0
22.0
27.0
30.0
53.1
70.7
81.9
97.3
17.4
25.5
30.3
33.8
1500
1500
1500
1500
8000
306
308
310
312
1634NF2
1674NF2
1684NF2
37.0
46.0
52.0
103.0
115.0
143.0
44.0
49.2
58.8
1500
1500
1500
6500
314
316
318

HS
HS/6-101
Table 3-5
MLFB
motors
HS
12.94
Builtin motors
Rated motor
output
kW
Rated motor
current
[A]
Motor no
load current
[A]
Rated speed
RPM
Maximum
speed
RPM
Motor code
No. P096
0924WG4
0964WG4
4.7
10.0
20.6
41.6
10.6
21.5
2000
2000
18000
326
327
1234WF4
1274WF4
1284WF4
11.5
21.0
25.0
54.5
80.8
97.1
21.1
33.4
37.4
1500
1500
1500
16000
328
329
330
1434WF4
1474WF4
30.0
38.0
96.5
111.3
41.8
43.7
1500
1500
12000
331
332
0936WF4
0956WF4
1136WF4
1156WF4
1176WF4
1186WF4
7.5
10.0
15.0
16.5
18.0
23.0
23.1
28.4
53.3
52.7
58.9
78.9
10.9
13.6
21.8
21.9
24.7
32.8
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
1826WC4
1846WP4
1866WB4
11.8
14.5
18.3
37.0
56.0
62.5
17.0
25.7
31.0
750
600
525
8000
333 FW 2.00
334 FW 2.00
335 FW 2.00
1886WB4
2546WB4
23.6
28.8
78.0
118.0
38.0
42.0
500
500
6000
336 FW 2.00
337 FW 2.00
2566WB4
39.3
119.0
54.0
500
4000
338 FW 2.00
10000
320
321
322
323
324
325
Measuring system pulse No. 256 or 512 depending on the encoder used
HS/6-102

07.94
6.3
6.3 Connections
Connections
Overview
Connecting diagram
connecting terminals
Relay terminals
star/delta changeover
Warning
Cable shields and cores of power cables which are not used (e.g. cores for
brakes) must be connected to PE potential in order to discharge charging
rents caused by capacitive coupling.
If this is not observed, hazardous voltages can occur which can result in
or severe bodily injury.
Note: If non-PELV circuits are used at terminals AS1 and AS2, connector coding
must be used so that the connector cannot be interchanged (refer to EN
602041, Section 6.4)
Order No. for the coding connector, refer to Catalog NC 60.1

HS/6-103
HS
6.3 Connections
04.97
Connection diagram
SIMODRIVE 611 analog system
NE module
MSD module
X111
External
74
Ready, signal
Group signal
I2t, temperature
monitoring
73.2
73.1
72
X121
5.3
5.2
5.1
63
9
FR +
9
FR +
64
19 FR
Pulse enable
Drive enable
X141
HS
X161
Setup
Contactor control
Signal. contact
Line contactor
X171
X172
SPP
EXT
X181
7
45
44
10
15
15
R
Fig. 6-1
IF
Warning!
External
RF
HSS
T.11)
T.31)
T.41)
T.51)
X451
56
14
A91
24
A92
M
8
X431
T.91)
RS232C
interface
DAU 2
Internal
289
81
A21
A31
A41
A51
A11
A61
672
673
674
E9
9
FR +
DAU 1
X441
663
65
E7
E8
T.81)
AS1
AS2
X411
X412
Module
internal
E5
E6
T.61)
T.71)
Motor encoder
X421
E1
E2
E3
E4
T.21)
Signaling
contact
5 V Start inhibit
UNIT
U DC
M500 link>>
P500
2U1
X
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1
PE
P24
P15
N15
N24
M
M
RESET
X433
Relay 11)
Relay 21)
Relay 31)
Relay 41)
Relay 51)
Relay 61)
Ready
Fault
Signaling
contact
Start inhibit
Bero input2)
Equipment bus
DC link
P 600
M 600
U2 V2 W2 PE1 PE2
X
at
L2
L3
nset2
AS1
AS2
FN L K
X2
IR
nset1
NS1
NS2
PE1
X1
External
9
FR +
112
48
111
213
113
U1 V1 W1
L1
X432BERO input
Spindle encoder input
Motor encoder output
internal
from the NC
SG
If a power contactor is used between the motor and main spindle drive module, then it
must be ensured, that this contactor only switches in a nocurrent condition. (When
shutting down, first cancel the pulses (terminal 663), then 40 ms later the contactor).
Connecting diagram
1) freelyprogrammable inputs and outputs

2) from MLFB (Order No.) 6SN11210BA110AA1
HS/6-104

07.94
6.3 Connections
Table 3-6
Term
No.
connecting terminals
Designa
tion
Typ
Function
1)
Typ. voltage/
limit values
Max. crosssection
Acc. to the Configuring Guide
U2
V2
W2
Motor connection
3ph. 0...450 V
AC
PE1
PE2
I
O
0V
0V
P600
M600
DC link
DC link
I/O
I/O
+300 V
300 V
Busbar
Busbar
Equipment bus
I/O
Various
Ribbon cable
X151/351
56
14
24
8
X421
X421
X421
X421
663
65
81
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
9 3)
X431
X431
X431
X431
X431
X431
X431
X431
X431
X431
X431
X431
X431
Axisspecific pulse enable

Controller enable
RFG fast stop
Freelyprogram. enable t.
1
Freelyprogram.
enable t.
2
Freelyprogram.
enable t.
3
Freelyprogram.
enable t.
5
6
Freelyprogram.
enable t.
7
Freelyprogram.
enable t.
8
Freelyprogram.
enable t.
9
Enable
voltage
A91
M
A92
M
X451
X451
X451
X451
X1
X2
I R
M
Speed setpoint 1
Speed setpoint 2
Caxis or supplementary
speed setpoint
E
E
E
E
10V/0.5m
(max. 11
V)
10V/0.5m
A
(max.
11
V)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
O
+21V...+33V
+13V...+30V
+13V...+30V
+13V...+30V
+13V...+30V
+13V...+30V
+13V...+30V
+13V...+30V
+13V...+30V
+13V...+30V
+13V...+30V
+13V...+30V
+24V
Analog output, DAU1

Ref. potential for DAU1
Analog output, DAU2
Ref. potential for DAU2
O
O
O
O
10 V 3 mA
0V
10 V 3 mA
0V
Test socket
Test socket
Test socket
Test socket
O
O
O
O
0 V...5 V 3 mA
0 V...5 V 3 mA
10 V 3 mA
0V
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Bolt
Bolt
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
2
2
2
2
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Test socket 2 mm diameter

Test socket 2 mm diameter
1) I = input, O = output
2) can be freelyprogrammed via operator control parameters
3) refer to Section 3.1...3.2

HS/6-105
HS
6.3 Connections
07.94
Relay terminals
Table 3-7
Term
No.
Relay terminals
Designa
tion
Typ
Function
1)
289
X441
Center contact signals
A11
A21
A31
A
4 )
A
5
A61
X441
X441
X441
X441
X441
X441
672
673
674
X441
X441
X441
Freelyprogram. relay fct.

Freelyprogram.
relay fct.
1
2
Freelyprogram.
relay fct.
3
Freelyprogram.
relay fct.
4
Freelyprogram.
relay fct.
5
Freelyprogram. relay fct.
6
Ready/no axis specific fault
AS 1
AS 2
X441
X441
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
3)
30 V/6.0 A
max
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
NO
I
NC
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
I
NC
250 A /1 A,
30 D /2 A
V
I
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Signaling contact
Start inhibit
Typ. voltage/
limit values
Max. crosssection
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
HS
1) I = input
NC = NC contact
NO = NO contact

3) when using several relays, the total current of 6 A may not be exceeded.
HS/6-106

07.94
6.3 Connections
Star/delta
changeover
The motors with star/delta changeover permit a wide constant power range. At
low speeds, the drive is operated in the star circuit configuration (high torque)
and at high speeds, in the delta circuit configuration (high stall torque). Changeover is also possible during operation. The changeover command (star/delta)
must be entered externally (similar to a gearbox stage changeover).
Selectable relay
outputs2)
SIMODRIVE 611 analog system main

spindle drive module
U2
V2 W2 PE
T. 663
T. En1)
T. An2)
T. An2)
T. 289
K2
Kx3)
K1
K2h
K1h
Kx3)
K1
U1 V1 W1
U2 V2 W2
Auxiliary contactor
power supply
K1h max. 30 V DC
HS
K2h
K2
U2
V2
K1
K2
W2
K1
1PH
K2
Y/
Pulse
enable
Y/
changeover
From the
NC/PLC
Fig. 6-2
Connecting diagram for Y/ changeover
1) an input terminal, selectable from terminals E1 to E9.

2) two relay outputs, selectable from terminals A11 to A61.
3) safety hold is not guaranteed by just opening K1 and K2.Thus, for safetyrelated reasons, electrical isolation must be
realized using contactor Kx. This contactor may only be switched in a nocurrent condition, i. e. the pulse enable must
be removed 40 ms before the protective trip.

HS/6-107

6.4
07.94
Overview
connector assignment X412 and motor connector

connector assignment X432 for the spindle encoder
connector assignment X432 for BERO
connector assignment X432 for motor encoder signal output for NC
Connector assignment X412 and

motor connector
X412: 15pin subD socket connector, shift locking

motor connector: 17pin round connector
Note: The connector may only be inserted or withdrawn when the system
is in a novoltage condition.
HS
Table 3-8
Connector assignment: Motor encoder signals
Signal name
X412/PIN No.
P encoder
Motor connector /PIN

No.
10
M encoder
100
Inner shield
17
11
12
5 V sense
16
10
100
0 V sense
11
15
12
13
+ Temp
14
Temp
15
15
8
10
9
8
11
16
15
12
2
13 100
17
14 4
7 6
External shield is connected to the connector housing.
HS/6-108

07.94
Connector assignment X432 for

spindle encoder

15pin subD plug connector: shift catch

Table 3-9
Connector assignment: Evaluation for incremental encoders with TTL

squarewave signals
PIN No.
Signal name
Explanation
5V
Encoder power supply
0V
Ground, encoder power

supply
100
Signal A
Signal A, inverted
May not be used
Signal B
Signal B, inverted
May not be used
5 V sense
10

BERO
May not be used
11
0 V sense
Sensor line, ground
12
Signal R
13
Signal R, inverted
14
May not be used
15
May not be used
Table 3-10

BERO
Sensor line
Connector assignment: External reference mark evaluation
PIN No.
Signal name
Explanation
10
FR +
24V
14
BERO
Signal
15
FR
Ground
Table 3-11
Connector assignment: External reference mark evaluation
PIN No.
Signal name
Explanation
FR +
24V
BERO
Signal
100
FR
Ground

HS/6-109
HS

Connector assignment X432 for motor encoder signal

output for NC
07.94
Table 3-12
Connector assignment: Output of motor encoder signals with TTL square

wave signals
PIN No.
Signal name
May not be used
0V
100
Signal A
Signal A, inverted
HS
Ground, encoder power

supply
May not be used
Signal B
Signal B, inverted
May not be used
May not be used
10
May not be used
11
HS/6-110
Explanation
May not be used
12
Signal R
13
Signal R, inverted
14
May not be used
15
May not be used

07.94

Connector X432
B
a
R1
td
R2
R3
Fig. 6-3
td
td
td
td
td
HS
X432: Output signals for the numerical control
R1: Multiplication factor 1 and 0.5

R2: Multiplication factor 2
R3: Multiplication factor 4
Incremental signals:
TTL squarewave pulse trains A and B, and their

inverted pulse trains A and B.
When the shaft is rotating clockwise, B lags A.
Edge distance:
a 200 ns, if the maximum permissible encoder

signal input frequency is notexceeded
Reference signal:
One squarewave pulse R per mechanical revolution

and its inverted pulse R.
Delay time:
|td| 50 ns
Load capability:
Iahigh 20 mA
Ialow 20 mA
Cload 1000 pF
Signal level:
Open output (internal 270 ) 3.5 V,

for minimum terminating resistance, of a total of
60 2.5 V.
More detailed information can be taken from the
description of the RS422A interface.

HS/6-111
6.5 Addresses, RAM variables

6.5
03.96

The following is valid for all address information: Segment address = 0H
Table 3-13
Speed setpoint
0C02H
Low
addres
s
0C00H
Speed actual value
Variable
HS
Value
10
0000H
10
Corresponds
to
n rated
0C06H
0C04H
Absolute speed actual value (1 ms)
1402H
Speed setpointactual value difference
0C0AH
0C08H
Torque setpoint from the speed controller
0C66H
Adr.
0F52H
Torque setpoint for K/P converter
0C6CH
Adr. 0F52H M drated

Adr. 0F52H M drated
Actual d
operation
M
s for generator input
Rampfunction
0C6EH
0E00H
0E02H
Rampfunction generator output
0E04H
0E06H
Magnetizing current setpoint
0F5CH
Active current setpoint
0F5EH
Slip frequency setpoint
0F7CH
Stator temperature
0FC2H
Digital filter input
1B08H
Digital filter output
1B0AH
DC link voltage
906H
Output
P/P
Output |
3064H
3050H
P/P
1)
High
address
rated
r
a
0000H
1
000H
10
000H
10
0000H
10
0000H
2
000H
2
000H
2
000H
64
n rated
n rated
n rated
M drated
n rated
n rated
I rated
I rated
f rated
100 C
H
Adr. 0F52H
M drated
Adr. 0F52H M drated
359
3
4000
H
4000
H
600 V
P rated
P rated 1)
from FW2.00
HS/6-112
07.94

6.6 Setting and check data (parameter list)

6.6
Setting and check data (parameter list)

Fields with grey background: Data entry is not
possible
HS
R R
% %
2 2
.
5
51
3
3 3 4 4 4 4
31r
0m
0r
0m

1 1 1 HS/6-113
1
2 3
3 3 5 2
=

M
M M M M
Main spindle modules
(HS)
04.97
M
P P P P P P P P
P P P P
8
h
s s
7
( ( ( ( ( ( ( ( (
h(
mfa<
N T
V
DS
P P%
P
d Siemens
R AG
R 1997
R
All Rights
R 2 Ph
m
h
1reserved
HS
D
% V A
1 1
0
R
C 0 0
Sws
3 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 3 3
5 3
m
m m m
ad
a<
R
O S S
U D
S N N S O R R S D D R S R N
HS/6-114
04.97

HS
R d
m d
2 0
Fs
S
R R
5 1
% % %
1 5
0 5 5 5
R R
5
1m 0m
R
1
% %
5 9
1m 00r
R
0
R 0
4
0m 0
R
0
R R
0
R
.m
0
m
0m 0m 0m
2 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1
3 4 4
43
m m
4 2
m
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
m m m m m m m
4 34 4
m m m
1 1
2 2 2
2 2 2
d
D
Mdfd<d
M P
I E SS
E C H 1
2R
C H S S H
N O C
WT
M M M S
P P P P PP P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P PP P P P P

HS/6-115

04.97
1
S
2
HS
D
C C

0
d h h h d d d d d d d d d h
h d
0 0
C
0 0 0 1 7 1 6 4 2 9
0
3
1 1
0 0
s
S
1 1 1
2 2 2
00
0
0
7 7 7
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 4
1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2
3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 3 3 5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
2 2
M F T
P P P
HS/6-116
A S A S D A S
A S O
T O
T TO T T T T T T
O
PP P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
C
P P

04.97

1
S
2
6
C
s
S
r r
2 2 2 2
3 1
1 3
% %
2 2
5 5
4 4
m h
1 1 1 1
5 5
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2
0 0 0 0
0
rCr
1 1 1 1 1 1 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
m m
0 0 5
1
4 4 4
m m m
2
m
O N P
P P P P PP
M IE F
S SO F
( (
( (
P P P P P P P P P

P P P P P P PP
HS/6-117
HS

03.96
1
S
2
HS
d d d d d d d h d d d d
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
s
S
h h h
d d

2 2
d d
4
0 0 0
0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
R
4
0 0
P P B A S Z
P P P P P P
HS/6-118
P P P
(
M A D
I I
P P P P P P
( (
P P P
M CF
A
P P P P P P

07.94

1
S
2
1
2
D
h h h h
0 0 0 0
R R
m mm k
1 1
A V
0
S
s
S
m m
2 2
1 1
mm m
M M
M M
M M
M M
0 0
0 0
1 1 1 31
2 2 2 2
0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0
0 0 0
m m m m m
m m m m m m m m m m m m m m
O O O O
P P P P P P
M R R R
P P PP P
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
M M
10
2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
R R R % %
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
m m
.m .m
0
V A
R R
SM M
R S R
c
h
L
MU
P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P

HS/6-119
HS

03.96
HS
0 0 0
0 0
S
s
S
h sh s h
h h h h h h h
0
0 0
hs s
1
0 0
R R
m %
1 1
01 0 1
0m 0m
0 0
0
1
0 0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0 0
0
0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 2 5 5 5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
d h h h h h
5 5 5 5 5
m m m m m m m
A
P
P P P
HS/6-120
M M
( (
A T P D H
TA
P D HL
U P R
R C
P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P

07.94

HS
h h h h d d h h
m m mm
% %
h
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0
0 0
0
0
s
S
0
0
M M M
0 0
0 0 0 0 0
M M
1
M
05 15
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
m m m m m m m m
m m m m m m
m m m m
c
h
L
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
A A S S S
0
M
0 0 0
A V
T T
P P P P P P P P P P P P
M R R R R R
M M RS S R
P P P P P P P P

M
U S
1
2
m
M G
S S
P P P P P P P
M
P
HS/6-121

04.97
HS
d d d d d d d h
0 2
S
4 5 7 0
h h
0 0
7
1 1 1 1 1 1
h h h
0 0
ss
R R R R R R
0 0 m
1
R
32
R R
% %
51 1
.m

0 0
0r 1r 0m
00rm
5
3
0 5 5
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
s
S
1 1 12
2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5
1 1
3 3
5 5
33
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
24 24 2 2
3 3 2 3 3 2
m m m
m m m m m m m m
s=a
=
a
a<
R
mfa<
P P P P C
P P P P P P P P
HS/6-122
M M
P
V D D
P P
( (
D
S
S RR
T S P
C H1
PP P P P P P PP P P P P P

07.94

1
%
5
S
s
S
R R R R
5
1m 0m 1m
R
5
0r
0 0 0
0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
m m m m m m m m m mm m m
1 1
0m 0m 0
1 5
1 R
4
M M
0m
1 1 1 1 1 1
4 4
0 0
0
5
0 0
HS
3 2 1 1 1 1
4 4
245 5 5 5
2 2
m m m m
m m mm
dt
Q C S T L
P
P P P P P P P P P PP P
U P
P P P PP P
P PP

R C
P P P
MC C
F S D
HS/6-123

04.97
HS
h h
%m
%
6
1 5
% %
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0
s
S
3 3 3
5 5 5 4
3 3
0 0
22 2
2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
S T
D T T
P P P P
HS/6-124
I I
P
H S
(

Induction motor modules (AM)

1
First
steps
1.1
....................................................
.......
StartUp
.....................................
Guidelines
.....
1.2
Startup
.....................................
instructions
.....
1.3
Operator control and display elements, control
........
parameters
.
1.4
Overview setting
....................................
data
.....
1.5
Connectio
...........................................
ns
......
Determining and setting the system
...................
configuration
...
2.1
Motor and drive converter data
.........................
sets
....
2.2
Standard
....................................
2.2.1
Operating
........................................
2.2.2
Firmware
........................................
2.2.3
Setting parameters for standard
..................
applications
...
2.3
Multimotor
....................................
2.3.1
Parallel
........................................
2.3.2
Parameter set
.................................
2.3.3
Motor
........................................
changeover
....
2.4
Operating motors at maximum speeds > 32000
...........
RPM
..
2.5
Monitor
.........................................
function
.....
...................
interfaces
...
3.1
Speed setpoint
..................................
interfaces
....
3.2
Input
..........................................
3.2.1
Permanentlywired terminal
........................
3.2.2
Freelyprogrammable terminal
.....................
functions
...
3.3
Output
.........................................
3.3.1
Permanentlywired relay
..........................
3.3.2
Freelyprogrammable relay
........................
3.3.3
Variable relay
....................................
3.3.4
Analog
..........................................
outputs
.....
Controller
..........................................
optimization
.....
4.1
Speed
.........................................
controller
.....
4.2
Current
........................................
controller
.....
4.3
Field
..........................................
controller
.....
4.4
Optimization openloop controlled
.....................
range
...
4.5
Limi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ts
......
4.6
Special speeds and speed
..........................
ranges
....
4.7
Manual
.....................................
optimization
.....

AM/1-3
AM/1-4
AM/1-7
AM/1-9
AM/1-13
AM/1-14
AM/2-15
AM/2-15
AM/2-22
AM/2-22
AM/2-23
AM/2-23
AM/2-27
AM/2-27
AM/2-32
AM/2-32
AM/2-34
AM/2-36
AM/3-37
AM/3-37
AM/3-40
AM/3-40
AM/3-41
AM/3-43
AM/3-43
AM/3-44
AM/3-47
AM/3-48
AM/4-51
AM/4-54
AM/4-57
AM/4-59
AM/4-60
AM/4-61
AM/4-62
AM/4-64
AMi
AM
07.94
Diagnostics and fault

....................................
analysis
.....
5.1
Diagnostic
..........................................
5.1.1
Measured value
..................................
5.1.2
Status
..........................................
5.1.3
Diagnostic
....................................
5.1.4
Test sockets X1, X2,
...................................
5.1.5
Minimum/maximum value
..........................
5.1.6
Transient recorder
.................................
5.1.7
Openloop current/frequency
.........................
control
...
5.2
Fault
...........................................
5.2.1
Fault display, fault
.........................
5.2.2
Fault message
.......................................
list
.....
Appen
......................................................
dix
......
6.1
Flow diagram for new start
..............................
up
...
6.2
Power module code
..............................
2
AM/5-75
6.3
Connectio
3
AM/6-10
6.4
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
X432 connector assignment for
.......................
6
X412 connector assignment for the motor temperature
.....
6
X411 serial
.....................................
6
AM/6-10
6.5
Addresses, RAM
7
AM/6-10
6.6
Setting and checking data (Parameter

8
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
...........................................
.................................
....................
AM/5-75
AM/5-75
AM/5-76
AM/5-79
AM/5-80
AM/5-83
AM/5-84
AM/5-86
AM/5-87
AM/5-87
AM/5-88
AM/6-91
AM/6-92
AM/6-10
AM/6-10
AM/6-10
AM/6-10
AM/6-10
AM
AM

ii
04.97
1 First steps
AM/1-3
First steps
Warning
Professional transport, storage, installation and mounting as well as careful
operator control and service are absolutely necessary to guarantee perfect
safe operation of this drive converter.
Severe bodily injury or material damage can occur if this warning information
not observed.
The boards contain components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
Please observe the ESDS instructions in the foreword.
Note
The board, MLFB (Order No.) 6SN11210BA110AA1 can only be operated

with firmware from 3.00.
The boards, MLFB (Order Nos.):
6SN11210BA110AA0
6SN11210BA120AA0
can only be operated up to Firmware 2.xx.

1.1 StartUp
07.94

Guidelines
1.1
StartUp Guidelines
Structure of the
The StartUp Guide is structured according to the sequence of the various
Start
Guide
startup steps.
To startup standard applications, where the preset drive converter interfaces
(Section 1.5) and controller optimization when shipped, are adequate, then only
the startup steps which are highlighted are of significance.
2 System
1 First steps
Startup
guidelines
Startup
instructions
Operator control
display
and
elements,
control parameters
Overview, setting
data
Connections
Converter interfaces
Speed setpoint
interface
Input terminals
Motor and
configuration
data sets
Standard
applications
Multimotor operation
Parallel operation
Parameter set
changeover
4 Contr. optimization
Speed controller
current controller
Permanentlywired
Field
Freelyprogram
Openloop
range
controlled
terminal function
mable terminal
function
Output terminals
Limits
Motor changeover
Special speeds and

speed ranges
Monitor function
Manual optimization
5 Diagnostics, fault analysis

Diagnostic aids
Fault analysis
6 Appendix
AM
Fig. 1-1
Flow diagram
Connections
Setting and monitoring data
Startup
steps
Number
AM
AM/1-4
04.97

Parameter listing
Warning
Parameter settings, which are not listed in the parameter list
(refer to Section 6.6) may not be changed.
The parameter descriptions are in the form of tables.

The sequence in which they are listed is the actual parameterizing sequence.
AM/1-5
Table 1-1
Example of the parameter display
Number
P024
P014.M
P039.G
P114.F
(P001)
Change
effective
online
after
initializatio
n
Setting range
P051
4
10
Value range
dimensions
Description
Parameter designation
Brief description of the parameter
FW x.xx
Parameter
attributes
P024
generally valid parameter
P014.M
motordependent parameter
subparameter P014.1...P014.4
P039.G
gearbox stagedependent parameter
P114.F
fixed setpointdependent parameter
(P001)
display parameter; value cannot be changed.

12.94

Change effective
online
Change is immediately effective.
After initialization
Initialization is started by setting P097 to 1H.
P051
Write protection parameters
Remove the write protection by entering 04H and
remove the special write protection by entering 0010H.
Setting range
For several control words, the functions are activated by setting the bits of a
binary number and these are then entered in a hexadecimal form.
Example:
BIT
15
Bit 6:
Bit 7:
er
fu
BIT
AM
Bit 6+Bit
14
13
12
11
A
val
u
Ex
a
15
0
10
bi
s.
tio
re
din bi
Bi
n
Bi
0040H
he
x
decimal
Bi
n
00C0H
0080H
pl
e:
14
13
12 11
10
Description
FW x.xx
Firmwarerelease dependent coding of the function and parameter extensions. The extension is available from the specified firmware release.
AM/1-6

04.97
1.2

Startup instructions
Startup possibilities
via
operator control and display elements (refer to Section 1.3)
RS232C interface with an IBM ATcompatible computer and
startup software (refer to foreword).
Reinitialize
drive converter
(if necessary)
If an already initialized drive converter is to be reinitialized, then the following

procedure must be observed:
if required, save setting data (parameters)
remove write protection: Set P051 to 4H.
start initialization: Set P097 to 0H.
overwrite the parameters in the drivemachine data memory:
Set P052 to 1H, and wait until P052 resets itself to 0H.
poweron reset:
Powerdown the unit and powerup approximately 2 s after the display has
disappeared:
P095 must then appear in the display.
initialize (Section 2.1).
Firmware replacement (if required)
The firmware can be replaced using the userprompted startup software for
main spindle and induction motor modules from version V2.00.
Dependency, firmware release/board
Firmware release
Board
before 3.00
6SN11220BA1 0AA0
from 3.00
6SN11220BA120AA1y
A
M
Procedure:
backup setting data (parameters)
replace the firmware using the startup program
initialize with the pulses and controller inhibited (Section 2.1).
reload the backedup settings.
adjust the power offset (refer to Table 41, from FW 3.00, this is not necessary)
backup the settings in the drivemachine data memory (Section 1.3)

AM/1-7
07.94
Startup of series
The drive converter setting data (parameters) can be saved on floppy disk using
machines, module
replacement,
component replacement
the startup software. Proceed as follows for series startup of additional drive
converters:
1. Initialize with the pulses and controller inhibited:
Enter P095 power module code acc. to Table 61 1)

motor code numbers are saved on floppy disk
and therefore do not have to be entered.
start initialization.
2. Load setting data from the floppy disk.
3. Adjust the power offset according to Table 41. This is not necessary
from FW 3.00.
4. Save.
module:
AM
<
P
1)
Power modules with MLFB (Order No.=) 6SN112 1A 0

Then, it is no longer possible/necessary to enter P095.
A1 from FW 3.00, are automatically identified.

+
>

AM/1-8
07.94
1.3

Operator control and display elements, control parameters

+
>
>>
AM/1-9
Operator control
and
display elements
The following operator control and display elements are available on the front
panel to startup and parameterize the SIMODRIVE 611A induction motor
3 op. control keys (
+ ,
and
key)
6digit LCD display

Gearbox stagedependent parameters and the fixed setpointdependent
P114 are represented using 8 subparameter numbers (e. g. P039.1 to
P039.8).
Motordependent parameters are represented with 4 subparameter numbers
(e. g. P014.1 to P014.4).
The operator control element functions are represented using, as an example,
parameter P039.
<<
Parameter number
AM
Subparameter number
+
P
Parameter value
<
<<


07.94
Control parameters
Note
If data storage (P052) is interrupted due to power failure or the power being
disconnected, then the modified/changed values are lost, and when the
returns, the converter displays fault message F07 (refer to Section 5.2.2).
The parameter values can be reset after fault message F07 is acknowledged (refer to Section 5.2.2).
Table 1-2
openloop control parameter
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting data
P051
P151
online
0...FFFF hex
P052
P152
online
0...1 dec
P053
online
0...FFFF hex
Description
Write protection
Remove write protection by entering 4H.
Remove special write protection by entering 10H.
Transfer into the nonvolatile drivemachine data
memory is started by setting to 1. The parameter is
reset automatically after parameter transfer.
Control word
Bi
t
Value
0000
0001
AM
0
H
0000
0002
1
H
0000
0004
0

no
fault.
Motor parameter set is changed
after selecting another motor with
subsequent pulse cancellation
(motor
changeover).
The motor parameter set is
immediately changedover after another motor is selected (parameter set changeover)
For a rampfunction generator fast
stop
(T. 81), the pulses are not canceled
when the absolute speed min
n
(P022) is fallen below.
For a rampfct. generator fast stop
(term. 81), the pulses are canceled
when the absolute speed min
n
(P022)
is fallen below.
0000
H
The rampfunction generator is not

tracked.
0008
The rampfunction generator is trakked.

Rampfunction generator tracking
means that there is an immediate
response to an opposing setpoint
change if the rampfunction generator is set too fast.
AM/1-10

fault and the pulses and controller
are
enabled.

04.97

Table 1-2
Number
P053
Change
effective
online
P051
4
Setting data
0...FFFF hex
Description
Control word
Bi
t
Value
0000
Faults are not influenced by a controller inhibit at terminal 65.
0020
Faults can be acknowledged by a

controller inhibit at terminal 65.
H
0000
The speed actual value is searched

for from the speed setpoint. If the
pulses are enabled with a stationary
motor or a motor rotating in the
opposite
direction of rotation, then optimal acceleration is not guaranteed.
0080
7
H
0000
0100
H
0000
2000
13
15
P090
online
0...FFFF hex
The speed actual value is searched

for from 0.
If the pulses are enabled with the
motor rotating, the motor is first braked
and accelerated from the openloop
controlled speed range to the speed
setpoint.
The field controller integral component is deleted for voltage limiting.
The voltage limiting might be able to
exited again.
The field controller integral component is not influenced for voltage
limiting. However, voltage limiting
cannot
be automatically exited, as the field
generating current is continuously
creased.
Type KTY84 motor temperature
sor acc. to IEC 134
PTC type motor temperature sensor
acc. to IEC 134; from FW 3.00
H
0000
Parameter numbers are cyclically

displayed on the LCD
8000
Parameter numbers are not

cyclically
displayed on the LCD; from FW 3.00
ControlH word
Bi
t
Value
0000
0001
Parameter display, hex format

Caution!
Parameter setting limits in the
format are ineffective!
Parameter display, decimal or
hexadecimal format

AM/1-11
AM

Table 1-2
12.94
Number
Change
effective
P051
0000
0004
0
H
3
0000
H
0008
H
P153
online
10
1...1 dec
Field weakening speed and stall torque to the DC link voltage, specified
by P061, is inhibited.
Field weakening speed and stall torque adaptation to the DC link
voltage
specified by P061 are enabled
(from
FW 2.00).
Speed controller clock, Standard
Speed controller clock, fast
When bit 3 is changed, this only becomes effective after saving in the
FEPROM and powering the supply
down/up; from FW 3.00
Calculate motor/controller data

Parameters are changed during the calculation
+1 equivalent circuit diagram data calculation
1 controller data calculation
The parameters are automatically reset after
culation.
AM
AM/1-12

1.4 Overview setting data
07.94
1.4
Overview setting data
c
M
M
M
P P P P P P P
P P P
B d
F
P
P P
a P
P P
E
B d
C
d
P
S
P P
P P P P P P P
AM
Ms
P P
R
P
G
P P
F p r
P P
M P T P I
P P P
P
P
!
?
F e r
M P
M P
!
P I
A PPP T PP
D
D
A
A
s P
S
P S P F P MP
5 1
S
X
Fig. 1-2
A A A A A A
E E E E E E E E E
X
A A
X X
Setting data

AM/1-13
07.94
1.5 Connections
1.5
Connections
X412
Input,
motor temperature
sensor from FW 3.00
X432
Input
BERO
from FW
3.003)
3)
Test sockets
DAU 3 X1
X2 DAU 4
IR
X421
56
14
24
8
Inputs
663
X431
65
81
E1
E2
E3
AM
A91
n1
A92
n22)
DAU 22)
Outputs
IF
RF
X441
HSS
2nd
Md limit1)
T
H = 01)
Reset1)
E4
Fixed set., bit 01)
E5
Fixed set., bit 11)
E6
E7
E8
Fixed set., bit 21)

E9
9

Enable voltage
289
Signals, center contact
A11
A21
Md < Mdx1)
A31 nact < nx1)

A41
A51 I2t alarm1)
A61 Rampup ended1)
672
Ready/fault
673
674
AS1
AS2
Signal. contact
Start inhibit
RS232C
Interface
X411
LCD display
+
X151
Equipment bus
P 600
X351
DC link
M 600
Type plate
Version
Motor terminals
U2
V2
W2
PE1
PE2
only for the analog setpoint interface option up to FW 2.x

Fig. 1-3
1)
2)
3)
Connections
Freelyprogrammable terminals and relay functions when supplied

Function not possible for MLFB (Order No.) 6SN11220BA110AA0
Only for MLFB (Order No.) 6SN11220BA110AA1; for boards with MLFB (Order No.) 6SN11210BA1 0AA0
it is not permissible that this input is assigned
AM/1-14

07.94
2.1 Motor and drive converter data sets

Determining and setting the

2.1
Overview
Warning
The motor could accelerate to inadmissibly high speeds and terminal 64
Central
drive inhibit) and Terminal 65 (controller inhibit) are not effective.
Only terminal 63 open (NE: Central pulse inhibit) and terminal 663 open
(axisspecific pulse inhibit) are then effective.
Motor and drive converter data sets
AM
initialization
DC link voltage sensing
motor data set
Speed ranges

AM/2-15

12.94
Initialization
Table 2-1
Initialization
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
P095
after
itialization
1...13 dec

Presetting: 7 from FW 3.0 presetting: 1)
3
Enter the power module code number
(refer to Section 6.2)
P096.M
after
itialization
0...7 dec
Motor code number

Presetting: 0 (do not change)
P097
online
0...1 hex
Initialization
SEtUP is displayed
The selected power section data set is loaded
in
the drivemachine data memory
P000 operating display appears after successful initialization
Sensing the
DC link voltage
A
M
Table 2-2
DC link voltage sensing
Number
P061
Change
effective
online
P051
10
Setting range
0...700 V
1) Power module with MLFB (Order No.) 6SN112 1A 0

It is then no longer possible to change P095.
AM/2-16
Description
Fixed DC link voltage

0
The DC link voltage is sensed
via NE and the equipment bus
Can be identified at: P061 = 0
Parameter (P006) indicates the DC link
voltage value.
1...700 The actual DC link voltage is entered
when a monitoring module is used
without voltage sensing.
A1 is automatically identified with/from FW 3.00.

07.94

Motor data set
Table 2-3
For special motors, the motor data must be entered. The controllers can then be
subsequently optimized using the selfsetting routing according to Section 4.
Motor data set
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
P158.M
online
10
0.000...65.000
mH
P159.M
online
10
0.0...6535.5
gm
P219.M
online
10
0...15
kgm
P160.M
online
10
0.00...650.00 kW
P161.M
online
10
0.00...650.00 A
1)
Rated motor
Rated current for S1 duty
or configuration
P162.M
online
10
0.00...650.00 V
Rated motor voltage

1)
Rating plate
data
or configuration
P163.M
online
10
0...65000 RPM
P164.M
online
10
0...1200.0 Hz
P166.M
online
10
P167.M
online
10
0. rated pwr.
..I section
0.000...65.000
Inductance of the series reactor

Used for motors
m > 150 Hz
with f
a
Moment of inertia, motor
and external
applicationspecific
Total moment of inertia referred to the motor shaft
The motor moment of inertia is calculated using P
153
= +1
The total moment of inertia is set using
P204 =5 and P205 = +1
Additional moment of inertia
The parameterized value is internally added to
P159.M.
It is only necessary to enter into P219.M when the
setting range, P159.M, is exceeded.
(from FW 2.00)
1)
Rated motor
Rated output for S1 duty
For forcevent. motors, refer to the following information
AM
1)
Rated motor
Asynchronous speed at rated frequency and rated
load r
60 s/min)/p
ra
n
< te
a
1)
Rated motor
f r
p/(60 s/min)
ra
> te
a
Noload
motor current
equiv. cct. dia val
Calculated using P153 = +1
Adjusted using P204 = 3 and P205 = +1
Motor stator resistance, cold

equivalent circuit
diagram value
P168.M
online
10
0.000...65.000
Motor rotor resistance, cold Equivalent circuit

diagram value
P169.M
online
10
0.000...65.000
Stator leakage reactance

P170.M
online
10
0.000...65.000
equivalent circuit
diagram value
Rotor leakage reactance

equivalent circuit diagram value

AM/2-17

Table 2-3
07.94
Motor data set
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
P171.M
online
10
0.00...650.00
Main field reactanceEquivalent circuit diagram value

P172.M
online
10
0...32000 RPM
Changeover speed, closedloop/openloop control

P173.M
online
10
0...32000 RPM

For operation from an uncontrolled infeed and
FW<2.00, the calculated value must be multiplied by
the factor su
/500V) (corresponds to 0.8 for
pp
V(Vsu
=400V).
pp FW 2.00 onwards, the closedloop control
From
algorithm is automatically adapted to the DC link voltage
(P006).
Automatic adaptation can be disabled by resetting bit
2
in P090.
P174.M
online
10
0...32000 RPM
1)
Maximum motor
To optimize the noload current
Input m
( rat 60 s/min)/p, otherwise F60
n
ed
(p=poleaxpair fnumber)
P175.M
online
10
0.0...500.0 min
P176.M
online
10
0...32000 RPM
Motor thermal time

constant
Stall torque speed
P178.M
online
10
0.000...1.000
Power factor cos 1)
P018.M
online
10
4.00...100.00 ms
Initial roundingoff
For motors with deepbar squirrelcage rotors:
Increase parameter to approx. 30 ms
P036.M
online
10
AM
0...7 hex
1) 2)

FW<2.00, the calculated value must be multiplied by
the factor su
/
V(Vsu
=400V).
pp
50
pp FW 2.00 onwards, the closedloop control
From
algorithm is automatically adapted to the DC link voltage
(P006).
Automatic adaptation can be disabled by resetting bit
2
in P090.

The current controller dynamic performance is improved by increasing the clock frequency, however, it reduces the permissible continuous current load
lity. The clock frequency, especially for highspeed
motors, should be selected as high as possible but
the
power reduction should be maintained.
If the clock frequency is changed, then the current
controller must be reoptimized.
1) Manufacturers data according to VDE 0530, Part 1

2
2) Only when the motor temperature simulation function for relay function 5 is used (I t alarm)
AM/2-18

07.94

Number
Change
effective
P051
P153
online
10
1...1 dec
Calculation, equivalent circuit diagram data of the

actual motor
+1 entered for pulse inhibit, term. 63 or term. 663.
started.
P153
online
10
1...1 dec
Calculation, controller data of the actual motor

1 entry for pulse inhibit, term. 63 or term. 663.
started.
For highspeed motors, increase the speed limiting P029 = 6000 RPM to maximum speed.
Note
The motor configuration should be selected, so that neither the required
nal voltage exceeds the maximum converter output voltage, nor that the
tion motor module is operated
<
(refer to
rated
cont.
ples 1 and 2).
0.1 I module
exammotor
Example 1
If a motor, with Vrated 230 V /400 V is operated from an uncontrolled infeed
module in a circuit configuration, then the motor does not have the same output as when operated from an uncontrolled I/R module with VDC link = 600V /
625 V from a 400 V supply due to the reduced speed at the start of field weakening (P173) and the lower stall torque speed (P176).
If the motor is changedover to the delta configuration, then this can achieve
the full rated output when connected to a converter dimensioned for I
n motor
Example 2
If a motor is to be operated at rated current in a circuit configuration
Irated motor < 0.1 cont.
I module , this can be adapted to the induction motor module
using the circuit, if the following is valid:
I rated
motor
0.1 cont.
I module


AM/2-19
07.94
AM
Note
If only S6duty values are specified in the rating plate data, then these
be converted to S1duty for parameterization, and the limits increased after
optimization. For forcecooled motors, the rating plate data for
tion should be converted to data for S1duty of a motor with natural air
ing having the same size, and the limits increased after optimization.
Conversion, rating plate data

determine the noload
, refer to Section 4
current I
determine the rated current for S1
=
rate
duty: I
(2...2.5)
I
d S1
determine the rated output for S1 duty: rated
rated
P
S1
startup using S1 values and optimize with

limits 100 %
S6
rated
S1
rated
increase the limits for S6 duty and for forceventilated operation.
AM
AM/2-20
07.94


Speed ranges
Table 2-4
Speed ranges
AM/2-21
Numbe
Chang
effective
P051
P172.M
online
10
0...32000 RPM
Changeover speed, closedloop/openloop control

Start of the closedloop controlled speed range
Above this speed and hysteresis, the speed is
led according to the calculated speed actual value.
P173.M
online
10
0...32000 RPM

Start of the field weakening range
The converter output voltage and frequency are no
longer changed in proportion to one another above
this
speed.
P176.M
online
10
0...65535 RPM
Stall torque speed

Start of derating
The output in fieldweakening operation is reduced
above this speed in order to prevent the motor
stalling.
P
U
Y
M
P
F
rate
d
n ch
n rat
n sta
n FS
r
rat
at
M ed
n m
output characteristic
voltage characteristic
flux characteristic
torque characteristic
changeover speed, open/
closedloop control
rated speed
stall torque speed
speed at the start of
field weakening
max.motor speed
ax
F
P n F
0 c n
n st
ra
M
n
all
S
te
The torque and output
limits can be modified with
factor Franges are obtained:
speed
|n|
c
n
h
n c
|n|
/ M
rat
n
F F
h
ed
n rat
/ M < |n|
s
F F n
ed
t
|n| > F
n
S
n s < |n|
m
<n
t
ax
n max
M
Motor speed n
(parameters P039, P041 )

or F
openloop controlled speed range

constant torque range
constant output range
fieldweakening range
stall power range, maximum output voltage range

(P060). The
following
AM
2.2 Standard applications

12.94
2.2
2.2.1
Operating display
Table 2-5
The actual drive converter operating status is displayed in P000 and P100.
Operating display
Display
Function group
Motor number
motor 1
is selected
motor 2
is selected
Relay function
freelyprog. relay function 1
terminal A11

terminal A21
|
motor 3
is selected
motor 4
is selected
= nset1)
| < Mdx1)
M
terminal A31
P243
|n a | < nmin1)
Operating
mode
Equipment status
Setpoint source
pulse enable
the NE module
missing
(T.63/T.48)
analog setp.
ch. 1 P113=1
ch. 2 P113=2
ch. 1+2 P113=3
drive not enabled:

Progress condition, refer to
the converter
status
column
all enable
signals present:
Openloop or
closedloop
controlled
operation
controller enable missing at

the NE module
(T.64) and/or
controller enable missing at
the IM module
(T.65)
AM
1...4
Selected via
freely
programmable
terminal functions
P081...P089
=20, 21
lay function 4
terminal A41
|n
| < nx1)

terminal A51
P245
1)
I t
ala
rm
terminal A61
P246
rampup end 1)
e
d
ready/
fault
terminals 672
674 P053
to
rea 1)
dy
The segment is lit,
the appropriate
if
relaypulledin.
has
..
RFG enable
missing (t.81)
freelyprog. reMotor selection
analog setp.+
fixed setpoint
ch. 1 + freely
prog. terminal
function 17, 18,
19, 24 P113=9
zero setp.
P113=0
P113=7
P113=8
axisspecific
pulse enable
missing
(T.663)
setpoint
enable
missing
(select
terminal,
fct.
No.
1
6
erating
modefor
play
enabled
t
motor operation
i
generator operation
Speed
ler clock, fast
Clock is
active
control-
S
p
P
=
s
P
P
fixed
1...7
fixed
.
.
8...15
.
lec. via freely
ogr. term. fct.
081...P089
7, 18, 19, 24
eed setting with
114.1...7,f
119.1...8
setpoint from the
mot.. pot. fct.
P113=6
P114.8 speed or
P081.P089=14,
15
setp. from
oscillation
gen.
P113=4 or
P081...P
P154, P155
speeds P156,
P157 times
setp. from self
opt. SW
P204=1...6
P205=1
Gearbox stage
gearbox
1
is selected
gearbox
is selected
stage 2
gearbox
3 is selected
gearbox
4 is selected
gearbox
is selected
gearbox
6 is selected
gearbox
is selected
stage 7
gearbox
is selected
Gearbox stages
1...8
selected via
freelyprogrammable terminal
function
P081...P089
=9, 10, 11
1) As supplied
AM/2-22

07.94
2.2.2 Firmware version

2.2.2
Firmware version
Table 2-6
Firmware version
Change
effective
Number
(P099)
2.2.3
P051
0.00...99.99
Firmware release
Indicates the release of the firmware which has been loaded.
Setting parameters for standard applications
Overview
speed settings
maximum speed monitoring via BERO
torque limits
motor temperature monitoring
motor temperature simulation
reciprocation
A
M
Speed setting value

Table 2-7
speed settings
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
P022.M
online
10
2...16000 RPM

The drive is switched into a nocurrent state when
the controller is inhibited and the shutdown speed
is
fallen below (the drive is shutdown without overshoot).
P029.G
online
10
0...32000 RPM
Speed limiting
The actual motor speed is limited to the limit of the
current gearbox stage.
Selected using freelyprogrammable terminal function 9, 10, 11.
Maximum speed
monitoring via
BERO
A BERO switch can be connected via X432 to monitor the maximum speed.
When the threshold is exceeded, the pulses are canceled and fault message
F90 is output.
FW 3

AM/2-23
07.94
2.2.3 Setting parameters for standard application

Cable interruption
monitoring
If BERO pulses are not received for a calculated speed greater than 1200 RPM/
pulse number, then it can be assumed that the cable is interrupted. F90 is also
output.
Table 2-8
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
P131.M
online
10
0...10 1 RPM
Pulse number, BERO speed monitoring

The speed monitoring is active for a value of zero.
P132.M
online
10
0...65535 RPM
Shutdown threshold, BERO speed monitoring
Torque limits
Table 2-9
Torque limits
Number
AM
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
P039.G
online
10
0...399 %
1st torque limit

The torque is limited to the set percentage of the
ted torque of the actual motor.
P041.G
online
10
0...399 %
2nd torque limit

The torque is limited to the set percentage of the
rated torque of the actual motor. The 2nd torque limit
is
selected using a freelyprogrammable terminal with
terminal function 1 and speed greater than P050,
changeover speed d
d2
M
to
1
Motor temperature
monitoring
A motor temperature sensor can be connected at X412.

(from FW 3.00)
Temperature sensor types

Can be selected between
KTY84: The measured resistance is converted into a temperature. The maximum permissible temperature can be parameterized.
PTC: Resistance values which are measured to be less than 1330 Ohms
are considered to be permissible, resistance values greater than 1330
Ohms should be interpreted as an overtemperature condition.
Alarm and shutdown characteristics
After approx. 1s: Relay alarm, motor overtemperature

after a time in P065: Pulse cancellation and error message F14
AM/2-24

07.94

Sensor cable interrupted and shortcircuit
KTY84: Temperatures which are measured below approx. 0 degrees C or

above approx. 200 degrees C cause pulses to be canceled and a fault message, F19
PTC: Interrupted sensor cable and shortcircuit are not identified.
Table 2-10
Number
Change
effective
P051
P053.M
online
10
0...FFFFhex
P063.M
online
10
0...170 degrees C
P064.M
online
10
0...170 degrees C
P065.M
online
10
Control word
Bit value
13
KTY84 motor temperature sensor
0000H
2000 PTC motor temperature sensor
H
Max. motor temperature
only effective for KTY84. The shutdown threshold
cannot be parameterized for PTC.
Fixed temperature
The motor temperature monitoring is activated by
entering the value zero.
0...600 s
Timer stage, motor temperature alarm
Motor temperature
simulation
Table 2-11
Number
P175.M
A
M
Motor temperature simulation
Change
effective
online
P051
10
Setting range
0.0...500 min
Description
Thermal motor time constant

For freelyprogrammable relay function 5
I t monitoring
Note
A temperature model is calculated for every motor parameter set.
However, quantities such as fan effect and air intake temperature cannot be
taken into account. Thus, it is preferable if the temperature is monitored
motor temperature sensor.

AM/2-25

07.94
Oscillation mode
Table 2-12
Reciprocation
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
P154
online
10
32000...32000
RPM
P155
online
10
32000...32000
RPM
P156
online
10
0.002...60 s
P157
online
10
0.002...60 s

Selected using a freelyprogrammable terminal
tion 2 or P113=4
Speed [RPM]
P154
P155
P156
P157
Time [s]
A
M
AM/2-26

07.94
2.3 Multimotor operation

2.3
Multimotor operation
The following applications can be combined with one another:
parallel operation
parameter set changeover
motor changeover
Motor selection
Table 2-13
Motor selection
Number
Change
effective
online
P056
P051
10
0...4
Motor selection
The actual motor is selected
0
selected via freelyprogrammable terminal
function 20, 21.
1...4 motor 1...4 active
Note
If P053, bit 1 = 0, then changeover is only realized after the pulses have
canceled.
2.3.1
Parallel operation
Several motors can be operated simultaneously from one induction motor module. The motors are supplied with the same voltage and frequency as they are
fed in parallel. Thus, the motors must have the same voltagefrequency characteristic, i. e., the ratios of rated voltage to rated frequency of the individual motors must be the same. If different motor types are used, an output ratio of 1 : 10
should not be exceeded.
If the motors, connected in parallel, have the same pole pair number, then they
rotate at approximately the same speed.
Warning
With different loads, the speeds differ by the slip speed differences, i. e., an
individual motor can have a different speed than the calculated speed of the
complete system, and can exceed a set speed limit.

AM/2-27
AM
2.3.1 Parallel operation

07.94
The tendency to stall is higher in parallel operation than in singlemotor operation. In order to be able to correct load surges, it is recommended that the current limit P059 is set to 150 % of the total current. If a steadystate rated torque is required in the lower speed range, P057 should also be increased
(current in the openloop controlled range). The induction motor module should
be dimensioned for this current rating and it should be ensured that the motors
are adequately cooled.
In parallel operation, the total current can only be sensed, which is subdivided
between the individual motors, depending on the load. Thus, these should be
externally and individually thermally monitored. If a monitoring function responds, it is not permissible that the power cables are interrupted before pulse
cancellation.
For highspeed special motors (fmax > 150 Hz), it is recommended that a reactor is switched between the induction motor module and the motor group.
Pulse enable
SIMODRIVE 611A
analog system,
induction motor
module
T. 663
U2 V2 W2
1)
AM
M1
3~
Motor 1
M2
3~
Motor 2
M3
3~
Motor 3
M8
3
Motor 8
1) Only required for special highspeed motors

Fig. 2-1
AM/2-28
Parallel operation from the SIMODRIVE 611A analog system, induction motor
module

07.94

The motor data must be entered as follows for parallel operation:

Table 2-14
Parallel operation
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
P158.M
online
10
0.000...65.000
mH
P160.M
online
10
0.00...650.00 kW
P161.M
online
10
0.00...650.00 A
P162.M
online
10
0.00...650.00 V
P163.M
online
10
0...65000 RPM
Description
Series reactor inductance

Used for motors
m > 150 Hz.
with f
a
1)
Rated motor
Sum of the rated outputs for S1 duty
ra
rated total
=
P
te
1)
Rated
motor
Sum of the rated currents for S1 duty
rated i
I
1)
Rated motor
Rated voltage of the common V/f characteristic
Circuit configuration, Y or
1)
Rated motor
Outputweighted average value of the rated speed
P rated
i
P rated
P164.M
online
10
0...1200.0 Hz
P174.M
online
10
0...32000 RPM
P178.M
online
10
0.000...1.000
total
Asynchrono
us
load
r
n
<
Rateda
Rated
f frequen
r
r
> a
a
Max.
motor
Lowest max.
s
the
maximum
To
optimize
nthm (f r
6
a
at
(p=pole
pair
n
Power
Current
weigh
I rated
i
rated
P018.M
online
10
P036.M
online
10
4.0...100.00 ms
0...7 hex
rated i
speed at rated frequency and rated

60 s/min)/p
t
e
1)
equen
y of the common V/f characteristic
/(60 s/min)
eed
manufacturers data
eed of the motor group reduced by
lip difference.
noload current, enter
s/min)/p, otherwise F60
mber)
os 1)
ed average power factor value
cos
total
Initial roundingoff
applicationspecific
For motors with deepbar squirrelcage rotors:
Increase parameter to approx. 30 ms
The current controller dynamic performance is
improved when the switching frequency is increased, however the permissible continuous current load
capability is reduced.
The switching frequency should be selected as
high
as possible, especially for highspeed motors, but
still maintaining the specified derating.
The current controller must be reoptimized if the
switching frequency is changed.
1) Manufacturers data according to VDE 0530, Part 1

AM/2-29
AM

07.94
Number
AM
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
2
Description
P159.M
online
10
0.0...6535.5
gm
P219.M
online
10
0...15
kgm
P166.M
online
10
0. rated pwr.
..I section
P167.M
online
10
0.000...65.000
Motor stator resistance, cold

P168.M
online
10
0.000...65.000
Motor rotor resistance, cold

P169.M
online
10
0.000...65.000
Stator leakage reactance

P170.M
online
10
0.000...65.000
Rotor leakage reactance

P171.M
online
10
0.00...650.00
Main field reactance

Adjusted using P204 = 4 and P 205 = +1
P175.M
online
10
0.0...500.0 min
Thermal motor time constant
P172.M
online
10
0...32000 RPM
Changeover speed, open/closedloop control

AM/2-30
Motor and external moment of inertia

applicationspecific
Total moment of inertia referred to the motor shaft
Calculation, motor moment of inertia using P153 =
+1
Adjustment, total moment of inertia using P204 =
5
and P205 = +1
P159.M. It is only necessary to enter P219.M if
setting range of P159.M is exceeded.
Motor noload current
manufacturers
data
Lowest time constant of the motor
group
External individual monitoring is recommended.
refer to Section 2.2.3

07.94

Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
P173.M
online
10
0...32000 RPM

FW<2.00, the calculated value must be multiplied
by
the factor su /500V) (corresponds to 0.8 for
pp
V(Vsu
=400V).
pp FW 2.00 onwards, the closedloop control alFrom
gorithm is automatically adapted to the DC link voltage (P006).
The automatic adaptation can be disabled by resetting bit 2 in P090.
P176.M
online
10
0...32000 RPM
Stall torque speed

FW<2.00, the calculated value must be multiplied
by
the factor su /
V su
=400V).
pp
pp FW 2.00 onwards, the closedloop control alFrom
gorithm is automatically adapted to the DC link voltage (P006).
Automatic adaptation can be disabled by resetting
bit
2 in P090.
AM

2.3.2 Parameter set changeover

AM/2-31
07.94
2.3.2
Parameter set changeover

The induction motor module allows four complete motor data sets to be simultaneously setup. The actual data set can be selected via freelyprogrammable
terminals (refer to Section 3.3.2) or via parameter P056. If various parameter
sets have to be loaded in the induction motor module, this function can be used
for parameter set changeover. The currently valid motor data set is displayed in
the first position at the left in the operating display (P000, P100).
If bit 1 = 1 in parameter P053, the motor data sets are changedover, even
when the pulses are enabled. This can be used to adapt motor and controller
data.
2.3.3
Motor changeover
The induction motor module allows four complete motor data sets to be simultaneously setup. The current data set can be selected via freelyprogrammable
terminals (refer to Section 3.2.2) or via parameter P056. There are freelyprogrammable relay functions for the four motor data sets (refer to Section 3.3.1),
which indicate which data set is active.
If various motors are to be operated from the induction motor module, one after
another, then this function can be used for motor changeover.
In this case, bit 1 should be set to 0 in parameter P053. Thus, after a motor
changeover request, the motor data are first changedover, when the induction
motor module pulses are inhibited (refer to Section 1.3). The user can decide
which of the enable terminals is used for pulse inhibit. The pulse inhibit is
latchedin for approx. 20 ms during the changeover operation.
This latch is then canceled and the relay motor ... active of the newly loaded
motor, pullsin. This relay signal can be used to control a contactor for motor
changeover. The currently valid motor data set is displayed in the first position
at the left in the operating display (P000,KP100).
K
AM
A recommended circuit for the contactor control to changeover a motor is

shown in the following diagram. In this case, the freelyprogrammable terminal
Em is assigned terminal function 20 motor selection bit 0 and En with terminal
function 21 motor selection bit 1 and the freelyprogrammable relay outputs
Aw, Ax, Ay, Az, with relay functions 11, 12, 13, 14 motor 1, 2, 3, 4 active. The
mutual relay interlocking is implemented
using the induction
motor module softK3
K4
ware, but the recommended contactor interlocking guarantees, that not more
than one motor is connected to the converter even if parameterization errors
have been made.
1H
2H
3
2
3
Motor 3

AM/2-32
K
1H
2H
4H
07.94
2.3.3 Motor changeover

K1
Pulse enable
4
1
2
0
T.K663
K
K
3K2 4
01K311
4
3En
Em
analog system
K
IM module
P053 bit 1 = 0
SIMODRIVE 611
3
3H
2
K
K1
K4
4H
Relay outputs
3
Aw
Ax
Az
Ay
K
K 321
Motor
4
3 AM/2-33
AM
K4
Select terminal input
Motor selection
Bit 0
Bit 1
0
U2 V2 W2
1)
K1
3H
K2
K
M1
M2
K
K
K
Motor 1
1)
Fig. 2-2
Motor 2
Only required for special highspeed motors
Motor changeover

M3
M4
2.4 Operating motors at maximum speeds > 32000 RPM

2.4
12.94
Operating motors at maximum speeds > 32000 RPM
!
Pulse number
P131
Parameter
settings
Warning
All parameters which physically represent a speed with the units RPM, as
as the BERO pulse number P131, are entered or displayed decreased by a
factor as follows:
Motor speed
Factor
32000...64000 RPM
1/2
> 64000 RPM
1/3
In order to be able to operate motors with a maximum motor speed > 32000
RPM, settings must be made according to Table 213.
AM
AM/2-34

07.94
2.4 Operating motors at maximum speeds > 32000 RPM

Table 2-15
Number
P163.M
P174.M
P153
Change
effective
online
online
online
P051
Setting range
10
0...64000 RPM
10
10
0...64000 RPM
1 ... 1 dec
Description
1)
Rated motor
Asynchronous speed at rated frequency and rated load
n r
60 s/min)/p
ra
< te
a motor
speed
Input
32000...64000 RPM
Rated motor speed / 2
> 64000 RPM
Rated motor speed / 3
Max. motor
speed
motor speed
1)
Max. motor speed / 2
> 64000 RPM
Max. motor speed / 3
Calculating the equivalent circuit diagram data of the current motor

+1 input for pulse inhibit, terminal 63 or terminal 663
The calculations for the entered special motor are started.
The following equivalent circuit diagram data are calculated:
motor speed
P153
online
10
1 ... 1 dec
Input
32000...64000 RPM
Equivalent circuit diagram data
32000...64000 RPM
P159: Motor and external

of inertia 4
> 64000 RPM
P159: Motor and external

moment
of inertia 9
Calculating the controller data of the current motor

1 input for pulse inhibit, terminal 63 or terminal 663
The calculations for the entered special motor are started.
The following controller data are calculated:
motor speed
32000...64000 RPM
> 64000 RPM
Controller data
P114: Speed for the
max. useful motor speed 1/2
P029: Speed limiting 1/2
P172: Changeover speed,
open/closedloop control 1/2
P173:Speed at start of
field weakening 1/2
P176:
Stall torque speed 1/2
P114: Speed for
max. motor useful speed 1/3
P029: Speed limiting 1/3
P172: Changeover speed,
open/closedloop control 1/3
P173: Speed at start of
field weakening 1/3
P176:
Stall torque speed 1/3
If speed setting values with units of RPM are manually entered, all values must
be multiplied by factors 1/2 or 1/3.
1)
Manufacturers data according to VDE 0530, Part 1

AM/2-35
AM
2.5 Monitor function

2.5
07.94
Monitor function
Address contents (data in the RAM area) of the induction motor module can be
read via parameters P249 to P251.
Note
A list of important measurement quantities (RAM variables) and their
are provided in the Appendix (Section 6.5).
Table 2-16
Monitor function
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
P249
online
10
0...FFFF hex
Segment, memory location monitor

Segment address of a RAM location
P250
online
10
0...FFFF hex
Address, memory location monitor

Offset address of a RAM location
(P251)
0...FFFF hex
Value display memory location, monitor

Contents of a RAM location
AM
AM/2-36

07.94
3.1 Speed setpoint interfaces


interfaces
3.1
Speed setpoint interfaces
Overview
speed setpoint channel selection

normalization, analog speed setpoint
fixed setpoints/motorized potentiometer setpoint
setpoint priority
Speed setpoint
channel selection
Table 3-1
Speed setpoint channel selection
Number
P113
Change
effective
online
P051
4
0...9 hex
Channel selection, speed setpoint

0H:
digital setpoint 0
1H:
analog setpoint, channel 1, terminal 56/14
2H:
analog setpoint, channel 2, terminal 24/8
3H:
analog setpoint, sum of channel 1 + channel

2,
terminal 56/14 + terminal 24/8
4H:
digital setpoint from the oscillation generator
6H:
digital setpoint from the electronic motorized
potentiometer
9H:
sum of the analog setpoint + fixed setpoint,

channel 1 + fixed setpoint from the freely
programmable terminal function 17, 18, 19,
24
(10)H: digital setpoint; is internally input from the
firmware during selfoptimization

AM/3-37

12.94
Normalization, analog
speed setpoint
Table 3-2
Number
A
M
Change
effective
P051
P014.M
online
P024
online
P015
online
P025
online
P019
online
Setting range
32000...32000
RPM
2...10 V
E000...2000 hex
2...10 V
E000...2000 hex
Description
Speed for maximum motor useful speed

Speed, which should be reached, at the analog
input
voltage in P024 (channel 1 active) and in P025
(channel 2 active).
P114 >0 = clockwise phase sequence for a
positive
speed setpoint
P114 < 0 = counter clockwise phase sequence for
a
positive speed setpoint
Normalization, setpoint channel 1
Analog speed setpoint voltage for P014
Offset correction, setpoint channel 1
E. g. positive correction value:002FH
negative correction value:
FF00H
Normalization, setpoint channel 2
Analog speed setpoint voltage for P014
Offset correction, setpoint channel 2
E. g. positive correction value:002FH
negative correction value:
FF00H
Fixed setpoints,
motorized potentiometer setpoint
Table 3-3
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
P114.F
online
32000...32000
RPM
Fixed setpoint 1 to 7
Adjustable speed setpoint
Selected via freelyprogrammable terminal function
17, 18, 19 (refer to Section 3.2.2).
P119.F
online
32000...32000
RPM
Fixed setpoint 8 to 15
Selectable speed setpoint
17, 18, 19, 24 (refer to Section 3.2.2)
from FW 2.00
P114.8
online
32000...32000
RPM
Motorized potentiometer setpoint

Adjustable speed setpoint
Set via freelyprogrammable terminal function 14,
15
(refer to Section 3.2.2).
AM/3-38

04.97

Setpoint priority
Table 3-4
Priority
Setpoint
Setpoint source
Selectable using
High
Low
I m =0
Effect
Desig.
T63 or
T663
Open
Pulse enable
inhibited
Motor coasts down in a nocurrent condition
n=0
T81
Open
Rampfunction
generator fast stop
Braking without rampdown time,

pulse enable or pulse inhibit
n=0
T64 or
T65
Open
Controller enable
inhibited
Braking with rampdown time, pulse inhibit
n=0
T.fct. 16
Open
Setpoint enable
inhibited
Braking with rampdown time, pulse enable
n min
n
P030
Value
entry
Min. steadystate
speed
Minimum speed, also for lower setpoint,

priority
P054
P055
Value
entry
Range suppression
No steadystate operation in the suppressed

speed range
n = +n/n
T.fct. 12
Act
ivated
Cw/ccw phase
sequence
Only one direction of rotation possible
n = P114.8
P113 = 6
Value
entry
Mot. pot. function
Increase/decrease setpoint
n1 = P154
n2 = P155
T.fct. 2
Con
trolled
oscillation
reciprocation
n1 = P
to
n7 = P114.7
n8 = P
to
n15 =
P119.8
T.fct. 17
T.fct. 18
T.fct. 19
T.fct. 24
Con
trolled
Fixed setpoint
Selected fixed speed
Standard
setpoint
source
P113
AM
Value
entry
Standard setpoint

Parameterized standard setpoint
AM/3-39
3.2.1 Permanentlywired terminal functions

07.94
3.2
Input terminals
3.2.1
Warning
When the motor pulses are canceled, there is no information on the motor
speed. The calculated speed actual value is then set to 0. Thus, all of the
speed actual value signals, and relay signals, which monitor the speed a |
m , rampup
a
, a |
s ) no longer provide any
if the motor pulses have been canceled. The motor pulses can be canceled
removing the enable signals or with fault signals.
Warning
If a drive is shutdown using a rampfunction generator fast stop (terminal 81
open), and is kept at zero speed for a longer time with the inverter enabled,
then adequate motor cooling must be ensured, as a current is impressed in
motor which is approximately the rated current (percentage in P057).
Caution for selfventilated motors.
Table 3-5
AM
Terminal function
Description
Axisspecific
pulse enable
The inverter enable (motor gating) is realized, if terminal 663 (axisspecific

enable) and terminal 65 (controller enable) are at the enable voltage potential.
If terminal 663 (axisspecific pulse enable) is disconnected/disabled while the
motor is still rotating, the inverter is inhibited after 20 ms, and the motor coasts
down in a nocurrent condition.
Controller enable
If terminal 65 (controller enable) is disconnected/disabled while the motor is

rotating, the drive brakes along the braking ramp.
When the absolute value of
m threshold (P022) is fallen below, the
the isn inhibited and the motor is shutdown
i inver- without any overshoot.
ter
Ramp
function generator
fast stop
If terminal 81 (rampfunction generator fast stop) is energized, the speed

int is enabled. If the input is opencircuit, a digital setpoint of zero is entered.
If terminal 81 is disconnected/disabled while the motor is still rotating, the
brakes without the rampfunction generator along the effective limiting
characteristic (current limiting P057...P059, torque limiting P039, P041, power limiting P060).
Once zero speed has been reached, the current from P057 is still impressed.
If
bit 2 is set in P053, after the speed in P022 has been fallen below, the
pulses
are inhibited, and the motor is switched to a nocurrent condition.
Terminal
number
663
65
81
Note
To start a motor, the enable signals must be provided step by step in the sequence of their priority (refer to Table 3-5).
AM/3-40

07.94

3.2.2
Warning
It is only permissible to program terminal function parameters P081 to P
when the pulses are canceled (terminal 63 or terminal 663 open).
Overview
terminal function assignment

Terminal functions
Terminal function
assignment
Table 3-6
Number
P081
to
P089
Change
effective
online
P051
4
1...24 dec
Terminal function assignment E1 to E9

The assignment of functions 1 to 24 to terminals
E1E9 is realized by entering the function number.
to
The factory setting can be taken from the following
table.
AM

AM/3-41
07.94

Terminal
functions
Table 3-7
Terminal functions
Description
2nd torque limit
If this function is selected, the 2nd torque limit in P041 becomes active, if
changeover speed from P050 is exceeded.
Oscillation
If this function is selected, the oscillation generator speed setpoint from P

to P157 becomes active.
Reset fault memory (R) fault

acknowledgment
If this function is selected, a fault message is acknowledged when the

ler is inhibited (terminal 65 or terminal 663 opencircuit).
E1 (P081)
Rampup time
0
If this function is selected, the internal rampfunction generator is bypassed.
E1 (P081)
Gearbox stage
E1 (P081)
10
E1 (P081)
Bit
0
Bit
1
Bit
Clockwise/ 2
counter clockwise
AM
Fc Input termi.
nals, as
No supplied
.
1
E1 (P081)
Terminal
function
0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1
0 0 1 1
0 0 1 1
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
Using this terminal, a total of 8 binarycoded

tdf
set oint normalization, s eed monitoring, controller
setting,
torque limiting and torquemonitoring.
11
If this function is activated, only positive setpoints are permitted, negative

points result in speed n=0. If the appropriate terminal is energized, only a counterclockwise rotating field, otherwise a clockwise rotating field is output.
12
Rampfunction
generator 2
If this function is selected, the 2nd parameter set P042 and P043 of the
internal rampfunction generator is activated.
13
Increase
setpoint
Motorized potentiometer function P113=6

If one of these terminals is energized, the digital speed setpoint P114.8 of
the
motorized potentiometer function is increased or decreased
corresponding
to rampdown times of rampfunction generator 2
the
rampup and
(exception,
TH = 0). If both are energized simultaneously, the setpoint is changed
0.
14
If this function is activated, then the appropriate terminal must also be

zed
in order to move the drive. If the terminal is opened (deenergized), the
energidrive brakes with the appropriate deceleration time, and remains at standstill,
but with current flowing through it.
16
Decrease
setpoint
Setpoint enable
Fixed setpoint
selection
Bit
0
Bit
1
Bit
2
Bit
3
Motor selection
Bit
0
Bit
1
AM/3-42
0 1 0 1
0 1 0 1
0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 0 1 1
0 0 1
0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
1 1 1
0 1 0 1
0 0 1 1
A total of 15 binary
coded fixed values
P114.1 to P114.7
and P119.1 to
P119.8 can be selected using these
terminals. If all of
these terminals remain opencircuit,
setpoint, defined in
P113,
remains valid.
d
A t t l f 4 bi
dt
motor 4 can be selected using these terminals.
d
E1 (P081)
15
17
E1 (P081)
18
E1 (P081)
19
E1 (P081)
24
20
21

07.94
3.3
3.3.1
3.3 Output terminals

Output terminals
Warning
When the motor pulses are canceled, there is no information on the motor
speed. The calculated speed actual value is then set to 0. Thus, all of the
speed actual value signals, and relay signals, which monitor the speed a |
m , rampup
a
, a |
s ) no longer provide any
if the motor pulses have been canceled. The motor pulses can be canceled
removing the enable signals or with fault signals.
Caution
All relays dropout when the electronics power supply fails or is shutdown.

Table 3-8
Terminal
function
Description
Terminal
number
The relay function can be toggled using P053:

Ready/no
axis
fault
Bit
Value
0000H
0
0001H
Checkback
signal, start
inhibit
The relay pullsin, if no fault is

present, and the pulses and
controller
are
enabled.
The relay pullsin, if there is no fault
present.
The relay (NC contact) pullsin, if the enable voltage is

connected to terminal 663, axisspecific pulse enable.

672
673
674
AS1
AS2
AM/3-43
AM
07.94

3.3.2
Warning
It is only permissible to program the relays (P241 to 247) when the pulses
inhibited (terminal 63 or 663 open).
Overview
Assignment of the signals/messages
Relay functions
Signals which can be parameterized
Control word, signals
Note
The relay signals are updated with 20ms
for the standard speed controller clock.
For a fast speed controller clock with 10ms (refer to P090, bit 3, FW 3.00).
AM
Assignment of the
signals/messages
Table 3-9
Assignment of the signals/messages
Number
P241
to
P246
AM/3-44
Change
effective
online
P051
4
1...20 dec
Programmable messages 1 to 6
Functions 1 to 20 are assigned to relay outputs A11
to A61 by entering the function number. The factory
setting can be taken from the following table.

04.97

Relay functions
Table 3-10
Relay functions
Relay function
Description
Funct.
No.
Relay output,
as supplied
| a |
min
n
<
n comRampup
pleted
The relay pullsin, if the calculated speed falls below the current value set in
P021.1 to P021.8.
A31 (P243)
The relay pullsin if, after the setpoint jump, the calculated speed actual
enters the actual tolerance
bandwidth around the new setpoint, and has remained within this tolerance
bandwidth for at least 200 ms.
If the tolerance bandwidth is exited before the 200ms has expired, the acceleration ended relay remains inactive.
The tolerance bandwidth is set via P027.1 to P027.8.
The signal is interlocked (latched) in the activated setting, until the speed setpoint changes.
If the tolerance bandwidth is exited after 200 ms, the signal remains active,
unless, the setpoint has, in the meantime, changed.
The relay does not dropout as a result of speed
fluctuations due to load changes.
A61 (P246)
The relay pullsin, if the torque falls below the actual limit value.
The limit value is set via P047.1 to P047.8.
If the relay a = s dropsout during speed setpoint changes, the
| |
d relay can dropout only 800ms after the
a
s has
pulledin again.
c = e
The relay pullsin if the speed falls below the threshold. n
The setting is realized via P023.1 to P023.8.
n
The relay dropsout, if the actual thermal motor model is overloaded. The
mal time constant setting for each motor is separately realized in P175.1 to
P175.4.
The user is responsible in responding to this alarm.
The function of the fan and air intake temperature are not taken into account.
Thus, it is preferable if a temperature sensor is evaluated.
A21 (P242)
A41 (P244)
A51 (P245)
Drive converter
overtemperatur
alarm
The relay dropsout, if the main heatsink temperature monitoring responds.

If the overtemperature condition remains, the drive converter shuts down
approx. 20 s with the fault message F15.
Variable
relay function 1
Refer to the description of the variable relay functions.
Setting via P185 to P189 and via P190 to P194.
Reserved
Reserved
10
One of these relays pullsin if the appropriate motor data set is active. Using
this relay function, the external contactor can be controlled for motor changeover.
It is recommended that the contactor
pulse enable are mutually interlocked.
11
12
13
14
The relay dropsout when the motor temperature is too high. If the fault
tion remains, the drive converter shuts down after the time, set in P065, with
the fault message F14.
From FW 3.00
16
The relay pullsin, if the calculated speed actual value enters the tolerance
bandwidth around the setpoint before the rampfunction generator and has
remained in this tolerance bandwidth for at least 200 ms.
The tolerance bandwidth is set using P027.1 to P027.8 .
If the tolerance bandwidth is exited, the relay a
s immediately
out.
= e drops
c
The relay dropsout as a result of speed fluctuations due to load changes.
20
| |
M <
M
dx
|n a |
x
<
n
I
talarm
Variable
relay function 2
Motor 1 active
Motor 2 active
Motor 3 active
Motor 4 active
Motor
overtemperature
alarm
n a
=
n
set

AM
A11 (P241)
AM/3-45

07.94
Messages which
can be parameterized
Table 3-11
Signals which can be parameterized
Change
effective
Number
P051
Setting range
Description
n m for a < m signal

Response value for a freelyprogrammable relay
signal
a
m
1
n
n for a < signal
Response value for a freelyprogrammable relay
signal
a
4
<
Tolerance bandwidth for s = a signal
Tolerance for freelyprogrammable
e
crelay signal 1
rampup completed and for freelyprogrammable
relay signal 20 s
a
n
=
c
M d for
de signal
Response value for freelyprogrammable relay signal 3
d
M setting< refers
x to the actual torque limit.
The
P021.G
online
2...16000 RPM
P023.G
online
0...32000 RPM
P027.G
online
0...29000 RPM
P047.G
online
0...100 %
Control word
messages
A
M
Table 3-12
Number
P247
Change
effective
online
P051
4
0...FFFF hex

Every relay signal can be individually and independently inverted by setting the appropriate bit.
AM/3-46
Bi
t0
Value
0001H
Relay function, terminal A11 is

inverted
0002H

inverted
0004H

inverted
0008H

inverted
0010H

inverted
0020H

inverted

07.94
3.3.3 Variable relay function

3.3.3
Table 3-13
Number
Change
effective
P051
P185
to
P189
P185
online
0...FFFF hex
P186
online
0...FFFF hex
P187
online
0.00...10.00 s
P188
online
0.00...10.00 s
P189
online
0...7FFF hex
Hysteresis for threshold P186
P190
to
P194
P190
online
0...FFFF hex
P191
online
0...FFFF hex
P192
online
0.00...10.00 s
P193
online
0.00...10.00 s
P194
online
0...7FFF hex
Hysteresis for threshold P191
P247
online
0...FFFF hex

Bi
t
8
0000H

sign interrogation
0100H

0000H

sign interrogation
0200H



0000H

P186 as threshold
1000H

test.
The threshold (P186) is ANDed
with the RAM variables to be monitored (P185).
0000H

P191 as threshold
12
13
AM
Value
2000H

test
AM/3-47
07.94
Note
A list of important measured quantities (RAM variables) and their addresses
are listed in the Appendix (Section 6.5).
3.3.4
Analog outputs
Note
Analog outputs are not possible for MLFB (Order No.) 6SN11220BA11
0AA0.
Overview
Function
technical data
Parameterization, DAU 1, DAU 2
connection for analog displays
Function
Analog output of RAM variables for measurement purposes via two 8bit
D/A converters.
AM
Note
A list of important measured quantities (RAM variables) and their addresses
are listed in the Appendix (Section 6.5).
Technical data
2 output channels at terminal A91 (DAU 1) and terminal A92 (DAU 2)

10 V voltage range
rough and fine normalization, offset compensation
output voltage polarity can be set via the fine normalization ( 1000 %)
AM/3-48
07.94


Parameterization
DAU 1, DAU 2
Table 3-14
Parameterization, DAU 1, DAU 2
AM/3-49
P051
Setting range
Description
Number
Change
effective
P066
online
0...FFFF hex
Address, DAU 1
Address of the RAM variables which are to be output at DAU 1.
Presetting: 11B6H absolute calculated speed actual value
P067
online
0...F hex
Shift factor, DAU 1

Rough normalization of the selected data value by
shifting the binary number to the left.
Shift to the left by 1 = multiplication by 2
Max. gain: 32768
P012
online
1000.0...1000.0
%
Normalization, DAU 1
Fine normalization of the selected data value
P078
online
127...127 dec
Offset, DAU 1
P068
online
0...FFFF hex
Address, DAU 2
Presetting: 11B8H utilization
P069
online
0...F hex
P013
online
P079
online
1000.0...1000.0
%127...127 dec
Shift factor, DAU 2

Offset, DAU 2
AM
Output voltageV
1st overflow
2nd overflow
3. overflow
4. overflow
+10.0
10.0
0000
H
2000H
4000H
Shift factor = 0
Shift factor = 2
6000H
8000
H
A000H
Offset = 0
V

C000H
E00
0H
FFFFH
Hex numerical value

Connection for
analog displays
Table 3-15
07.94
Application: The following DAU assignment is used to connect unipolar display

instruments and the operating range is therefore limited to 0...+10 V without
overflow.
Connection for analog displays
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
P012
online
1000.0...1000.0
P066 =
display
a
For
P012 = 100 % and P067 = 0H, the following
11B6H
is
valid:
Standstill = 0 V
Max. speed (minimum from P029,
P174) = +10 V
1 V corresponds to 10 %
P013
online
1000.0...1000.0
P068 = 11B8H
utilization
Displays the utilization in the following ranges
Constant torque:
/ d
M
Mm
Constant
power:
a
P/P
(taking into account the
actual torque limits P039,
P041 and the current and power limits P059
and
P060)
For P013 = 100 % and P069 = 0H, the following
is
valid:
Noload = 0 V
Max. torque or power = + 10 V
1 V corresponds to 10 %
AM
Output voltage [V]
No overflow
+10.0
10.0
0000
H
2000H
4000H
Shift factor = 0
Shift factor = 2
AM/3-50
6000H
8000H
A000H
C00
0H
Offset = 0
V
E000
H
FFFFH
Hex numerical value

04.97
4 Controller optimization
Automatic functions can be selected to set important motor parameters. The

drive must be enabled.
Warning
During the automatic optimization runs, the motor is under voltage and can
reach its maximum speed. The optimization runs involved are identified with the
following symbol:
Note
When using an UE module, to reduce the regenerative power, the ramp
down
time P017 or P043 must be increased, until braking can be achieved from
maximum motor speed down to 0 without a fault message being issued (DC
link overvoltage).
AM
Table 4-1
Control optimization
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Optimization: Controller data of the actual motor with the drive enabled
Optimization, current controller, refer to Section 4.2
P204
online
P205
online
10
0...8 dec
Input 1 selection: current controller optimization
0...1 dec
Input 1, start optimization

Adjust power
P204
online
P205
online
10
1)
0...8 dec
offset
Input 2 selection: Power offset adjustment
0...1 dec
Input 1 start adjustment

Optimization, speed contr.,
ref. to Sec. 4.1 and Sec. 4.7
1)
P031
online
P032
online
0.0...255.9
10.0...6000.0 ms

Integral action time, speed controller
From FW 3.0 no longer necessary

AM/4-51
Table 4-1
Control optimization
Number
12.94
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Optimization, field controller, refer to Section 4.3

P034
online
0.0...600.0 A/V s
P035
online
5.0...600.0 ms
P gain, field controller

Integral action time, field controller
Adjustment, noload current
P204
online
P205
online
10
0...8 dec
Input 3 selection: Noload current adjustment
0...1 dec

Adjustment, main field reactance
P204
online
P205
online
0...8 dec
10
0...1 dec
Input 4 selection: Adjustment, main field reactance

Adjustment, field weakening speed
(from FW 2.00)
P204
online
P205
online
10
0...8 dec
Input 8 selection: Adjustment, field weakening speed
0...1 dec

Adjustment, total moment of inertia
P204
P205
online
online
10
0...8 dec
Input 5 selection: Adjustment, total moment of inertia
0...1 dec

Adjustment, rotor resistance
(not required for motors with deepbar
squirrelcage rotors)
AM
P204
P205
P204
online
online
online
P205
online
P052
online
AM/4-52
04.97
10
0...8 dec
Input 6 selection: Adjustment, rotor resistance
0...1 dec
0...8 dec
10
4
0...1 dec
0...1 hex
Calculate speed controller setting

(from FW 2.00)
Not required, if speed controller optimization was
executed
(refer above)
Input 7 selection: Speed controller setting calculation
Input 1 start calculation
Transfer parameters into FEPROM

Note
If the noload current adjustment with F60 is aborted, a possibly effective
speed limiting via the noload speed should be increased.
If the adjustment with F60 is aborted due to voltage limiting, the sequence
be repeated with a lower value in P166, or the DC link voltage can be
sed to 625 V (refer to the NE module).
Note
To adjust the total moment of inertia, the rampup time (accelerating time)
P016 and P042 should be set to the lowest possible value (preferably to
zero).
If the speed controller requires an integral action time P032 > 250 ms, then
the total moment of inertia adjustment must be manually executed according
Section 4.7.
To reduce the regenerative power in conjunction with a UE module, the
down time P017 and P043 can be increased.
Note
If the motor shaft rotates when optimizing the current controller, then the
mization point must be repeated by entering speed setpoint zero (e.g. using
terminal 81 HSS).
AM/4-53
4.1 Speed controller

4.1
Overview
12.94
Speed controller
AM
Total moment of inertia
Table 4-2
Number
AM
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Rampup time, rampfunction generator 1
(From n = 0 to m P174)
n
a
Rampdown time,
rampfunction generator 1
(From m P174 to n = 0)
n
a time, rampfunction generator 2
Rampup
(From n = 0 to m P174)
n
a
Rampdown time,
rampfunction generator 2
(From m P174 to n = 0)
n
a
Initial roundingoff
Torque setpoint smoothing
P016.M
online
0.00...320.00 s
P017.M
online
0.00...320.00 s
P042.M
online
0.00...320.00 s
P043.M
online
0.00...320.00 s
P018.M
online
4.00...100.00 ms
P053
online
0...FFFF hex
Control word
Bi
t
3
Speed
Rampfunction
generator output
Spee
Value
0000H
Rampfunction generator is not

tracked
0008H
Rampfunction generator is trakked

Speed
setpoint
Rampfunction
generator output
d
Speed
setpoint
Speed actual value
Speed actual value

Time [s]
Without rampfunction generator

tracking
AM/4-54
Time [s]
With rampfunction generator
tracking
07.94

Gain,
integral action
time
Table 4-3
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
P031.M
online
0.0...255.9
P032.M
online
10...6000 ms
Description

Speed controller integral action time
When calculating the controller data P153 = 1, the speed controller parameters are, among other parameters, defined.
In several cases, the control characteristics can still be improved (refer to Section 4.7)
Speed controller
adaptation
Table 4-4
The speed controller adaptation can be activated if another speed controller

P gain is required in the upper speed range.
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
AM
P195.M
online
0...32000 RPM
Lower adaptation speed
P196.M
online
0...32000 RPM
Upper adaptation speed
P197.M
online
0.0...255.9 dec
P gain, lower adaptation speed
P198.M
online
0.0...255.9 dec
P gain, upper adaptation speed
P199.M
online
1...150 %
P gain, reduction factor

(The P gain characteristic is multiplied over the
complete speed range)
P203.M
online
0...1 hex
Select, speed controller adaptation

0: No adaptation
P031 effective
1: Speed controller adaptation active
P031 ineffective
P gain [dec]
P197 P199
P198 P199
P195

P196
Speed [RPM]
AM/4-55
07.94

Speed controller
clock
Table 4-5
Number
Change
effective
P051
4
P090
Setting range
Description
0...FFFFHex
Control word
Bit
Word
0000H
0008H
Speed controller clock, Standard

Speed controller clock, fast
If bit 3 is changed, it only
becomes effective after saving in
the
FEPROM and poweringon
and
off.
Total moment of
inertia
Table 4-6
Total moment of inertia
Number
AM
Change
effective
P051
P159.M
online
0.0...6535.5
gm
P219.M
online
0...15
kgm
AM/4-56
Motor and external moment of inertia

Sum of the motor moment of inertia + external
moment
of inertia referred to the motor shaft
P159.M. Entry into P219.M is only required if the
setting range of P159.M is exceeded
(From FW 2.00)

04.97
4.2 Current controller

4.2
Current controller
Overview
Current controller optimization

Noload motor current
Current controller
!
Table 4-7
Warning
The module could be destroyed if the current controller P gain, P115 or P
is set too high.
If the inverter clock frequency is increased, then the power derating,
in Table 48 must be maintained.
Current controller optimization
Number
P036.M
(P037)
Change
effective
online
P051
4
0...3 hex
2.8...7.8 kHz


If the clock frequency is increased, the current controller dynamic performance is improved, however,
the permissible continuous current load capability is
reduced as a result of the switching losses.
If the clock frequency is changed, the current controller must reo timized.
0
3.2 kHz
4
2.8 kHz
1
4.7 kHz
3.9 kHz
2
3
6.3 kHz
6
7
5.0 kHz
7.8 kHz
5.9 kHz
Displays the actual inverter clock frequency
AM/4-57
AM
07.94

Table 4-8
Power
module
type
AM
Currents are dependent on the inverter clock frequency IM analog f
In / Is6 / Imax
in A
Order Nos.
In / Is6 / Imax
in A
In / Is6 / Imax
in A
In / Is6 / Imax
in A
6SN11231AA0
6SN11231AA0
6SN11231AA0
Code
8A
0HA
3/3/3
2.5 / 2.5 / 2.5
2/2/2
1.6 / 1.6 / 1.6
15 A
0AA
5/5/8
4.2 / 4.2 / 6.8
3.4 / 3.4 / 5.4
2.6 / 2.6 / 4.2
25 A
0BA
8 / 10 / 16
6.9 / 8.6 / 13.8
5.7 / 7.1 / 11.4
4.6 / 5.7 / 9.1
50 A
0CA
24 / 32 / 32
20 / 26 / 26
15 / 20 / 20
10 / 14 / 14
No.
:3.2kHz
:4.7kHz
:6.3kHz
:7.8kHz
80 A
0DA
30 / 40 / 51
26 / 34 / 44
21 / 28 / 36
17 / 23 / 29
108 A
0LA
13
45 / 60 / 76
39 / 52 / 65
32 / 43 / 54
26 / 34 / 43
120 A
0GA
45 / 60 / 76
39 / 52 / 65
32 / 43 / 54
26 / 34 / 43
160 A
0EA
60 / 80 / 102
51 / 68 / 86
41 / 54 / 69
31 / 42 / 53
200 A
0FA
10
85 / 110 / 127
73 / 95 / 109
60 / 78 / 90
48 / 63 / 72
300 A
0JA
11
120 / 150 / 193
101 / 127 / 163
81 / 102 / 131
62 / 78 / 101
400 A
0KA
12
200 / 250 / 257
169 / 211 / 217
Power
module
type
In / Is6 / Imax
in A
Order Nos.
6SN11231AA0
6SN11231AA0
6SN11231AA0
Code
No.
: 2.8 kHz
In / Is6 / Imax
in A
: 3.9 kHz
135 / 169 / 174
In / Is6 / Imax
in A
: 5.0 kHz
104 / 130 / 134
In / Is6 / Imax
in A
: 5.9 kHz
from FW3.00
8A
0HA
3/3/3
2.8 / 2.8 / 2.8
2.4 / 2.4 / 2.4
2.2 / 2.2 / 2.2
15 A
0AA
5/5/8
4.6 / 4.6 / 7.4
4.1 / 4.1 / 6.5
3.6 / 3.6 / 5.8
25 A
0BA
8 / 10 / 16
7.5 / 9.3 / 15
6.7 / 8.3 / 13.3
6 / 7.5 / 12
50 A
0CA
24 / 32 / 32
22 / 29 / 29
19 / 25 / 25
16 / 21 / 21
80 A
0DA
30 / 40 / 51
28 / 37 / 48
25 / 33 / 42
22 / 30 / 38
108 A
0LA
13
45 / 60 / 76
42 / 56 / 71
37 / 50 / 63
34 / 45 / 57
120 A
0GA
45 / 60 / 76
42 / 56 / 71
37 / 50 / 63
34 / 45 / 57
160 A
0EA
60 / 80 / 102
56 / 74 / 95
49 / 65 / 83
43 / 58 / 73
200 A
0FA
10
85 / 110 / 127
79 / 103 / 119
71 / 91 / 106
63 / 82 / 95
300 A
0JA
11
120 / 150 / 193
111 / 139 / 179
98 / 122 / 157
400 A
0KA
12
200 / 250 / 257
185 / 232 / 238
163 / 203 / 209
86 / 108 / 139
144 / 180 / 185
P115.M
online
0...255 dec
P gain, current controller, base speed range
P116.M
online
0...300 dec
P gain, current controller, fieldweakening range
P116.M
AM/4-58
255(255P115.M)
P173.M
P174.M

07.94

Noload motor
current
Table 4-9
Change
effective
Number
online
P166.M
4.3
P051
4
Setting range
0.00. rated LT
..I
Description

Freely rotating motor without load
Field controller
Gain,
integral action
time
Table 4-10
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
P034.M
online
0.0...600.0
100 A/Vs
Field controller P gain
P035.M
online
5.0...600.0 ms
Field controller integral action time
AM
When calculating the controller data P153 = 1, the field controller parameters
are, among other parameters, defined.
In several cases, the control behavior can be improved (refer to Section 4.7)

AM/4-59
4.4 Optimization openloop controlled range

4.4
07.94
Optimization openloop controlled range
Warning
If a drive is operated for a longer period of time in the openloop controlled
speed range, adequate motor cooling should be ensured, as a current is impressed in the motor which is approximately the rated current (percentage in
P057).
Table 4-11
Optimization, openloop controlled range
Number
Chan
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
P057.M
online
0...150 %
Current setpoint for the openloop controlled

range
Percentage of the rated motor current
Current setpoint for the currentfrequency control
(openloop)
P058.M
online
0...399 %
Accelerating torque in the controlled range

Percentage of the rated motor torque
P172.M
online
0...32000 RPM
Changeover speed, closed/openloop control

The changeover is realized with a 200 RPM
hysteresis.
AM
Note
If the current is limited by the maximum available converter current when
erating, then the torquegenerating components are reduced.
A reduction of the current in P057 in this case shortens the rampup time.
AM/4-60

07.94
4.5 Limits
4.5
Limits
Table 4-12
Limits
Number
Change
effective
P051
P174.M
online
0...32000 RPM
P059.M
online
0...399 %
Current limiting
P060.M
online
0...399 %
Output limiting
Percentage of the rated motor output
P029.G
online
P039.G
online
0...399 %
P041.G
online
0...399 %
P050.G
online
Max. motor speed

Highest permissible motor speed
0...32000 RPM
0...32000 RPM
Speed limiting
Highest required motor speed
1st torque limit
2nd torque limit
1.
Changeover, if the actual changeover speed from
M d
d , P050, is exceeded.
to
1
2
Changeover
speed from d
d2
Changeover condition for the limit value
changeover
Note
If a drive is to be operated in the overload range, the limits must first be increased after the controller has been optimized.
The various limits are always simultaneously taken into account.
If an overload is permitted, then generally more than one limit has to be increased.
If the rampup time is to be shortened, it is also practical to make a change
the openloop controlled range.

AM/4-61
A
M
4.6 Special speeds and speed ranges

4.6
07.94
Special speeds and speed ranges
Overview
Min. steadystate speed

Speed range suppression
Shutdown without overshoot
Steadystate
minimum speed
Table 4-13
Min. steadystate speed
Number
P030.M
Change
effective
online
P051
4
Setting range
0...32000 RPM
AM
Description

No steadystate operation in the speed range
around zero.
The range is runthrough with the actual rampup
or
rampdown times if the speed setpoint exceeds the
steadystate minimum speed in the opposite direction of rotation.
Zero speed can only be forced by inhibiting the permanentlywired enable signals or the freelyprogrammable terminal function 16, setpoint enable.
effective setpoint [RPM]
Steadystate minimum
200
(P030 < 200 RPM)

speed
200
input setpoint [RPM]

(P030 > 200 RPM)
200
200
AM/4-62

07.94
4.6 Special speeds and speed ranges

Speed
range
suppression
Table 4-14
Speed range suppression
Change
effective
Number
online
online
P054.M
P055.M
P051
4
4
Setting range
Description
0...32000 RPM
0...32000 RPM
Suppressed range, lower speed

Suppressed range, upper speed
No steadystate operation in the suppressed speed
range.
The range is runthrough with the actual rampup
or
rampdown times, if the speed setpoint either exceeds or falls below the other corner speed.

P055 upper speed
Suppressed range
P054 lower speed
Suppressed
range
AM
Shutdown without
overshoot
Table 4-15
Number
P022.M
Change
effective
online
P051
4
Setting range
Description
2...32000 RPM

When the controller is inhibited, and the shutdown
speed is fallen below, the motor is switched into a
nocurrent condition, in order to prevent overshoot
when zero speed is approached.

AM/4-63
4.7 Manual optimization

4.7
12.94
Manual optimization
Overview
current controller
speed controller
field controller
main field reactance
motor and external moment of inertia
motor rotor resistance
If manual optimization is required, the specified signals at the appropriate measuring points should be traced using a storage oscilloscope, and the parameters set, so that the required signal characteristics are obtained. The sequence
can be triggered by the first of the specified signals.
For several adjustments, the settling characteristics of setpoint jumps have to
be evaluated (if possible, rampup time P016 or P042 = 0) (step response).
These can be entered using the oscillation generator (refer to Section 2.2.3). In
this case, braking energy can be fed back into the supply when I/R modules are
used.
When UE modules are used, this energy is converted into heat.
Rampdown time P017 or P043 can be increased to reduce the braking
power.
AM
Current controller
P115 P gain, current controller, base speed range

P116 P gain, current controller, fieldweakening range
Table 4-16
Signal name
Test point
Parameterization
Address
Phase current
AM/4-64
test socket
Shift factor, e.
g.

07.94

Setting, with the drive enabled and speed n = 0

Parameter P115 is increased from the preset value until the characteristic
remains stable. If oscillations occur, reduce the value until the characteristic
again becomes stable.
Phase current
Phase current
P115 too low
Fig. 4-1
t [ s]
Phase current
P115 correct
t [ s]
P115 too high
t [ s]
Optimization, current controller, base speed range
P gain
300
Max. value
25
P116 = 300
200
5
AM
P116 = 200
75
P115 = 75
Base speed
range
Fig. 4-2
Field weakening range

P173
Speed [RPM]
P174
Optimization, current controller, fieldweakening range
From the field weakening speed P173, the current controller gain is linearly
increased, and, at maximum speed P174, reaches the value of P116, but, a
maximum of 255.
If a value > 255 is entered in P116, the current controller gain reaches the
maximum value already at speeds < P174.
P116.M
255(255P115.M)

P173.M
P174.M
AM/4-65

07.94
In some cases, the behavior can be further improved using a somewhat higher
value.
Table 4-17
P gain, current controller, base speed range
P115 P gain, current controller, base speed range

Increase value for
Decrease value for
No.
Fault profile
No.
Fault profile
F11
Low current controller dynamic

performance
F11
Increased current ripple, whistling

noises, etc.
Table 4-18
P gain, current controller, fieldweakening range
P116 P gain, current controller, fieldweakening range

Increase value for
Decrease value for
No.
Fault profile
No.
Fault profile
Erratic noload operation in the

per speed range, torque surges
F11
Spontaneous stall
AM
AM/4-66

07.94

Speed controller
P031 P gain, speed controller

P032 integral action time, speed controller
Table 4-19
Signal name
Test point
Parameterization
Address
Torquegenerating
current
X1 test socket
P076 = 10D2H
Shift factor, e.
g.
P077 = 0H
Speed actual value
X2 test socket
P072 = 1110H
P073 = 4H
Setting, when the drive is enabled in the oscillation mode:

Enter small setpoint steps in the upper speed range using the oscillation generator.
Using P031 and P032 set the required settling characteristic of the speed
actual value after the actual limit has been left.
If different controller settings are required at various speeds, the speed controller adaptation can be activated (refer to Section 4.1).
Torquegenerating
current
Torquegenerating
current
Torquegenerating
current
AM
t [ms]
Speed actual value
t [ms]
Speed actual value
t [ms]
P031 too low
Fig. 4-3
t [ms]
Speed actual value
t [ms]
t[ms]
P031 correct
P031 too high

AM/4-67

07.94
Table 4-20
P031 P gain, speed controller

Increase value for
N
.
Fault profile
High rise time

Overshoot with a large period
interval
for
speed steps
Table 4-21
Decrease value for

N
.
Fault profile
Speed oscillations with a low period
interval for speed steps
Speed controller integral action time
P032 Speed controller integral action time

Increase value for
N
.
Fault profile
Tendency to oscillate when there is

an elastic coupling and a high external moment of inertia
Decrease value for

N
.
Fault profile
Long settling characteristics when
speed changes occur
AM
AM/4-68

07.94

Field controller
P034 P gain, field controller

P035 integral action time, field controller
Table 4-22
Signal name
Test point
Parameterization
Address
Speed actual value
X1 test socket
P076 = 1110H
Shift factor, e.
g.
P077 = 0H
Fieldgenerating
current
X2 test socket
P072 = 10CAH
P073 = 2H
Setting with the drive enabled in oscillation mode.

Using the oscillation generator and rampfunction generator, brake the drive
from the maximum speed to changeover speed P172 via a ramp.
Increase parameter P034 from the calculated value until the fieldgenerating
current remains stable. If oscillations occur, reduce the value or increase P035
until the characteristic restabilizes.
Check:
setpoint steps in the field weakening range
if there is a tendency to stall (F11), increase P034.
noload characteristics over the complete speed range
for erratic noload operation with torque surges, down to stalling (F11),
reduce P034.
Speed actual value
Speed actual value
t [ms]
Fieldgenerating
current
t [ms]
Fieldgenerating
current
t [ms]
P034 too low
t [ms]
Fieldgenerating
current
t [ms]
P034 correct
AM
Speed actual value
t [ms]
P034 too high
Fig. 4-4

AM/4-69

07.94
Table 4-23
Field controller P gain
P034 P gain, field controller

Increase value for
P166
Noload motor
current
Decrease value for
No.
Fault profile
No.
Fault profile
F11
Stalling, especially in the field

weakening range during speed
steps
F11
The fieldgenerating current has

tendency to oscillate
Speed ripple
Torque surges
Stalling under noload conditions
Note
If the value of parameter P166 is changed, the main field reactance P171
should be readjusted.
Table 4-24
Signal name
Test point
Parameterization
Address
Phase current
IR test socket
Shift factor, e.
g.
Motor current
(P007) display
Voltage actual value
(P010) display
Table 4-25
AM
Setting with the drive enabled and load decoupled

parameter
Procedure
P172
Changeover speed,closedloop/openloop control

Set P172 > P164 60/p s/min
Note the original value
P057
Current setpoint for the openloop controlled range

Set P057 = 50 %
Note the original value
Speed
setpoint
Adjust so that
(P005) =
U A
(P162/P164)
3 P158 P
+2
with UA output voltage, induction
motor module
161
UA
400 V
at UDClink = 600 V
UA
420 V
at UDClink = 625 V
UA
0.8 Usupply
at UDClink uncontrolled
P057
P166
AM/4-70

Adjust so that (P010) = A
U
Motor noload current
Set P166 = P161 P057/100 %
P172
Changeover speed, open/closedloop control

Enter the original value
P057

Enter the original value

07.94

P171
Magnetizing reac-
tance
Note
If the value of parameter P171 is changed, the motor noload current P
must be readjusted.
Table 4-26
Signal name
Test point
Parameterization
Address
Integral component,
field controller
X1 test socket
Shift factor, e.
g.
P077 = 2
P076 = 116A
Set with the drive enabled at the field weakening speed P173.
Adjust the field controller integral component with parameter P171 to zero.
Integral component,
field controller
Integral component,
field controller
t[ms]
P171 too low
Integral component,
field controller
t[ms]
P171 correct
A
M
t [ms]
P171 too high
Fig. 4-5

AM/4-71

12.94
P159
motor and external
moment of inertia
P219
additional moment
of inertia
Table 4-27
Parameterization
Signal name
Test point
Speed actual value
X1 test socket
P076 = 1110H
P077 = 0H
Integral component,
speed controller
X2 test socket
P072 = 117CH
P073 = 2H
Address
Shift factor, e. g.
Setting with load coupled and the drive enabled in the oscillation mode.
Enter setpoint steps from n = 2 P172 to n
max with
the oscillation generator.
Set the speed controller integral component with parameter P159 or P219 so
that this remains at approximately zero during acceleration.
Speed actual value
Speed actual value
Speed actual value
AM
t[ms]
Integral component,
speed controller
t [ms]
Integral component,
speed controller
t[ms]
Integral component,
speed controller
Friction torque
0
t [ms]
P159 + P219 too low
t [ms]
P159 + P219 correct
t [ms]
P159 + P219 too high
Fig. 4-6
AM/4-72

07.94

P168
motor rotor
resistance
Note
Motor rotor resistance setting is not required for motors with deepbar
cage rotors.
Table 4-28
Signal name
Test point
Parameterization
Address
Shift factor, e. g.
Speed actual value
X1 test socket
P076 = 1110H
P077 = 0H
Integral component,
speed controller
X2 test socket
P072 = 117CH
P073 = 2H
Setting with the drive enabled in oscillation mode.

Using the oscillation generator, enter setpoint steps in the speed range from
n = 2 P172 to n = n max.
Adjust the speed controller integral component using parameter P168 so that
an overshoot at the end of acceleration is compensated.
Speed actual value
Speed actual value
Speed actual value
AM
t [ms]
Integral component,
speed controller
t [ms]
Integral component,
speed controller
t [ms]
Integral component,
speed controller
Friction torque
t [ms]
P168 too low
t [ms]
P168 correct
t [ms]
P168 too high
Fig. 4-7

AM/4-73
07.94
AM
AM/4-74
04.97

5.1.1 Measured value displays

AM/5-75
Diagnostics and fault analysis
5.1
Diagnostic aids
5.1.1
Table 5-1
Warning
When the motor pulses are canceled, there is no information regarding the
tor speed. The calculated speed actual value is then set to zero. Thus, all
speed actual value displays no longer provide any information.
In addition to P133, BERO speed actual value if the speed is monitored.
ParameterAttribute
Number
Change
effective
P051
(P001)
(P101)
32000...32000
RPM
Speed setpoint
(P002)
(P102)
32000...32000
RPM
Speed actual value
(P003)
399.0...399.0 %
(P004)
0.0...100.0 %
(P005)
1250...1250 Hz
(P006)
(P007)
399.0...399.0 %
Motor current
Referred to the rated motor current
(P008)
0.0...399.0 %
Field current components

(P009)
0.0...399.0 %
Active power
Referred to the rated motor output
(P010)
(P110)
0...450 eff
V
0...170
C
(P133)
0...65535 RPM
Speed actual value BERO
(P037)
2.8 kHz...7.8 kHz
0...700 V

Torquegenerating current
Utilization
Referred to the effective limiting
Motor frequency
DC link voltage
Realized via NE or the monitoring module or using
P061
Voltage actual value

Motor temperature

5.1.2
07.94
Status displays
P000, P100
operating display
Refer to Section 2.2.1
P011
Status of the binary inputs
Table 5-2
P011 status of the binary inputs
Display
Display
value
AM
Term. 63
Term. E9
Term. E5
Term. E1
central
pulse enable
freelyprogramm. via
P089
freelyprogramm. via
P085
freelyprogramm. via
P081
Term. 64
Term. 663
Term. E6
Term. E2
central
drive enable
axisspecific
pulse enable
freelyprogramm. via
P086
freelyprogramm. via
P082
Term.
open 112
settingup
operation
Term. 65
axisspecific
controller
enable
Term. E7
freelyprogramm. via
P087
Term. E3
freelyprogramm. via
P083
Term. R
Term. 81
open
ramp
function
generator fast
stop
Term. E8
freelyprogramm. via
P088
Term. E4
freelyprogramm. via
P084
central fault
nowledgment
ack-
It is possible to display several messages. The hexadecimal addition is displayed.

AM/5-76

07.94

P254
Display of active
functions 1
Table 5-3
P254 display, active functions 1
Display
Display
value
Fct. No. 13
rampfunction
generator 2
gearbox stage
bit 0
Fct. No. 14
Fct. No. 10
increase
setpoint
Fct. No. 15
decrease
setpoint
Fct. No. 16
Fct. No. 9
setpoint
enable
gearbox
stage
bit 1
Fct. No. 11
gearbox
bit 2
Fct. No. 1
2nd torque
limit
Fct. No. 2
oscillation
Fct. No. 7
Fct. No. 3
rampup time
T
=0
reset fault
memory
Fct. No. 12
clockwise/
counter
wise phase
sequence
AM


AM/5-77

12.94
P255
Display of active
functions 2
Table 5-4
P255 display, active functions 2
Display
Display
value
Fct. No. 21
motor
selection
bit 1
Fct. No. 24
fixed setpoint
3
Fct. No. 17
fixed setpoint
bit 0
Fct. No. 18
fixed setpoint
1
Fct. No. 19
AM
fixed setpoint
bit 2
Fct. No. 20
motor
selection
bit 0

AM/5-78

07.94
5.1.3

P020
Executed selfsetting
Table 5-5
P255 executed selfsetting
Display
Display
value
self
optimization
5
setting,
of inertia
self
optimization
1
optimization,
phase current
controller
self
optimization
6
self
optimization
2
setting, rotor
resistance
setting, power
offset
self
optimization
7
self
optimization
3
calculation,
speed
controller
self
optimization
8
setting, field
weakening
speed
AM
setting, no
current
self
optimization
4
setting, main
field


AM/5-79

12.94
Table 5-6
ParameterAttribute
Change
effective
Number
(P028)
P051
0...FFFFH
Diagnostics
Bi
t13
(P200)
5.1.4
0...FFFFH
Value
2000H
Division interrupt
Error in the calculation routine by
incorrect data entry
Checksum, parameter
At every backup (P052=1H), the checksum is formed over the parameter contents.
Thus, a change in the drivemotor data is
identified.
Test sockets X1, X2, IR
Overview
Function
technical data
assignment
Normalization, IR
AM
Parameterization, X1 (DAU 3), X2 (DAU 4)
Function
Technical data
Analog output of the phase current actual value and RAM variables for measurement and diagnostic purposes.
phase current actual value at test socket IR

2 output channels at X1 (DAU 3) and X2 (DAU 4)
voltage range 0...+ 5 V (value 0 corresponds to +2.5 V)
rough normalization, offset compensation for X1 and X2 via parameter
AM/5-80

07.94

Assignment
X1
X2
IR
Fig. 5-1
X1:
Test socket DAU 3
X2:
IR:
M:
Test socket DAU 4

Current actual value, phase R
Reference ground
Assignment, test sockets
Normalization IR
Table 5-7
Normalization, IR
Power module code number (P095)
Normalization, IR
10
11
12
13

AM/5-81
AM

07.94
Parameterization
X1 (DAU 3),
X2 (DAU 4)
Table 5-8
Parameterization, X1 (DAU 3), X2 (DAU 4)
ParameterAttribute
Change
effective
Number
AM
P051
Setting range
Description
P076
online
0...FFFF hex
Address, DAU 3
Address of the RAM variables which are to be
output
at DAU 1.
Presetting: 1110H calculated speed actual value
1 V corresponds to 15000 RPM
P077
online
0...F hex
Shift factor, DAU 3

Rough normalization of the selected data value by
shifting the binary number to the left.
Shifting to the left by 1 = multiplication by 2
Max. gain: 32768
P080
online
127...127 dec
Offset, DAU 3
P072
online
0...FFFF hex
P073
online
Address, DAU 4
Presetting: 10D2H
Torquegenerating current
1 V corresponds to 1.6
rated motor
I
Shift factor, DAU 4
P074
online
0...F hex
127...127 dec
Offset, DAU 4
Output voltage [V]

1st overflow
2nd overflow
3. overflow
4. overflow
+5.0
+2.5
0.0
0000H
4000
H
200
Shift factor0H
=0
Shift factor = 2
6000H
800
A000H
0H
Offset = 0 V
C000
H
E000H
FFFFH
Hex numerical value
Note
A listing of important measured quantities (RAM variables) and their
is listed in the Appendix (Section 6.5).
AM/5-82

07.94
5.1.5 Minimum/maximum value memory

5.1.5
Function
Table 5-9
Monitoring RAM variables for minimum and maximum values.

ParameterAttribute
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
P181
online
0...FFFF hex
P179
online
0...3 hex
(P182)
0...FFFF hex
Min. value min/max memory
(P183)
0...FFFF hex
Max. value min/max memory
Address for min/max memory

(addresses of the monitored RAM variable)
Value can be backedup in the drivemachine data
memory.
Selection, min/max memory
0H: Stop memory function
1H: Start memory function with absolute value
evaluation
2H: Start memory function with bipolar evaluation
3H: Stop memory function
Note

A
M
AM/5-83
07.94

5.1.6
Transient recorder function
Function
Simultaneous tracing of two RAM variables and output via test sockets X1 and
X2.
Technical data
two 16bit signals are traced in parallel

640 words trace depth
1 ms sampling time (P090, bit3=0 ) or 0.6ms (P090, bit3=1, from FW 3.00)
start and stop condition (trigger conditions)
cyclic output via D/A converters
trigger edge for the output
Parameterization
Table 5-10
Parameterization
ParameterAttribute
Number
AM
P207
Change
effective
online
P051
4
Setting range
0...C hex
Description
Setting the transient recorder
Two RAM variables are recorded over 640 ms with

1 ms sampling time.
1H: Start via P206 without start and stop condition
Start via P206 = + 1. stop 640 ms after
input
2H: Start condition P208 and P209, no stop
condition.
Start via P206 = +1. stop 640 ms after start
condition.
5H: Stop condition via P210 and P211, no
start condition.
Start via P205 = +1. tracing the last
640 ms before the stop condition
6H: Record with start and stop condition,
max. 640 ms
4H: Trace memory preassigned a value via
P217
Parameter is reset to 0 after successful trace.
P212
online
0...FFFF hex
Address signal 1
A list of all of the important measured quantities
(RAM variables) and their addresses are provided
the Appendix (Section 6.5).
P213
online
0...FFFF hex
Address, signal 2
AM/5-84

07.94

Table 5-10
Parameterization
ParameterAttribute
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
P208
online
0...FFFF hex
Address for the start condition

Address of the RAM variables which start the trace.
P209
online
0...FFFF hex
Threshold for the start condition

Start condition mask, is compared with the RAM
riable in P208.
P210
online
0...FFFF hex
Address for stop condition
P211
online
0...FFFF hex
Threshold for the stop condition
P206
online
0...1 hex
Select transient recorder

The transient recorder function is started by setting
P206 to +1.
The parameter is reset to 0 after a successful trace.
P215
online
0...15 dec

Refer to the description, test socket X1, X2
P216
online
0...15 dec
P217
online
0...FFFF hex
Trigger signal 1
Trigger signal amplitude low for D/A converter output with 1 ms duration.
An edge is output, which follows the traced signal
when entering various signal levels in P217 and
P218.
P218
online
0...FFFF hex
Trigger signal 2
Trigger signal amplitude high for 1 ms D/A converter output.
P214
online
0...1 hex
Start trace output

Cyclic outputs of the traced values on D/A
converter.
The output is repeated until the parameter is reset
to
0.
The previous assignment of the D/A converters is
buffered and is set again after the output function
has
been terminated.
Note

AM/5-85
AM
5.1.7 Openloop current/frequency control

5.1.7
07.94
Warning
If a drive is operated for a longer period of time in the openloop controlled
speed range, it should be ensured that the motor is adequately cooled, as a
current is impressed in the motor which is approximately the same as the
current (percentage in P057).
Function
Diagnostics for incorrect parameterization in the closedloop controlled range.

The motor can be operated in the openloop current/frequency controlled range
for test purposes. In this case, the closedloop speed and current control are
ineffective.
Function
information
The changeover speed, closedloop/openloop control P172 should be set so

high, that this is not exceeded in test operation.
Above the field weakening speed (P173), the absolute current value should be
selected lower than the noload current, as otherwise the voltage limiting will
intervene. This will result in erratic running and torque surges.
Table 5-11
AM
ParameterAttribute
Number
Change
effective
P051
Setting range
Description
P057.M
online
0...150 %
Current setpoint in the openloop controlled

range
Current setpoint for openloop current/frequency
control
P058.M
online
0...399 %
Accelerating torque in the openloop controlled

range
P172.M
online
AM/5-86
0...32000 RPM
Changeover speed, closedloop/openloop

control
Changeover is realized with a 200 RPM hysteresis.

07.94
5.2 Fault analysis

5.2
Fault analysis
5.2.1
Fault display, fault acknowledgment
Fault display
Display
1 fault
Inactiv
e
Several faults, changeover using
key
ault message number (refer to table 512)

= Fault
Fault acknowledgment
using the
P
key
Depress the
key with the controller inhibited.
If the fault can be acknowledged, the system returns to the operator control
program.
If the fault cannot be acknowledged, for example, there is a defect, then this
can be temporarily suppressed in the display.
remote acknowledgment
One of the following terminals is energized, with the controller inhibited:
terminal R reset at the NE or monitoring module
terminal reset fault memory (freelyprogrammable terminal
function) at the induction motor module
terminal 65 interrupt controller enable (only if P053, bit 5 =1)
powerdown
Powerdown the converter and after the display has disappeared after approx. 2 s, powerup again.
Fault suppression
using the
key
The system returns to the operator control program for approx. one
minute after depressing the

key, without the fault being acknowledged.
AM/5-87
AM

5.2.2
Fault message list
Table 5-12
Warning
When the motor pulses are canceled, there is no information regarding the
tor speed. The calculated speed actual value is then set to 0.The motor
ses can be canceled by fault messages.
Fault message list
Fault message
F04
03.96
Fault
D/A conversion
error
Cause
if the control board repeatedly manifests defects
all enable signals have been issued, but no motor is connected or
a motor contactor has not pulledin.
F05
Motor current = 0
all enable signals have been issued, but at least one of the
parameters
P160, P166, P057, P059 is zero.
DC link fuse ruptured
DC link busbar interrupted
Data save unsucF07
AM
F08
cessful on FEPROM
Irretrievable data
loss
if the error message repeatedly occurs during data save, then the
FEPROM is defective.
if the error message occurs directly after the converter is powered
up, the converter was previously powereddown during a data save
then
operation. The last parameter changes have therefore not been
saved.
The data save must be repeated.
defective FEPROM replace module
ribbon cable between the control and gating board is defective or is
not connected
motor is not connected or a phase is missing
defective power supply of the gating board
Frequency setpoint >

maximum frequency
F11
DC link fuse ruptured

DC link busbar interrupted
motor stalled, as the motor or controller parameters completely
wrong
induction motor module is connected to a monitoring module
without DC link voltage sensing, and no value for the DC link voltage
was entered in P061
for the gearbox stage changeover, the speed limiting P029 was
lowered, although the motor rotated above this limit.
motor data or controller data completely incorrect
F13
Field controller is at
its limit
entered motor data and motor circuit configuration Y/

cide
do not coin-
motor stalled, as the motor or controller data are completely wrong
AM/5-88

04.97
Table 5-12

Fault message list
Fault message
Fault
Cause
motor overloaded
Overtemperature,
F14
motor
motor current too high, e.g. due to incorrect motor data

defective temperature sensor (motor)
motor fan defective
winding short circuit, motor
converter overloaded
(incorrect motor/converter assignment, incorrect duty cycle)
F15
Overtemperature,
ambient temperature too high
converter
induction motor module fan failed

defective temperature sensor in the induction motor module
acknowledge after cooling below 50
C
switching
the supply voltage off and on
Illegal power module

F16
F17
code number
I 0
incorrect code number 3 selected in P095 (for power modules

automatic
without identification)
incorrect code number in P095 selected (for power modules with
automatic identification).
from FW
3.00
rated
power
>
mot section
incorrect motor/converter assignment
Temperature sensor,
motor
temperature sensor defective
interrupted
F19
15 K only by
connection to the sensor interrupted or shortcircuited
AM
short circuit
only KTY 84
F51
F52
F53
Parameterizing error:
Rated torque too
high
rated torque (calculated) from P160.M and P163.M greater

than 650 Nm
from FW 2.00
Torque constant
inadmissible
illegal ratio
Rated motor current
too low
of
from FW 2.00
P164.M
P160.M P
161.M
163.M
P171.M
Ratio of the rated motor current to rated power module current too low
selfsetting was interrupted

selfsetting did not provide any useful values
F60
Error for selfsetting
speed limiting (P029, P174) effective

n m
60 s/min)/p
rat
<
a
ed
circuit
configuration
and nominal data interchanged
additional causes, refer to Section 4
F90
Maximum speed
BERO exceeded
pulse number P131.M incorrectly parameterized

cable interrupted


AM/5-89
07.94
Faults
after
supply ON
Operating control display inactive
at least two phases missing (NE module)
at least two input fuses have ruptured (NE module)
defective electronics power supply in the NE module
module not inserted or defective
defective induction motor module

defective EPROM/FEPROM
firmware not loaded
controller enable
Motor rotates counterclockwise, although the induction motor module outputs a clockwise rotating field, or vice versa
motor phase sequence incorrect, as the feeder cables are interchanged
(interchange 2 phase connections)
AM
AM/5-90
07.94

6 Appendix
Appendix
AM
yes
Section 5.2.2)

yes
Section 5.2.2)
AM/6-91
No
6.1 Flow diagram for new startup

6.1
Flow diagram for new startup
07.94
2
Fault (refer to
Warning
The drive accelerates up
s if a fault on the NE module is
parameter values can be reset after acknowledging
fault
message
(refer
Siemens AG
1997
All Rights
reserved
Fault
(refer
to F07
with the induction motor module enabled.
Note
If data save is interrupted due to a power failure or the power being
ted, then the values which were changed since the last data save are lost,
the drive converter displays fault message F07 after the power returns.
The
to Section 5.2.2).
START
Before the unit is poweredup:

check the connections according to the system circuit diagram.
withdraw the pulse and controller enable signals at the NE module (terminal
63, terminal 64) and the induction motor module (terminals 663, 65, 81).
determine the power section code number from the module MLFB.
AM
Powerup the unit

(supply ON)
Does the display

remain dark?
No
Does a
flashing F...
appear?
No
Does the
operating display
P000 appear
(refer to
Sect. 1.3)
yes
1
AM/6-92
07.94

Set P051 to 4H
Set P097 to 0H
(start initialization)
The module was already

commissioned once. In order
to adapt it to a new motor, it
must be reset into the initial
status.
Set P052 to 1H
(write into FEPROM)
Wait until P052 is again set to 0H,
then switch the converter off and 1 s
after the operating display has been
canceled, powerup again.
Display P095 or P097

Enter and check P095 power module code number
Set P097 to 1H
SEtUP is displayed
Wait until the operating display

P000 appears
AM
Set P051 to 4H
No
Is the induction motor module connected

to the converter bus of a monitoring module without DC link voltage sensing?
Function not in combination

with uncontrolled DC link voltage (refer to Section 2.1)
Yes
Enter P061 fixed DC link
voltage (V)

AM/6-93

12.94
3
Enter the following parameters1)
P158
P160
P161
P162
P163
P164
P174
A 0 must be entered into P158 if there

is no reactor between
the induction motor module and motor.
series reactor inductance (mH)

rated motor output (kW) for S1 duty2)
rated motor current (A) for S1 duty2)
rated motor voltage (V)
rated motor speed (RPM)
rated motor frequency (Hz)
max. motor speed (RPM)
This setting data can be taken from the

rating plate of the motor used, acc. to
VDE 0530, Part 1 (HA10).
Set P056 motor selection

to the motor data set to be
processed
No
Enter the following parameters1)
Enter the P178 power factor 1)

cos 2)
AM
P166
P167
P168
P169
Calculate the equivalent circuit diagram data
P170
P171
Set P153 to +1H
No
Yes
Motor equivalent circuit

diagram data known?
mot. noload current (A)

stator resistance ()
rotor resistance ()
stat. leakage react. ()
rotor leakage react. ()
Total moment of inertia1)

roughly known?
Yes
Enter P1591) motor and external moment of inertia (gm2). If the set value is too low, enter P2191)
additional moment of inertia (kgm2).
Calculate the controller data

Set P153 to 1H
Repeat the procedure

for all changed motor
data sets
1) Setting data for up to four different motors can be entered (subparameters 1 to 4)

2) For forceventilated motors, refer to the information, Section 2.1
AM/6-94

07.94

4
Set P052 to 1H
Wait until P052 is again set to 0H. The
entered values are
transferred into the FEPROM.
No
Motor with deepbar squirrelcage

rotor?
Yes or
unknown
Increase P0181) initial

roundingoff (ms) to approx. 30.00
ms
No
Is a > 3.3 kHz converter

switching frequency
configured?
Yes
Observe derating
(refer to Section 4.2)
Increase the converter

switching frequency P0361) (refer to
Section 4.2.)
AM
Set P056 motor selection

to the motor data set to be
processed
Enter 0 V speed setpoint

at terminals 56 and 14
(display in P001)
10
1) Setting data for up to four different motors can be entered (subparameters 1 to 4)

AM/6-95

07.94
Status of the two center digits of the operating display P000 after
switching (refer to Section 2.2.1)
All enable signals at the

NE and IM module are
switchedout (disabled).
Connect the enable voltage

to all enable signals at the
NE module.
Connect the enable voltage to the
axisspecific pulse enable, terminal
663 at the IM module.
Controller enable
Connect the enable voltage to terminal 65 at the IM module.
No
Is
terminal fct. 16
Yes
(setpoint enable)
activated?
Remove rampfunction gene-
AM
rator fast stop.

Connect the enable
voltage to terminal 81.
Remove rampfunction generator fast stop. Connect the enabled voltage to terminal 81.
Connect the enable

voltage to the select
terminal, setpoint enable.
Slightly increase the speed setpoint.
Yes
Motor rotates and

responds to the speed setpoint
No
F05
F11
Refer to
Section 5.2.2
Enter speed setpoint 0.
AM/6-96

07.94

7
No
Max. motor speed

> 6000 RPM
Increase P029 speed limiting to the maximum motor

setpoint speed.
Set P051 to 10H.

(remove special write protection)
1)
Set P204 to 1 (set the current controller)

Set P205 to 1 (start selfsetting)
Wait until P205 is set to 0
Set P204 to 2 (adjust power offset)

Check, and if required change P031, P032 speed controller setting
AM
Check, and if required change P034, P035 field controller setting
Caution!
The motor rotates at the no
load speed, with a clockwise
phase sequence.
Note:
Set P174 and P029 to at
least the rated synchronous
speed to optimize the noload
current.
Set P204 to 3 (set the noload current)

No
Does F60 or F17 fault message

appear in the display?
Yes
Fault (refer to
Section 5.2.2)
1) no longer required from FW 3.00

AM/6-97

12.94
8
Caution!
The motor runs with the field weakening speed, clockwise phase sequence.
Set P204 to 4 (set the main field reactance)

No
Is fault message F60

displayed?
Yes
Fault (refer to
Section 5.2.2)
Caution!
Oscillation up to the maximum
speed with clockwise phase
sequence (if required, limit with
P029).
Set P204 to 8 (set the field weakening speed)

No
AM
Speed controller
integral action time
P032 > 250 ms
Manually adjust moment of inertia (refer

to Section 4.7)
Caution!
Oscillation up to the maximum
speed with clockwise phase
sequence (if required, limit with
P029).
Set P204 to 5 (set the moment of inertia)

No
Yes
Deepbar squirrelcage rotor?
Yes or unknown
Caution!
Oscillation up to the
maximum speed with clockwise phase sequence.
Set P204 to 6 (set the rotor resistance)

No
Is fault message F60

displayed?
Yes
Fault (refer to
Section 5.2.2)
8a
AM/6-98

07.94

8a
10
P031, P032 speed controller settings manually optimized (refer to

Section 4.7)
Yes
No
Set P204 to 7
(set P031, P032, P205, speed controller setting
calculation to 1)(start selfsetting)
Inhibit all enable signals
Set P051 to 4H
Repeat the procedure

for all changed motor
data sets
AM
9

AM/6-99

07.94
Set P056 again to 0 H
Check, and if required, change the following parameters:

P014
P015
P024
normalization nset
offset correction nset
normalization nset
P016
P017
rampup time, rampfct. generator 1

rampdown time, rampfct. generator 1
P029
maximum motor speed nmaxmot
P021 to P023,
P027
P039 to P043
P047
AM
relay response values of the

speed monitoring
torque limits
P057 to P058
opencontrolled range
P059 to P060
limits
P081 to P089
freelyprogrammable
terminal functions
P113 to P114
speed setpoints
P185 to P194,
P241 to P246
freelyprogrammable
Relay functions
11
AM/6-100

07.94

11
Set P052 to 1H.

The changed values are then transferred into
the FEPROM
Check all parameterized functions and

if required change
Values changed?
No
Yes
Set P052 to 1H.

The changed values are then transferred into
the FEPROM
A
M
Set P051 to 0H.
Set write protection
After startup, save the parameter

values in a file or document them in list form
End

AM/6-101
07.94
6.2 Power module code numbers
6.2
Power module code numbers
Table 6-1
Power module code numbers
Power
mod.
type
Order No.
6SN11231AA0
6SN11241AA0
6SN11401BA1
Rated
current [A]

briefly
S60% 10min [A]

briefly
S60% 10s [A]
Power module
code number
P095
8A
0HA
FW 2.10
15 A
0AA
FW 2.10
25 A
0BA
10
16
50 A
0CA
24
32
32
80 A
0DA
30
40
51
108 A
0LA
45
60
76
13
120 A
0GA
45
60
76
160 A
0EA
60
80
102
200 A
0FA
85
110
127
10
300 A
0JA
120
150
193
11
FW 2.00
400 A
0KA
200
250
257
12
FW 2.00
FW 2.10
AM
Enter the Order No.
(MLFB No.)
Fig. 6-1
Position of the Order No. (MLFB No.)
AM/6-102

07.94
6.3
6.3 Connections
Connections
Overview
Connecting diagram SIMODRIVE 611 analog system

Terminals
relay terminals
Warning
The shields and unused cores of power cables (e.g. unused brake
in the cable) must be connected to PE potential in order to discharge
currents cause by capacitive coupling effects.
Hazardous voltages could be present, resulting in death or serious injury, if
is not observed.
Note: When non-PELV circuits are used at terminals AS1, AS2, connector coding must be used so that the connector cannot be interchanged (refer to
EN602041, Section 6.4)
Order No. of the coding connector, refer to Catalog NC60.1
AM

AM/6-103
6.3 Connections
07.94
Connection diagram
SIMODRIVE 611 analog system
NE module
IM module
74
Ready
signal
Group signal
I2t temperature
monitoring
72
Pulse enable
Drive enable
X141
X161
Signal. contact
Line contactor
X171
FR
7
45
44
10
15
15
R
P24
P15
N15
N24
M
M
RESET
U1 V1 W1
PE1
FN L K
L1
L2
L3
Warning!
EN+
nset22)
IF
External
RF
HSS
T. 11)
T. 21)
T. 31)
EN+
24
A92
8
X431
RS232C
interface
X441
81
A21
A31
A41
E9
EN+
289
E7
E8
T. 91)
663
65
E5
E6
T. 81)
X451
A91
E3
E4
T. 61)
T. 71)
Motor temperature
sensor3)
56
14
E1
E2
T. 41)
T. 51)
A11
A51
A61
672
673
674
AS1
AS2
X411
X442
Equipment bus
DC link
DAU 12)
DAU 22)
Internal
Relay 11)
Relay 21)
Relay 31)
Relay 41)
Relay 51)
Relay 61)
Ready
Fault
Signal.
contact
Start inhibit
X
P 600
M 600
U2 V2 W2 PE1 PE2
X
at
PE
EN+
Signal.
contact
5 VStart inhibit
UNIT
VDC
M500 link>>
P500
2U1
X
1U1
2V1
1V1
2W1
1W1
X181
X2
IR
nset1
AS1
AS2
SPP
EXT
X1
X421
NS1
NS2
X172
Fig. 6-2
5.3
5.2
5.1
63
9
9
64
19
9
112
48
111
213
113
Settingup
contactor control
AM
BERO input3)
73.2
73.1
X121
X412
X432
X111
from the NC
If a power contactor is used between the motor and the induction motor module, then it
must be ensured that this contactor is only switched in a nocurrent condition. (When
shutting down, first cancel the pulses (terminal 663), then 40 ms later, the contactor).
connecting diagram
1) freelyprogrammable inputs and outputs

2) Function not possible with Order No. 6SN11220BA110AA0
3) From Order No. 6SN112 1A 0 A1
AM/6-104

04.97
6.3 Connections
Table 6-2
T.
No.
Terminals
Location
Typ
Function
1)
Typ. voltage/
limit values
Max. crosssection
Acc. to configuring guide
U2
V2
W2
Motor connection
3ph. 0...450 V
AC
PE1
PE2
I
O
0V
0V
P600
M600
DC link
DC link
I/O
I/O
+300 V
300 V
Busbar
Busbar
I/O
Various
Ribbon cable
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
O
10 V
(max. 11
10 V V)
(max. 11
V)
+21 V...+33 V
+13 V...+30 V
+13 V...+30 V
+13 V...+30 V
+13 V...+30 V
+13 V...+30 V
+13 V...+30 V
+13 V...+30 V
+13 V...+30 V
+13 V...+30 V
+13 V...+30 V
+13 V...+30 V
+24 V
O
O
O
O
10 V 3 mA
0V
10 V 3 mA
0V
O
O
O
O
0 V...5 V 3 mA
0 V...5 V 3 mA
10 V 3 mA
0V
X151/351
Equipment bus
56
14
24
8
X421
X421
X421
X421
663
65
81
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
9 4)
X431
X431
X431
X431
X431
X431
X431
X431
X431
X431
X431
X431
X431
Axisspecific pulse enable

Controller enable
RFG fast stop
Freelyprogramm. enable t.
2
3
Freelyprogramm.
enable t.
4
Freelyprogramm.
enable t.
5
Freelyprogramm.
enable t.
6
Freelyprogramm.
enable t.
7
8
Freelyprogramm.
enable t.
9
Enable
voltage
A91
M
A92
M
X451
X451
X451
X451
Analog output, DAU 3

Ref. potential for DAU) 3)
1
Analog output, DAU 3
Ref.
potential for DAU) 3)
2
2
Test socket
Test socket
Test socket
Test socket
X1
X2
IR
M
Speed setpoint 1
Speed setpoint 2
2
2
)
)
2
)2
)2
)2
)2
)
2
)
2
)
Bolt
Bolt
2
1.5
2
1.5
2
mm
1.5
2
mm
1.5
mm
2
1.5
2
1.5
2
mm
1.5
2
1.5
2
mm
1.5
2
mm
1.5
2
mm
1.5
2
mm
1.5
2
mm
1.5
2
mm
1.5
2
mm
1.5
2
mm
1.5
2
mm
1.5
mm
2
1.5
2
1.5
2
1.5
2
mm
1.5
mm
Test socket, 2 mm diameter
1) I = input
O = output
3) Function not possible with Order No. 6SN11220BA110AA0
4) Refer to Section NE 3.1... 3.2

AM/6-105
AM
6.3 Connections
07.94
Relay terminals
Table 6-3
relay terminals
T.
Locatio
No.
289
n
X441
A11
A21
A31
A41
A51
A61
X441
X441
X441
X441
X441
X441
672
673
674
X441
X441
X441
AS 1
AS 2
X441
X441
Typ
Function
Typ. voltage/
limit values
1)
Center contact signals

Freelyprogramm. relay fct.
Freelyprogramm.
relay fct.
1
2
Freelyprogramm.
relay fct.
3
Freelyprogramm. relay fct.
4
Freelyprogramm.
relay fct.
5
Freelyprogramm.
relay fct.
6
Ready/
no axisspecific
fault
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
2)
Signal.
contact
Start inhibit
30 V/6.0 A max
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
NO
I
NC
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
30 V/1.0 A max
I
NC
250 A /2.9 A max

250 A /2.9 A max
V
C
6.4
Interfaces
6.4.1
X432 connector assignment for BERO

PIN NO.
AM
Signal name
Max. crosssection
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
1.5
1.5
mm
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Explanation
10
EN+
+24V
14
BERO
Signal
15
FR
Ground
The other pins may not be assigned.
6.4.2
X412 connector assignment for the motor temperature sensor

PIN NO.
Signal name
14
+ Temp
15
Temp
The other pins may not be assigned.
6.4.3
1) I = input
X411 serial interfaces

PIN NO.
Signal name
TxD
RxD
M5
NC = NC contact
NO = NO contact
AM/6-106

07.94
6.5
6.5 Addresses, RAM variables


The following is valid for all address information:
Segment address P249 = 0H
Table 6-4
Variable
Addres
s
11B6H
7FFFH
Utilization
11B8H
7FFFH
Act. torque limit
Calculated speed actual value
1110H
7FFFH
37499 RPM
Torque setpoint
10ECH
2000H
Absolute current value (actual value)
10C6H
2000H
Absolute current value (setpoint)
10C4H
2000H
Torquegenerating current (setpoint)
10D2H
2000H
Fieldgenerating current (setpoint)
10CAH
2000H
Speed setpoint (after the rampfunction

generator)
0E02H
7FFFH
I mot. n
37499 RPM
Field angle (setpoint)
1140H
10000H
Field angle (actual value)
1142H
10000H
Active power (actual value)
1148H
2000H
Reactive power (actual value)
114AH
2000H
P S rated
P S rated
Integral component, speed controller
117CH
2000H
Integral component, field controller
116AH
2000H
M drated
I mot. n
Magnetization current (calculated)
10E6H
2000H
I mot. n
Calculated speed actual value

(absolute value)

6.6 Setting and checking data (Parameter list)

Value
Corresponds
ntomax
(P174/P029)
M drated
I mot. n
I mot. n
I mot. n
AM
AM/6-107
07.94
6.6
Setting and checking data (Parameter list)

Fields with grey background: Data entry not possible
Dependent parameters/subparameters
No
data
M
generallyvalid parameters
gearbox stagedependent parameters
fixed setpointdependent parameters
motordependent parameters
AM
% %
0 0 0
% % % V
% %
V V
m
2
1
1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 3 5 3 2 3 3 3 3 5
E 0 0
2 0 2 2 0
0
E

AM/6-108
na<x
07.94
A V S N N S
R R
O E
N N

P P P P P P P P
P P P P P P
nmfa<m
M
nx
7
(
( ( (
( (
h h
m m
AM/6-109
mh
5
S
4
m m
AM
0
0 0
1 1
0 0
s
S
M
M M M
M G M G
O S S T

07.94

5
S
4
m m d d
1 4
1 0 5
s s
% %
k
0
5 5
5 9
h d h
m m
% % % % V
0 0 1 0 0 0
6
s
d d
0
1 1 1
AM
0 0
s
S
0 0
0 00
0 0
0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 4 4 4
G M M M M M M
1 14 1
2 2 4 4 3 4
G G M M G G
M M
4 2
M M M M
4 4 4
4 2
d
D
Mdfd<d
S M P
P
I
P P P P P P P
AM/6-110
I I
1 A2
P P PP P P
R R
C W T
C S S
FF T
C MA C O
P P P PP P P P PP P P P

07.94

5
S
4
hh
h h
0
h h
0
hi
0 0
i i i
0
0 0 0 1 7 3 1 1 1 9
31 1
0 0
0
AM
0
s
S
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0
0
s
1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 3 3 5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 5
M
A S A S A S
S O OT OT T T T T T T T
P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P

FC P
( ( (
AM/6-111
07.94

5
S
4
d
1
m
0
AM
m
0
m
0
s
m
m
1
I
0
1
2
F s
3
F
2
M
2
M
M M F
D
S
AM/6-112
P P

07.94

5
S
4
m m
s
h
AM
0
F s
M M
M M
M C
M A

M M
0 0
AM/6-113
07.94

5
S
4
d h h
d d h h h h h h
h hd h
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
1
1
2
k
d d d d d d h h h
4 5 2 20 0 0 1
7
h h
AM
0 0 0
0 0 0 0
F ws
S
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5
0 0
1 1
0 0
0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 5 5
55 55 5 5 5
S S S
P P P P P P P P
AM/6-114
S S S T T
P P
P P
A
P P
P P P P
P P P P P P P P P P
S AC V
D D
(( (

07.94

DC
2
U
U
A
mmm
dd1
ddd
k g
hh
U
I M
k AV
S 3
88
7S
0
R
H
m
PPPP
N
PPPPPPP
1 155 2 2
N
PPPPPPPPP
N
PPP
PPPPPPPP
h m
AM
( (
PP
C IP
P MM F MP R R R R R M
PC EPM SR SR
MSSCPP
C

PP
SP
I M CS
I OO
AM/6-115
07.94
AM
AM/6-116

Spare parts (Sp)

1
2
Compone
.....................................................
nts
....
Accessori . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
es
.....
2.1
Connecto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rs
....
2.2
Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
le
.....
2.3
Fus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
es
.....
2.4
Connecting clamps for cable
..........................
shields
..
ES/1-3
ES/2-5
ES/2-5
ES/2-6
ES/2-6
ES/2-6
ES

07.94
ESi
1 Components
Spare parts (Sp)
Components
All of the components listed in Catalogs NC 60.1 and NC Z (motors, modules,

control boards, cables, connectors, etc.) are available as spare part.
ES

1 Components
ES/1-3
07.94
Spare parts (Sp)
ES
ES/1-4
07.94

2.1 Connectors
Spare parts (Sp)
ES/2-5
Accessories
2.1
Connectors
When required, the connectors listed in Table 2-1 (customer interfaces) can be
ordered as spare parts.
Table 2-1
Connectors
Pin No./connector type
Grid dimension
Order No. MLFB
5.08
6SY9433
5.08
6SY9906
5.08
6SY9432
5.08
6SY9896
5.08
6SY9898
8
8 1)
5.08
6SY9897
7.60
6SY9900
12
5.08
6SY9901
13
5.08
6SY9903
15
5.08
6SY9902
Power connector
motor connection
3 pin
6SY9904
Power connector
pulsed resistor connection
3 pin
6SY9905
Connector, BERO, temperature sensor

The external radial blower is connected via a connector, which is comprised of
the following components from the AMP company:
Connector housing MateNLok
3507661
Crimp contacts
9268841
1) only for connector X181 at the supply infeed modules

ES
2.2
07.94
Spare parts (Sp)

Cable
2.2
Cable
50 mm equipment bus cable, Item No. 462 0080126.00
2.3
Fuses
Refer to the Planning Guide for recommended line fuses.
2.4
Connecting clamps for cable shields

Refer to the Planning Guide (dimension drawings).
ES
ES/2-6

07.94
Index
A
Adaptation tables, VS/1-5, VR/1-5
Address, RAM variables, HS/6-112
Addresses, RAM variable, AM/6-107
Analog output, HS/3-65
Fine normalization, HS/3-67
M/Mrated display, HS/3-67
nact display, HS/3-67
P/Pmax display, HS/3-67
Parameterization DAU 1, DAU 2, HS/3-66
Analog outputs, AM/3-48
Connection for analog displays, AM/3-50
Parameterization DAU, AM/3-49
Bit, HS/1-6
Block diagram, component side, VR/9-32
Block diagram, MSD option board, VS/9-52
Block diagram, parameter board, VS/9-53
Block diagram, solder side, VR/9-33
Board code, HS/2-25
Builtin motors, HS/6-102
C axis, HS/2-30
Caxis, HS/2-24, HS/3-57
Caxis operation, VS/5-39
Cable, ES/2-6
Changeover speed, AM/2-18, AM/2-21
Code numbers for the power module and standard motors, HS/6-99
Component replacement, HS/1-7, AM/1-8
Component side, VR/3-18, VR/9-32
Connection overview
Connecting diagram, HS/6-104
Connecting terminals, HS/6-105, AM/6-105
Connection diagram, AM/6-104
Relay terminals, HS/6-106, AM/6-106
Star/delta changeover, HS/6-107
Connections, HS/1-13, AM/1-14
Connector assignment, VR/9-35
for Bero, HS/6-109
Motor encoder signal output, HS/6-110
Spindle encoder cable, HS/6-109
Connectors, ES/2-5
Control parameters, AM/1-10
Current actual value normalization, VS/1-4,
VR/1-5
Current controller, HS/4-75, AM/4-57
Current controller gain, VS/1-4, VR/1-5
Current controller setting, VS/1-3, VR/1-5

Current derating for inverter clock frequencies >
3.2 kHz, HS/1-11
Current reduction at inverter clock frequencies >
3.2 kHz, AM/4-58
Current setpoint limiting, VR/3-17
DAU, HS/3-66, AM/3-48

DC link voltage, AM/2-16
Diagnostic parameters, HS/5-81, AM/5-79
Diagnostics, VS/8-45, VR/8-29, HS/5-77, AM/5-75
Display, HS/2-24, HS/5-87, AM/2-22, AM/5-87
Display elements, of the monitoring and NE modules, NE/2-7
Display elements of the feed modules, VS/8-45
Display parameters, HS/2-24, HS/5-77, AM/2-22
Drift offset, VS/2-23, VR/2-16
Electronic weight equalization, VS/3-30, VS/3-32,

VR/3-19
Encoder phase error correction, HS/2-26
Equipment status, HS/2-24, AM/2-22
Fault, HS/5-91, AM/5-88

acknowledgment, HS/5-87, AM/5-87
display, HS/5-87, AM/5-87
suppression, HS/5-87, AM/5-87
Fault display, VS/8-46
Fault message, VR/3-18, AM/5-88
Field controller, AM/4-59, AM/4-69
Fieldweakening range, AM/2-21, AM/4-65
Filter, HS/4-74
Firmware release, AM/2-23
Firmware replacement, HS/1-7, AM/1-7
Firmware version, HS/2-25
Fixed setpoints, AM/3-38
Flux adaptation, HS/2-51
Functions via fixed values, VS/5-38
Gain Kp, VR/2-15

Gain Kp with adaptation, VS/2-21
Gain Kp without adaptation, VS/2-18
Gearbox stage, HS/2-24, AM/2-22

Index-1
07.94
Multimotor operation, AM/2-27

Hexadecimal numbers, HS/1-6
Initialization, AM/2-16, AM/2-21

Special motors, HS/2-17
Star/delta motors, HS/2-20
Initializing, Standard motors, HS/2-15
Input terminals, AM/3-40
Input terminals , HS/3-56
Integral action time limiting, VR/3-18, VR/3-20
Integral action time TN without
VS/2-19
Integral action time with adaptation, VS/2-20
Integral action time/speed controller, VR/2-16
Integrator inhibit, VR/3-18
Interfaces, AM/6-106
Inverter clock frequency, HS/3-57, HS/4-76,
AM/4-57
LED display, VR/8-29

Limit value stages, VS/5-37
Limiting the I component, VS/2-22
Limits, AM/4-61
M19, HS/2-24, HS/2-29

Magnetizing reactance, AM/4-71
Main field reactance , AM/2-18
Maintenance and diagnostics, VS/8-45, VR/8-29
Manual optimization, AM/4-64
Master/slave, VS/3-29, VR/3-18, VR/3-19
Master/slave operation, HS/2-43
Maximum speed monitoring, AM/2-23
Measured value displays, HS/5-77, AM/5-75
Minimal/maximum value memory, AM/5-83
Minimum speed, HS/3-55
steadystate, AM/4-62
Module replacement, HS/1-7, AM/1-8
Moment of inertia, AM/2-17, AM/4-53, AM/4-56,
AM/6-98
Monitor function, AM/2-36
Motor changeover, AM/2-32
Motor code number, HS/6-99
Motor data set, HS/2-18, HS/2-21, AM/2-17
Motor rotor resistance, AM/2-17, AM/4Motor temperature monitoring, HS/2-28, AM/2-25
Motorized potentiometer function, AM/3-37
MSD option board, VS/9-52
Index-2
Noload current, AM/4-70

Noload currents, AM/4-59
Noload motor current, AM/4-70
Normalization of the M/P display, VS/5-37
Openloop controlled range, AM/4-60

Openloop current/frequency control, AM/5-86
Openloop torque control operation, HS/2-43
Openloop torque controlled mode
Master drive, HS/2-43
Slave drive, HS/2-43, HS/2-44
Torque setpoint, HS/2-44
openloop torque controlled mode, torque setpoint, HS/2-43
Openloop torque controlled operation, Function
description, HS/2-43
Operating display, VS/8-45, HS/2-24, AM/2-22
Operating mode, HS/2-24, AM/2-22
Master, speed controlled, VR/3-18
master, speed controlled, VR/3-20
Master, speed controlled , VR/3-19
Slave, current controlled, VR/3-18, VR/3-19
slave, current controlled, VR/3-20
Operator control and display elements, HS/1-8,
AM/1-9
Optimization, openloop controlled range,
AM/4-60
Oriented spindle stop, HS/2-29
Oscillation, HS/2-28
Oscillation mode, AM/2-26
Output terminals, HS/3-59, AM/3-43
Parallel operation, AM/2-27

Parameter
attributes, HS/1-5
Listing, AM/1-5
Number, AM/1-9
Subparameter number, AM/1-9
Transfer into FEPROM, HS/1-9
Value, AM/1-9
write protection, HS/1-6
Parameter board, VS/9-53
Parameter changeover for Caxis operation,
VS/5-39
Parameter list, AM/6-108
Parameter set changeover, AM/2-32

07.94
Parameters
Attributes, AM/1-5
gearboxstage dependent, HS/1-8
list, HS/1-5
Number, HS/1-8
number, HS/1-5
Setting range, HS/1-5, HS/1-6, AM/1-5,
AM/1-6
Subparameter number, HS/1-8
Value, HS/1-8
Write protection, HS/1-9, AM/1-6
Phase sequence of tracks A, B (WSG), VR/3-17
Pole numbers, VR/1-3
Position processing, VR/3-17
Power derating, AM/4-57
Power module code number, HS/6-99, AM/2-16
Poweringup, VR/7-27
Proportional gain Kp, VR/2-15
Proportional gain Kp with adaptation, VS/2-21
Proportional gain Kp without adaptation, VS/2-18
Pulse number of the WSG interface, VR/3-17
RAM variable, AM/6-107

RAM variables, HS/6-112
Rampfunction generator, HS/4-70, AM/4-54
tracking, AM/4-54
Rampup time, NE/2-10, VS/5-35
Reinitialize drive converter, HS/1-7, AM/1-7
Relay function, HS/2-24, AM/2-22
Control word, messages, HS/3-62, AM/3-46
Freelyprogrammable, HS/3-59
freelyprogrammable, AM/3-44
Messages which can be parameterized,
HS/3-62
messages which can be parameterized,
AM/3-46
Permanentlywired, HS/3-59
permanentlywired, AM/3-43
variable, HS/3-63, AM/3-47
RS232C interface, AM/1-7, AM/1-14
Series machines, HS/1-7, AM/1-8

Setpoint interfaces, VR/4-21
Setpoint priority, AM/3-39
Setting data, HS/1-12, AM/1-13
Setting elements
with standard interface, VS/3-25, VR/4-21,
VR/4-22
with userfriendly interface, VS/3-29
Setting settings, VS/1-3
Setting the integral action time, VR/2-16
Setting and checking data, AM/6-108
Settings via fixed values, VS/5-38
Shutdown without overshoot, AM/4-63

Shutdown without reverse rotation, AM/3-40
Slip monitoring, HS/2-45, HS/3-57
Smoothing, VR/3-18
Speed setpoint, HS/3-57, HS/4-69, HS/4-70,
HS/4-76
Torque setpoint, HS/4-73
Solder side, VR/3-18, VR/9-33
Special motors
Flux setpoint characteristic, HS/2-19
initialize, HS/2-17
Magnetizing inductance-Characteristic,
HS/2-19
Motor data set, HS/2-18
Speed actual value normalization, VR/1-4
Speed controller
Adaptation, HS/4-72, AM/4-55
Gain, HS/4-71, AM/4-55
Integral action time, HS/4-71, AM/4-55
Speed controller clock, AM/4-56
Speed range suppression, AM/4-63
Speed ranges, AM/4-62
Speed setpoint interface, HS/3-53
Channel selection, HS/3-53
Minimum speed, HS/3-55
Normalization, HS/3-54
Smoothing, HS/3-57
Unipolar input, HS/3-54
Speed setpoint interfaces, AM/3-37
Channel selection, AM/3-37
Setpoint priority, AM/3-39
Speed setpoint smoothing, HS/4-69, HS/4-70
Speed setting value, HS/2-26, AM/2-23
Spindle positioning, HS/2-30
Diagnostic parameters, HS/2-41
Function description, HS/2-30
Position controller, HS/2-36
Position reference value, HS/2-32, HS/2-33,
HS/2-34, HS/2-40, HS/2-41, HS/3-57
Relay signal, HS/2-33
Search speed, HS/2-31, HS/2-32, HS/2-38,
HS/2-40
Short startup, HS/2-42
Zero mark, HS/2-31, HS/2-33, HS/2-34,
HS/2-35, HS/2-38, HS/2-41, HS/3-57
Zero pulse, HS/2-32, HS/2-37, HS/2-42
Standard applications, HS/1-4, HS/2-24, HS/2-26,
AM/1-4, AM/2-22
Setting parameters, AM/2-23
Standard interface, VS/1-3
Standard motors, , HS/2-15
Standard settings, VR/1-3
Standard startup, VS/1-3, VR/1-3

Index-3
07.94
Star/delta motors, HS/6-101

Flux setpoint characteristic, HS/2-22
Initialization, HS/2-20
Magnetizing inductanceHS/2-22
Motor changeover, HS/2-23
Motor data set, HS/2-21
Startup
instructions, AM/1-7
possibilities, AM/1-7
instructions, HS/1-7
New startup, AM/6-92
possibilities, HS/1-7
Short startup, VS/1-3, VR/1-3
Standard startup, VS/1-3, VR/1-3
Startup steps, VRii
startup steps, VSii
with main spindle drive option, VS/5Status display
active functions 1, AM/5-77
active functions 2, AM/5-78
Active terminal function, HS/5-79, HS/5-80
binary inputs, AM/5-76
Status displays, Binary inputs, HS/5-78
Steadystate minimum speed, AM/4-62
Subparameter number, HS/1-8, AM/1-9
Supplementary setpoint, VS/3-29
Tachometer adaptation, VS/1-3

Tachometer adjustment, VS/2-18, VR/2-14
Terminal function
assignment, HS/3-57, AM/3-41
freelyprogrammable, AM/3-41
Permanentlywired, HS/3-56, AM/3-40
Index-4
Terminal functions, Freelyprogrammable,

HS/3-57
Terminals, VR/9-31
Test sockets, VR/8-29, VR/8-30, HS/5-82,
AM/5-80
Test sockets and display elements
Standard interface, VS/8-47
Userfriendly interface, VS/8-45
Timer, VS/3-29
Timer stage, VR/3-18
TN (integral action time), VR/2-16
Torque limit, AM/2-24
Torque limit value, HS/2-27
Torque limiting, VS/5-36
Torque setpoint smoothing, HS/4-73
Total moment of inertia, AM/4-56
Transient recorder function, HS/5-84, AM/5-84
Travel to endstop, VS/3-29
Troubleshooting, VS/8-48
Type plate, AM/1-14
Uncontrolled line supply infeed, HS/2-16

Userfriendly interface, VS/1-3
Watercooled motors, HS/6-101
Zero mark offset, VR/3-17


SIMODRIVE 611 Analog System Transistor PWM Inverters For AC Feed Drives and AC Main Spindle Drives

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SIMODRIVE 611 Analog System Transistor PWM Inverters For AC Feed Drives and AC Main Spindle Drives

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SIMODRIVE 611 Analog System

Transistor PWM Inverters for

SIMODRIVE 611 Analog System

Equipment series 6SN11

Main spindle modules

Induction motor modules

Overview of SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FMNC Documentation (08.97)

Manufacturer / Service Documentation

Dieses Buch ist Bestandteil der Dokumentation auf CDROM (DOCONCD)

6FC5 1986CA000AG0 (840C Read)

6FC5 1986CB000AG0 (840C Print)

6FC5 1986CC000AG0 (840C Net)

6FC5 2984CA000AG0 (840D Read)

6FC5 2984CB000AG0 (840D Print)

6FC5 2984CC000AG0 (840D Net)

Functions may be executable in the control but are not described in

This publication was produced on Interleaf V 5.4

Siemens AG 1994, 1996, 1997 All Rights reserved.

We have checked the contents of this document to ensure that they

Order No. 6SN11970AA600BP4

Siemens AG 1997 All Rights reserved

SIMODRIVE 611A Installation and StartUp Guide/IAA/04.97 Edition

Siemens AG 1997 All Rights reserved

Siemens AG 1997 All Rights reserved

Electro Static Devices

you are continuously grounded through an ESDS wristlet,

Boards may only be placed on conductive surfaces

the measuring equipment is grounded (e. g. via the protective

for floating measuring equipment, the probe is briefly discharged

Only hold the control modules at the front panel

Siemens AG 1997 All Rights reserved

SINUMERIK and SIMODRIVE

Sophisticated industrial electronics, as are involved here, have to be handled

Siemens AG 1997 All Rights reserved

line supply conditions

Further detailed information is provided in the Planning Guides and Installation

Siemens AG 1997 All Rights reserved

Siemens AG 1997 All Rights reserved

General information (AL)

Permissible combinations of inverter modules

Siemens AG 1997 All Rights reserved

Siemens AG 1997 All Rights reserved

1 Permissible combinations of inverter modules and control modules

Permissible combinations of inverter

Parameter board, feed

Main spindle option, feed

6SN112 1AA0 0GA

108A inverter module

6SN112 1AA0 0FA

Siemens AG 1997 All Rights reserved

1 Permissible combinations of inverter modules and control modules

200A inverter module

6SN112 1AA0 0FA

6SN112 1AB0 0CA

6SN112 1AB0 0BA

6SN112 1AB0 0AA0

6SN112 1AB0 0HA0

6SN112 1AA0 0KA0

6SN112 1AA0 0JA

This StartUp Guide is valid for the following

1axis feed drive module, userfriendly interface

1axis feed drive module, userfriendly interface

1axis feed drive module, standard interface